Table of Contents
- LBP6780x
- Before You Start
- Important Safety Instructions
- About This Printer
- Maintenance
- Printer Installation
- Installing the Software
- Basic Printer Operations
- Printing on Various Types of Paper
- Useful Printing Functions
- Printing from a Computer (Windows)
- Printing from a Computer (Macintosh)
- Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods)
- Functions Which Can Be Specified from the Control Panel
- Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print)
- Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print)
- Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)
- Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client
- Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print)
- Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print)
- Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt Printing)
- Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer)
- Checking Your Network Environment
- Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
- Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode
- Setting the Spooling Function
- Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time
- Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol
- Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication
- Network Setting Items
- Initializing the Network Settings
- Checking the MAC Address
- Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)
- Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare)
- Network Settings for the Printer (SMB)
- Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)
- Managing the Printer
- Software That Can Be Used for Managing the Printer
- Managing Print Jobs
- Control Panel Setting
- Setting Items
- [Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options)
- [Setup] Menu ([Check Counter] Options)
- [Utility Menu] Menu
- [Job] Menu
- [Reset] Menu
- [Select Feeder] Menu
- Checking the Number of the Printed Pages
- Importing and Exporting Settings
- Initializing the Settings
- Checking the Printer Settings
- Setting the Administrator Password
- Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information
- Sleep Mode
- Auto Shutdown
- Printing Silently
- Specifying an ID for Each Department
- Register/Update Software Function
- Security Settings
- Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings
- Restricting the Users Who Can Access
- Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs
- Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users
- Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function)
- Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print
- Setting Keys and Certificates
- Setting CA Certificates
- Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function
- Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function
- Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display
- MEAP
- Available Functions
- Launching and Closing SMS
- MEAP Application Settings
- System Settings
- List of Error Messages (MEAP)
- Errors Relating to the [Login] Page
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page
- Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page
- Other Errors
- Troubleshooting
- Printing Cannot Be Performed
- The Printer Takes a Long Time to Start the Print Job
- You Cannot Turn the Printer ON
- All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off
- You Cannot Install the Printer Driver
- You Cannot Uninstall the Printer Driver
- The Printer Driver Settings Cannot Be Changed
- "Profiles" Cannot Be Selected or Edited
- The Status of the Paper Feeder Cannot Be Obtained Automatically
- Paper Jams
- The Message Indicator Is On
- A Message Appears in the Control Panel
- Poor Printout Results
- Paper Curls
- Paper Creases
- White Streaks (Lines) Appear
- Printing Is Uneven
- Printed Pages Have White Specks
- Toner Stain or Toner Peeling Occurs
- The Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks
- The Printed Paper Has Vertical Streaks
- Smudge Marks of Spattering Toner Appear around the Text or Patterns
- The Back of the Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks
- The Overall Print Result Is Dark
- Residual Images Appear on Non-printed Areas
- White Dust Is Attached to the Printed Transparencies
- The Overall Print Result Is Faint
- The Printing Position Is Skewed
- A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
- Data Is Reduced and Printed
- The Next Page Is Printed from Halfway across the Previous Page
- Printed Data Lies outside Paper
- Blank Paper Is Output (Nothing Is Printed on the Paper)
- The Overall Surface of the Paper Is Printed in Black Completely
- The Last Page Cannot Be Printed
- Unreadable Characters Are Printed
- The Printout Is Different from What Is Displayed on Screen (Windows XP and Server 2003)
- The Flap of the Printed Envelope Sticks
- Multiple Sheets of Paper Are Fed at a Time
- Other Problems
- The Keys on the Control Panel Do Not Function
- The SD Card Cannot Be Used
- Jobs Cannot Be Saved
- SSL Cannot Be Enabled
- When SSL Is Enabled, the Remote UI Does Not Start, or the IPP Printing Cannot Be Performed
- The Printer Cannot Be Accessed from the Remote UI or Network Related Utility Software
- Restricting the Users Is Not Possible
- Noise Is Heard during Printing
- If You Cannot Solve a Problem
- Appendix
Canon LBP6780x User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for LBP6780x by Canon which is a product in the Laser Printers category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Before You Start 12
Legal Notices 13
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images 15
Using the e-Manual 16
How to Use the e-Manual 17
Operating Environment 18
Installing the e-Manual 19
Uninstalling the e-Manual 22
Screen Layout of the e-Manual 23
Top Page 24
Topic Page 26
Site Map 27
Search Method 28
Viewing the e-Manual 29
Disclaimer 31
Copyright 32
Trademarks 33
Important Safety Instructions 34
Installation 35
Power Supply 36
Handling 37
Maintenance and Inspections 39
Consumables 41
Others 42
About This Printer 43
Printer Specifications 44
Introduction of the Optional Accessories 47
Names and Dimensions of Each Part 49
Control Panel 53
Introduction of the Utilities 56
Energy-saving Mode 58
Cautions for Handling the Printer 59
Consumables 60
Maintenance 61
Toner Cartridge Replacement 62
Attention (Toner Cartridge) 64
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge 66
Replacing the Toner Cartridge 68
Storing Toner Cartridges 71
Adjusting the Printing Position 72
Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs 73
Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source 75
Moving the Printer 80
Cleaning and Maintaining the Printer 83
Cleaning the Inside of the Printer 84
Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer 85
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer 88
Attention (Cleaning) 90
Location of the Serial Number 91
㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Printer Installation 92
Attention (Printer Installation) 93
Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site 95
Removing the Packing Materials 97
Installing the Paper Feeder 102
Installing the Printer 109
Installing ROM 112
Installing ROM 113
Checking the ROM Installation 118
Removing ROM 120
Installing SD Card 121
Installing SD Card 122
Checking the SD Card Installation 126
Removing SD Card 128
Specifying the Printer's Initial Settings 129
Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language 130
Specifying a Type of Printer Driver 132
Connecting to a Computer 134
Installing the Software 137
For Windows 138
Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver 139
Installation 140
Other Software Program(s) 141
For Macintosh 142
Installation 143
Basic Printer Operations 144
Usable Paper 145
Precautions for Paper 148
Printable Area 150
Paper Loading and Output 152
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer 155
Attention (Paper Drawer) 158
Loading Custom Size Paper 159
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray 162
Attention (Multi-purpose Tray) 165
Registering the Paper Size 166
Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing 167
Attention (Printer Driver Configuration) 171
Turning the Printer ON/OFF 172
Attention (Turning the Printer ON/OFF) 175
Online and Offline 176
Canceling a Job 178
Operations from the Computer 179
Canceling from the Printer Control Panel 181
Outputting Data (Forced Output) 183
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) 185
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) 186
Checking the Printer Status 187
Printing on Various Types of Paper 188
㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Printing on Plain Paper, Heavy Paper, or Index Card 189
Printing on Transparencies 191
Printing on Labels 192
Printing on Envelopes 193
Printing on Custom Size Paper 195
Paper Loading Orientation 196
Useful Printing Functions 197
Printing from a Computer (Windows) 199
Printing Fundamentals 200
Printing 201
Configuring the Default Print Settings 203
Setting the Printer Options 205
Viewing the Online Help 207
Printing Functions 208
Common Functions 209
[Page Setup] Tab 210
[Finishing] Tab 211
[Paper Source] Tab 212
[Quality] Tab 213
[Device Settings] Tab 214
Scaling Documents 215
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 217
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing 219
Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing) 222
Booklet Printing 223
Poster Printing 225
Watermark Printing 227
Combining and Printing Multiple Files 229
Selecting a Profile for Printing 232
Registering a Profile for Printing 233
Printing from a Computer (Macintosh) 234
Printing Fundamentals 235
Printing 236
Configuring the Default Page Settings 239
Setting the Printer Options 241
Verifying the Printer Information 242
Manually Setting the Printer Options 246
Viewing the Online Help 248
Viewing the Driver Guide 250
Printing Functions 251
Common Functions 252
[Layout] Preferences Pane 253
[Finishing] Preferences Pane 254
[Paper Source] Preferences Pane 255
[Quality] Preferences Pane 256
[Special Features] Preferences Pane 257
Scaling Documents 258
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 259
1-sided and 2-sided Printing 261
㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Using [Presets] for Printing 264
Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods) 266
Functions Which Can Be Specified from the Control Panel 267
Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print) 269
Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function 271
Printing the PS/EPS File Using the Direct Print Function 278
Printing the TIFF/JPEG File Using the Direct Print Function 282
Printing the XPS File Using the Direct Print Function 288
Direct Printing from Command Prompt 294
Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) 295
Printing Directly from USB Memory Device 296
Print Setting Menu List 299
Changing the Default Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria 302
Remove the USB Memory Device 303
Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print) 305
How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print 307
Attention (How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print) 311
Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually 313
Printing the E-mail Receive Log List 316
Attention (Printing E-mail Sending/Receiving History) 318
When E-mail Print Fails 319
Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client 322
Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print) 324
Attention (Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print)) 326
Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) 327
Performing a Stored Job Print Using the Control Panel of the Printer 328
Displaying or Operating the Jobs Stored in a Box (Resume/Delete) 330
Automatically Deleting Files Stored in a Box 334
Changing the Box Settings 337
Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt Printing) 341
Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer) 342
Checking Your Network Environment 344
Example of a Windows Network 345
Example of a Macintosh Network 347
Example of a UNIX Network 348
Example of a Network Using a Variety of Computers 349
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) 350
Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode 351
Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up) 352
Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 354
Setting the Spooling Function 358
Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (the Settings to Be Performed First) 359
Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 361
Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time 365
Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up) 366
Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 368
Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol 372
Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication 384
Setting TLS Authentication Information 385
㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Setting TTLS/PEAP Authentication Information 391
Network Setting Items 397
Initializing the Network Settings 410
Initializing the Network Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel 411
Checking the MAC Address 412
Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) 416
Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4) 417
Setting the IP Address Using the Printer's Control Panel 418
Setting the Printer to a Static IP Address 421
Determining Which IP Address to Assign to the Printer 423
Setting the IP Address Using the ARP/PING Commands 424
Setting the IP Address Using NetSpot Device Installer 426
Configuring the Protocol Settings 427
Attention (Protocol Settings) 452
Setting IP v. 6 454
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing 462
Features of LPD 463
Features of RAW 464
Features of IPP/IPPS 465
Features of WSD 466
Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW) 467
Values for Setting a Port 474
Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS) 475
Obtaining the Public Key for This Printer When Using SSL Encrypted Communication 481
Connecting the Printer (WSD) 483
Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) 484
Attention (NetWare Network Settings) 485
Configuring NetWare 486
Configuring the Protocol Settings 490
Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) 495
Attention (SMB Network Settings) 496
Configuring the Protocol Settings 497
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing 506
Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk) 510
Macintosh Network Settings 511
Configuring the Protocol Settings 513
FTP Client (Macintosh) 519
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing 521
Managing the Printer 522
Software That Can Be Used for Managing the Printer 523
Remote UI 524
Starting the Remote UI 525
Attention (Remote UI) 528
Enabling the Remote UI 529
Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page) 531
Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links 549
FTP Client 552
NetSpot Device Installer 555
Managing Print Jobs 556
㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Attention (Job Manager) 559
Control Panel Setting 560
Attention (Control Panel Setting) 562
Setting Items 563
[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options) 564
[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options) 568
[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options) 570
[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options) 574
[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options) 576
[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options) 578
[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options) 579
[Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options) 582
[Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options) 583
[Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options) 584
[Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options) 586
[Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) 588
[Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options) 589
[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options) 590
[Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options) 591
[Setup] Menu ([Check Counter] Options) 592
[Utility Menu] Menu 593
[Job] Menu 594
[Reset] Menu 595
[Select Feeder] Menu 596
Checking the Number of the Printed Pages 598
Importing and Exporting Settings 600
Initializing the Settings 604
Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel 605
Checking the Printer Settings 607
Setting the Administrator Password 609
Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information 612
Sleep Mode 616
Auto Shutdown 619
Printing Silently 623
Performing Printing Always with Silent Mode 624
Performing Printing with Silent Mode during a Designated Time 625
Specifying an ID for Each Department 627
Register/Update Software Function 629
Available Functions 630
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications 631
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) 632
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) 635
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software 641
Updating the Firmware 642
Managing the Register/Update Software Function 652
Security Settings 655
Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings 656
Restricting the Users Who Can Access 666
Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs 672
㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users 676
Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function) 680
Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print 684
Setting Keys and Certificates 688
Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI 689
Newly Creating a Key and Its Certificate 691
Installing a Key/Certificate File on the Printer 697
Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer 699
Checking a Certificate 702
Deleting a Key and Its Certificate 704
Setting CA Certificates 705
Displaying the [CA Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI 706
Installing CA Certificate Files on the Printer 708
Registering CA Certificates in the Printer 710
Checking CA Certificates 711
Deleting CA Certificates 713
Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function 714
Selecting Keys and Certificates 715
Changing the Remote UI Settings 718
Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function 722
Displaying the [IPSec Settings] Page on the Remote UI 723
Adding a New Security Policy 725
Editing Security Policies 733
Enabling IPSec Encryption Communication 735
Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display 737
MEAP 742
Available Functions 743
Launching and Closing SMS 745
Before Launching SMS (Preparation) 746
Setting Up HTTP Communication 747
Launching SMS (Log in) 749
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in)) 752
Closing SMS (Logging Out) 753
MEAP Application Settings 754
Installing MEAP Applications 757
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications) 760
Uninstalling MEAP Applications 761
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications 763
Starting MEAP Applications 764
Stopping MEAP Applications 765
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications 767
MEAP Application License Settings 769
Adding License Files 770
Disabling License Files 773
Downloading Disabled License Files 776
Deleting Disabled License Files 779
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications 782
System Settings 785
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order 786
㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Checking Login Services 788
Setting Enhanced System Applications 790
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications 791
Starting Enhanced System Applications 792
Stopping Enhanced System Applications 793
Installing Enhanced System Applications 794
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications 797
Checking Information 798
Checking System Information 799
Checking Application Information 801
Checking License Files 802
Changing the SMS Password 803
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information 805
Managing MEAP Application Log Data 807
Downloading Log Data 808
Deleting Log Data 810
List of Error Messages (MEAP) 812
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page 813
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page 815
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page 817
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page 822
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page 823
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page 825
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages 830
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page 832
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page 833
Other Errors 834
Troubleshooting 835
Printing Cannot Be Performed 836
Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection) 837
Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection) 841
Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server) 847
The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found 851
The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed 852
The Printer Takes a Long Time to Start the Print Job 853
You Cannot Turn the Printer ON 854
All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off 855
You Cannot Install the Printer Driver 856
The Printer Is Not Recognized Automatically 857
The Printer Cannot Be Searched For 858
You Cannot Uninstall the Printer Driver 859
The Printer Driver Settings Cannot Be Changed 860
"Profiles" Cannot Be Selected or Edited 862
The Status of the Paper Feeder Cannot Be Obtained Automatically 864
Paper Jams 866
Attention (Paper Jams) 868
Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray) 870
Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer) 872
Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit) 874
㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area) 877
Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover) 879
Cleaning the Feed Roller 883
The Message Indicator Is On 886
A Message Appears in the Control Panel 890
Poor Printout Results 906
Paper Curls 908
Paper Creases 910
White Streaks (Lines) Appear 912
Printing Is Uneven 913
Printed Pages Have White Specks 914
Toner Stain or Toner Peeling Occurs 915
The Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks 916
The Printed Paper Has Vertical Streaks 917
Smudge Marks of Spattering Toner Appear around the Text or Patterns 919
The Back of the Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks 920
The Overall Print Result Is Dark 921
Residual Images Appear on Non-printed Areas 922
White Dust Is Attached to the Printed Transparencies 923
The Overall Print Result Is Faint 924
The Printing Position Is Skewed 925
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed 926
Data Is Reduced and Printed 927
The Next Page Is Printed from Halfway across the Previous Page 928
Printed Data Lies outside Paper 929
Blank Paper Is Output (Nothing Is Printed on the Paper) 930
The Overall Surface of the Paper Is Printed in Black Completely 931
The Last Page Cannot Be Printed 932
Unreadable Characters Are Printed 933
The Printout Is Different from What Is Displayed on Screen (Windows XP and Server 2003) 934
The Flap of the Printed Envelope Sticks 935
Multiple Sheets of Paper Are Fed at a Time 936
Cleaning the rubber pad in the paper drawer 937
Other Problems 939
The Keys on the Control Panel Do Not Function 940
The SD Card Cannot Be Used 941
Jobs Cannot Be Saved 942
SSL Cannot Be Enabled 943
When SSL Is Enabled, the Remote UI Does Not Start, or the IPP Printing Cannot Be Performed 944
The Printer Cannot Be Accessed from the Remote UI or Network Related Utility Software 945
Restricting the Users Is Not Possible 946
Noise Is Heard during Printing 947
If You Cannot Solve a Problem 948
Appendix 949
Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows 950
For Windows 8/Server 2012 Users 959
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode 960
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode 962
Font Samples 964
㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-008
Product Name
Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered.
In some regions where this product is sold, the following name(s) in parentheses ( ) may be registered instead.
LBP6780x (F165200)
EMC requirements of EC Directive
This equipment conforms with the essential EMC requirements of EC Directive. We declare that this product conforms with
the EMC requirements of EC Directive at nominal mains input 230 V, 50 Hz although the rated input of the product is 220
to 240 V, 50/60 Hz. Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical EMC requirements of EC Directive.
Laser Safety
This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825-1:2007 and EN60825-1:2007. This means that the
product does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser
beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external
covers, except as directed by the equipment's manuals.
The label shown below is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LÁSER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASER-TUOTE
LASERPRODUKT KLASS 1
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
International ENERGY STAR Program
Legal Notices
㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR
Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes
energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce
energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and
copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
WEEE Directive
European Union (and EEA) only.
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2002/96/EC), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or your national laws implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates
that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration
above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you
buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE)
and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment
and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.
Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved
scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/environment.
(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
License Notice
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST ® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST: Copyright © (2013) Monotype Imaging, Inc.
IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2 established by
the IPv6 Forum.
㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-001
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned,
printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A
non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain about
the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the
images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
Paper Money
Travelers Checks
Money Orders
Food Stamps
Certificates of Deposit
Passports
Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Immigration Papers
Identifying Badges or Insignias
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Selective Service or Draft Papers
Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness
Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
Stock Certificates
Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-002
Even if you do not have the supplied CD-ROM at hand, you can view the e-Manual any time if you install it on your
computer beforehand.
For the efficient use of the e-Manual, you can use several search tools to find the desired content.
How to Use the e-Manual
Operating Environment
Installing the e-Manual
Uninstalling the e-Manual
Screen Layout of the e-Manual
Top Page
Topic Page
Site Map
Search Method
Viewing the e-Manual
<To find the desired content>
Selecting between the category icons
From the top page, select a category icon you want.
"Top Page"
Searching from the site map
On the site map, you can view the list of whole sections of the e-Manual sorted by category. You can directly
display sections in a category.
"Site Map"
Whole text search function
You can search by keyword in the e-Manual. You can display the desired description from the search results by
entering a keyword you want to search. This function supports AND search.
"Search Method"
Using the e-Manual
㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-004
You need a Web browser to use the e-Manual. Operation of the following Web browsers is guaranteed.
Windows
Internet Explorer 6.0/7.0/8.0/9.0/10.0
Firefox 2.x/3.x/4.x/5.x/6.x/7.x/8.x/9.x/10.x/11.x/13.x/14.x/15.x/16.x/17.x
Macintosh
Safari 3.x/4.x/5.0/5.1/6.x
Firefox 2.x/3.x/4.x/5.x/6.x/7.x/8.x/9.x/10.x/11.x/13.x/14.x/15.x/16.x/17.x
NOTE
Enabling the script function
Enable the script function for a Web browser before using the e-Manual.
Operating Environment
㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-009
Install the e-Manual included in the supplied User Manual CD-ROM on your computer using the following procedure.
For Windows
1
Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2
Perform the following procedure.
(1) Select your language.
(2) Click [Install].
If the above screen does not appear
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
If the [AutoPlay] dialog box appears
Click [Run Maninst.exe].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears
Click [Yes] or [Continue].
(3) Read the License Agreement, and then click [Yes].
ĺThe installation starts.
Wait until the following screen disappears. (It may take a long time to install the e-Manual.)
Installing the e-Manual
㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Displaying the e-Manual
Double-click [LBP6780 e-Manual] created on the desktop.
When a security protection message appears
Perform the following procedure.
1. Click the information bar, and then select [Allow Blocked Content] from the pop-up menu.
2. Click [Yes].
NOTE
Displaying the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM
You can also display the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM without installing it in the computer you are using.
1. Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2. Select your language.
3. Click [Display manual].
Depending on the operating system you are using, a security protection message is displayed.
Allow the contents to be displayed.
For Macintosh
1
Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
2
Drag and drop the [uk_LBP6780 _Manual] folder into a location where you want to save it.
NOTE
Displaying the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM
You can also display the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM without installing it in the computer you are using.
1. Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2. Double-click the [uk_LBP6780 _Manual] folder.
3. Double-click [index.html].
㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00A
The process of removing the e-Manual to restore the computer to the same state as before the e-Manual was installed is
referred to as uninstallation. To uninstall the e-Manual, perform the following procedure.
For Windows
Delete the files in the following locations manually.
Manual folder
The "uk_LBP6780 _Manual" folder in "C:\Documents and Settings\(user name)\My Documents\Canon\LBP\Manuals"
The "uk_LBP6780 _Manual" folder in "C:\Users\(user name)\Documents\Canon\LBP\Manuals"
The "LBP6780 e-Manual" shortcut icon on the desktop
For Macintosh
Delete the [uk_LBP6780 _Manual] folder manually which is copied during the installation.
Uninstalling the e-Manual
㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00C
This section describes the screen layout of the e-Manual.
The page displayed right after the e-Manual starts is called "Top Page" and the manual description is called "Topic Page"
in this section.
"Site map" is displayed from [Site map] which is located on the upper right of the e-Manual.
The search panel is used to make search through the e-Manual.
The screen layout is different for each page, so click the following links to see the instruction.
Top Page
Topic Page
Site Map
Search Method
Screen Layout of the e-Manual
㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00E
(1) [Handling the Printer]
This section describes the precautions and maintenance methods for handling the printer, and so on.
(2) [Printing]
This section describes a variety of printing methods, such as basic printing and advanced one that uses the various
printing functions.
How to load paper is also described here.
(3) [Configuring and Managing the Printer]
This section describes how to specify the network settings, how to manage the printer, and so on.
(4) [Frequently Asked Questions]
Frequently asked questions are featured.
For details on the solutions for the other problems, see [Troubleshooting].
(5) [Installation]
This section describes how to install this printer, how to install the printer driver, and so on.
(6) [Search]
The search panel is displayed by entering keyword(s) and clicking [ ].
For details, see "Search Method."
(7) [Top]
The top page of the e-Manual is displayed.
(8) [Site map]
The entire contents of the e-Manual are displayed.
(9) [Help]
How to use the e-Manual is displayed.
(10) [Disclaimers]
The disclaimers are displayed.
(11) [Copyright]
The information of copyrights is displayed.
(12) [Trademarks]
The trademarks are displayed.
(13) [Third Party Software]
The information about the third party software is displayed.
Top Page
㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(14) [Office Locations]
Inquiries for this printer are displayed.
㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00F
(1) Chapter contents
This is the list of the contents in the chapter. Clicking each item displays the description in the topic page.
Click [ ] to expand a menu, and click [ ] to collapse a menu.
Alternatively, click [ Expand all ] to expand all menus, and click [ Collapse all ] to collapse all menus.
(2) Topic page
The descriptions of each item are displayed.
The current location of the displayed topic is displayed at the upper left of the topic page. Click a link to move to a
higher level.
(3) [Chapter] menu
You can select a different chapter from the pull-down menu.
(4) [Contents] tab
Click to display the chapter contents panel.
(5) [Search] tab
Click to display the search panel.
For details, see "Search Method."
(6) [ ]
Click to display or hide the chapter contents panel/search panel.
(7) [Previous]/[Next]
Click to move to the previous or next topic.
(8) [Print this topic]
Prints only the topic page currently displayed.
(9) [Print all]
Prints all the contents in a chapter.
Topic Page
㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00H
(1) Categories
Shows the chapters of the e-Manual. Click an item to view the detailed list of the chapter.
(2) Whole contents
Shows the all chapters and sections of the e-Manual. Click an item to view the contents.
Site Map
㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00J
(1) Search
Entering a character string in [Search] on the top page or in the [Keyword] text box on the search panel and then
clicking [ ] displays the search results.
The AND search is available in the e-Manual so you can refine the search results by entering two or more keywords.
When entering keywords, enter a space between the keywords.
Example: Toner Replacement (if you want to display pages which include words, "Toner" and "Replacement")
(2) Search result
The search results for a keyword are displayed.
If there are more than 10 search results, you can see the other results by clicking [ ], [ ], or the number
which is located below the result.
(3) [Search options]
Click to display the search options.
The search options can be used to specify the chapter to search, case sensitivity, and whether to differentiate
between one- and two-byte characters.
Click [Search with these conditions] to search with the specified conditions.
Search Method
㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-005
Symbols Used in the e-Manual
The following are descriptions of warnings and cautions used in the e-Manual to explain handling restrictions, precautions,
and instructions that should be observed for your safety.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use
the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine
correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the
described operations.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
The following are examples of how control panel keys and on-screen buttons are depicted in the e-Manual.
Type Depiction in the e-Manual Example
Control panel keys [Key icon] + (Key name)[ ] ( : Job Status/Cancel)
Buttons on
computer operation
screen and so on
[Button name and so on] [OK]
Screenshots Used in the e-Manual
The contents of the screenshots used in the e-Manual are the default settings.
Depending on the system configuration, the contents of the screenshots may partly differ.
The functions of the printer driver may be changed due to upgrade.
Illustrations Used in the e-Manual
The illustrations of the toner cartridge used in the e-Manual are those for Canon Cartridge 724 H.
Viewing the e-Manual
㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Although the power cord used in this manual is as the one in the following illustration, the form of the power cord may
differ depending on the country or region.
Abbreviations Used in the e-Manual
Abbreviations of Operating Systems
In the e-Manual, operating systems are abbreviated as follows.
Microsoft Windows XP operating system Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7 operating system Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system Windows Server 2008
Microsoft Windows operating system Windows
㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-006
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS
MATERIAL.
Disclaimer
㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-007
Copyright 2013 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission
of Canon Inc.
Copyright
㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00K
Canon, the Canon logo, LBP, NetSpot, MEAP, the MEAP logo, and PageComposer are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple, AppleTalk, Mac OS, Macintosh, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
EtherTalk and LocalTalk are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright© 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Copyright© Unpublished Work of Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright© 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Trademarks
㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00L
Read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the printer.
As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user and other persons or destruction of property, always pay
attention to these instructions.
Also, as it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the
manual. Improper operation or use of this machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair
that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.
Installation
Power Supply
Handling
Maintenance and Inspections
Consumables
Others
Important Safety Instructions
㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00R
WARNING
Do not install the printer in a location near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable
substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not place the following items on the printer.
Necklaces and other metal objects
Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the power switch (1) and disconnect the
interface cables if they are connected (2). Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet (3) and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
When installing or removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn the printer OFF, unplug the power plug, and
then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the printer. Otherwise, the power cord or interface
cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
CAUTION
Do not install the printer in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations
subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the printer to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the printer. Never place the printer on
a soft surface, such as a bed, sofa, or rug. Blocking the slots can cause the printer to overheat, resulting in a fire.
Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
A damp or dusty location
A location exposed to smoke and steam, such as near a cookery or humidifier
A location exposed to rain or snow
A location near a water faucet or water
A location exposed to direct sunlight
A location subject to high temperatures
A location near open flames
When installing the printer, gently lower the printer to the installation site so as not to catch your hands between the
printer and the floor or between the printer and other equipment, as this may result in personal injury.
When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly by following the instructions in the e-Manual. If not
connected properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock.
Be careful when handling the main board or the ROM. Touching the main board or the sharp parts such as the
edges of the ROM may result in personal injury.
When moving the printer, follow the instructions in the e-Manual to hold it correctly. Failure to do so may cause you
to drop the printer, resulting in personal injury.
"Moving the Printer"
Installation
㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00S
WARNING
Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord or pull on or
excessively bend it, as this can cause electrical damage, resulting in fire or electrical shock.
Keep the power cord away from all heat sources. Failure to do so can cause the power cord insulation to melt,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a loose connection and cause overheating, which could
result in a fire.
The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on, fixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it.
Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.
Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this can result in electrical shock.
Do not plug the power cord into a multi-plug power strip, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not bundle up or tie up the power cord in a knot, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Insert the power plug completely in the AC power outlet. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.
If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the power cord, it may damage the power cord or the wires
inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a fire. Avoid the following situations:
Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently.
Tripping over the power cord.
The power cord is bent near the connection part, and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the
connection part.
Applying a shock to the power connector.
Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
CAUTION
Do not use a power supply voltage other than that listed herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power plug. Do not pull on the power cord, as this may expose
the core wire of the power cord or damage the cord insulation, causing electricity to leak, resulting in a fire or
electrical shock.
Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the
power plug, you may be unable to unplug it in an emergency.
Power Supply
㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00U
WARNING
Do not disassemble or modify the printer. There are high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the
printer which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly. Do not allow children to touch the power cord, cables,
internal gears, or electrical parts.
If the printer makes an unusual noise or emits smoke, heat, or an unusual smell, immediately turn OFF the power
switch and disconnect the interface cables if they are connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power
outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not use flammable sprays near the printer. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside
the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Always turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power plug and interface cables before moving the printer.
Failure to do so can damage the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after moving the printer. Failure to do so can
result in an overheating and fire.
Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the printer. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or other
flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, and so on) inside the printer. If these items come into
contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are
dropped or spilled inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the interface cables if
they are connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch
the metal part of the connector, as this can result in electrical shock.
CAUTION
Do not place heavy objects on the printer. The object or the printer may fall, resulting in personal injury.
Be careful when handling the main board or the ROM. Touching the main board or the sharp parts such as the
edges of the ROM may result in personal injury.
Turn OFF the power switch when the printer will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight. Turn OFF
the printer and unplug the power plug if the printer will not be used for an extended period of time, such as for
several days.
Open or close covers and install or remove drawers gently and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your fingers.
Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the printer is not printing, the roller
may suddenly rotate and catch your hands or clothing, resulting in personal injury.
Do not take your hands off the transport guide until it moves back to its original position when tilting the transport
guide toward you. The transport guide may snap back to its original position, and this may result in personal injury.
The output slot is hot during and immediately after printing. Do not touch the area surrounding the output slot, as
this may result in burns.
Printed paper may be hot immediately after being output. Be careful when removing the paper and aligning the
removed paper, especially after continuous printing. Failure to do so may result in burns.
The laser beam used in the printer can be harmful to human bodies. The laser beam is confined in the laser
scanner unit by a cover, so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during normal printer operation. Read the
following remarks and instructions for safety.
Never open covers other than those indicated in this manual.
Handling
㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.
If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00W
WARNING
When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the printer and computer, remove the interface cables, and then unplug the
power plug. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet periodically and clean the area around the base of the power
plug's metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to remove all dust and grime. In damp, dusty, or smoky
locations, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp, which can cause a short circuit, resulting in
a fire.
Clean the printer with a well wrung out cloth dampened with water or mild detergent diluted with water. Do not use
alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with
electrical parts inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Some areas inside the printer are subject to high voltage. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the
inside of the printer, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
printer, as this can result in burns or electrical shock.
Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to
ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft,
damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation.
Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing
so may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after cleaning the printer. Failure to do so
can result in an overheating and fire.
Check the power cord and plug regularly. The following conditions may result in fire, so contact your local authorized
Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
There are burn marks on the power plug.
The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken.
The power is turned OFF or ON when bending the power cord.
The coating of the power cord is damaged, cracked, or dented.
A part of the power cord becomes hot.
Check regularly that the power cord, plug, and connector are not handled in the following manner. This may result
in a fire or electrical shock.
The power connector is loosened.
The power plug is loosened.
Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy object or by fixing it with staples.
The power cord is tied in a bundle.
A part of the power cord is put in an aisle.
The power cord is put in front of the heating appliance.
CAUTION
Never attempt to service this printer yourself, except as explained in this manual. There are no user serviceable
parts inside the printer. Adjust only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions. Improper
adjustment could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under
your Limited Warranty.
The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or
when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in
burns.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat
emitted from the fixing unit and its surroundings for a prolonged period of time. Doing so may result in low
temperature burns, even though you did not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings directly, as this may result in
burns.
If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that any pieces of paper do not remain inside the printer
according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your hands forcibly in the parts other than those directed on
the screen. Failure to do so may result in burns or injuries.
When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner cartridge, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately
Maintenance and Inspections
㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner, making it impossible to remove the toner stains.
When removing jammed paper, be careful not to allow the toner on the paper to scatter. The toner may get into
your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a
physician.
When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.
When removing a toner cartridge, remove the toner cartridge carefully so as to prevent the toner from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
consult a physician.
Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale
the toner, consult a physician immediately.
㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00X
WARNING
Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
Do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed to open flames. This may cause the toner or paper to
ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
When disposing of a toner cartridge, place the toner cartridge into a bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and
then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local regulations.
If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft,
damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation.
Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing
so may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
CAUTION
Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If the toner or other parts are
ingested, consult a physician immediately.
Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale
the toner, consult a physician immediately.
If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully or stopped at midpoint, toner may spill out. If the toner gets into your eyes
or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Consumables
㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-00Y
WARNING
The printer generates a low-level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, move away from
the printer and consult your physician immediately.
Others
㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-011
Hardware Specifications
Type Desktop Page Printer
Printing System Semiconductor laser + xerographic system
Toner fixing system On-demand fixing system
Resolution 600 dpi
Printing speed
(Plain paper (60 to
90 g/m²), when
printing A4 size
paper continuously)
40 pages/min. (1-sided printing)
20 pages/min. / 10 sheets/min. (2-sided printing)
The print speed may drop depending on the output resolution setting and the paper
settings for the size, type, orientation, and number of copies.
Warm up time
(Time from power
on to printer ready)
28 seconds or less
May vary depending on the usage conditions, such as the availability of the optional
accessories and installation environment.
Recovery time
(Time from the
sleep mode to
printer ready)
10 seconds or less when the printer is in Sleep Mode 1 (the Printer Sleep mode)
10 seconds or less when the printer is in Sleep Mode 2 (the Deep Sleep mode)*
*It is the default setting. For details on [Sleep Mode], see "Sleep Mode."
May vary depending on the output environment.
First print time
(When performing
1-sided printing on
A4 size paper and
outputting face-
down)
8.6 seconds
May vary depending on the output environment.
Paper size
Drawer 1/Drawer 2, 3 (Optional)
Standard sizes:
A4, B5, A5, A6, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, Foolscap, and 16K
Custom paper sizes*:
Width 105.0 to 215.9 mm, Length 148.0 to 355.6 mm
If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 148.0
to 215.9 mm wide and 148.0 to 215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
Multi-purpose tray
Standard sizes:
A4, B5, A5, A6, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, Foolscap, 16K, Index Card,
Envelope DL, Envelope No.10, Envelope ISO-C5, and Envelope Monarch
Custom paper sizes*:
Width 76.2 to 215.9 mm, Length 127.0 to 355.6 mm
If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 127.0
to 215.9 mm wide and 127.0 to 215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
*Width must not be greater than length (height).
Drawer 1/Drawer 2, 3 (Optional): Approx. 500 sheets
Printer Specifications
㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Paper capacity Multi-purpose tray: Approx. 100 sheets
2-sided printing
Standard sizes:
A4, Legal, Letter, Foolscap
Custom paper sizes:
Width 210.0 to 215.9 mm, Length 279.4 to 355.6 mm
Paper output Face-down/Face-up
Output capacity Face-down output tray: Approx. 250 sheets
Face-up output slot: Approx. 50 sheets
Noise
(measured in
accordance with
ISO 7779, declared
noise emission in
accordance with
ISO 9296)
LwAd (declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB))
During standby: Inaudible *
During operation: 7.3 B or less
LpAm (declared A-weighted sound pressure level (bystander position))
During standby: Inaudible *
During operation: 54.5 dB
*Indicates the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779
absolute criteria for the background noise level.
Operating
environment
(Printer unit only)
Operating environment
Temperature range: 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Humidity range: 20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
Power supply 220 to 240 V (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±2 Hz)
Power consumption
(at 20°C (68°F))
Maximum: 1,400 W or less
Average during operation: Approx. 660 W
Average during standby: Approx. 15 W
Average during Printer Sleep Mode (Sleep Mode 1): Approx. 5.4 W
Average during Deep Sleep Mode (Sleep Mode 2): Approx. 1.0 W*
When the main power switch is turned OFF: 0.5 W or less
*It is the default setting. For details on [Sleep Mode], see "Sleep Mode."
Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is
inserted in the AC power outlet.
To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power
outlet.
Consumables
Toner cartridge
Canon Cartridge 724
Canon Cartridge 724 H
For details on the yield, see "Replacement Timing" in "Consumables."
Weight
Printer unit and included parts
Printer unit (excluding the toner cartridges and drum cartridge): Approx. 16.6 kg
Toner cartridge: Approx. 1.4 kg
Consumables and optional accessories
Toner cartridge (Canon Cartridge 724): Approx. 1.4 kg
Toner cartridge (Canon Cartridge 724 H): Approx. 1.7 kg
Paper Feeder Unit PF-45 (including the drawer): Approx. 5.5 kg
Controller Specifications
CPU 528 MHz + 264 MHz
㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Memory (RAM)
capacity 768 MB
Host interface
USB interface:
Hi-Speed USB × 3 (1 top and 2 back)
Network interface:
Shared 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T (RJ-45)
Full duplex/Half duplex
User interface
LCD:
132 x 65 dots
F-STN liquid crystal display
LED indicator:
9
Operation key:
12
ROM slot 1
SD card slot 1
Software Specifications
Built-in control command PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, UFR II, PDF, and XPS
Built-in fonts
PCL:
93 Scalable fonts, 10 Bitmap fonts
PS:
136 standard fonts
Printable area
PCL5e/PCL6:
Data cannot be printed within a 4.2 mm margin (10 mm margin for envelopes) on all
sides of the paper.
UFR II/PS:
Data cannot be printed within a 5 mm margin (10 mm margin for envelopes) on all
sides of the paper.
For details, see "Printable Area."
Network interface
Supported protocol
TCP/IP (Frame type: Ethernet II)
AppleTalk
NetWare
SMB (option)
Print application
LPD
RAW
IPP/IPPS
FTP
WSD
㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-012
The following optional accessories are available to make full use of the printer functions.
For the optional accessories, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Paper Feeder
You can load up to 500 sheets of plain paper (75 g/m²) of the following sizes in the paper feeder.
Standard sizes A4, B5, A5, A6, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, Foolscap, and 16K
Custom paper sizes Width 105.0 to 215.9 mm, Length 148.0 to 355.6 mm*
*If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 148.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 148.0
to 215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
Paper Feeder Unit PF-45
IMPORTANT
Use a paper feeder designed for this printer.
Be sure to use a paper feeder designed for this printer.
NOTE
How to install the paper feeder
"Installing the Paper Feeder"
The number of installable paper feeders
You can install up to two paper feeders.
Barcode ROM
The following function is available by installing Barcode Printing Kit-F1.
<Bar code fonts for bar code printing>
OCR-B
Symb. FontInform
Symbole stethos
BarDIMM ©1997
USPS ZEBRA+4Stat
Introduction of the Optional Accessories
㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Barcode Printing Kit-F1
NOTE
How to install Barcode Printing Kit-F1
"Installing ROM"
SD Card
You can use an SD card that can be built in the printer to save the received print jobs temporarily. By installing the SD
card, you can use various functions such as print job spooling, encrypted secured print, secured print, and electronic sort.
Before you dispose of this product, prevent personal information from being leaked by physically destroying the product.
NOTE
How to install the SD card
"Installing SD Card"
㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-013
Part Name
Front View
NOTE
About the film attached to the control panel
Remove it before using the panel.
(1) Output Tray (4) Ventilation Slot (7) USB Memory Slot (10) Multi-purpose Tray
(2) Auxiliary Tray (5) Lift Handle (8) Control Panel (11) Lock Release Switch
(3) Front Cover (6) Paper Drawer (9) Open Button (12) Duplex Print Transport Guide
Rear View
Names and Dimensions of Each Part
㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Ventilation Slot (7) Serial Number (13) LAN Connector
(2) Right Cover (8) Sub-output Tray (14) USB Connector (for Computer Connection)
(3) Rear Cover (9) Tray Extension (15) USB Connector (for USB Device)
(4) Power Switch (10) SD Card Slot Cover (16) Power Socket
(5) Lift Handle (11) ACT Indicator (Green)
(6) Rating Label (12) LNK Indicator (Green)
Interior View
(1) Toner Cartridge Guide (2) Transfer Guide at the back (3) Transfer Guide at the front
Multi-purpose Tray
㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Paper Guide (2) Tray Extension (3) Auxiliary Tray
Paper Drawer
(1) Lock Release Lever (2) Paper Guide (3) Paper Level Indicator
Dimensions of Each Part
Printer
Paper Feeder Unit PF-45
㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-014
The control panel has the indicators and display which show the printer status and the keys for the printer operation.
Indicators
Name Status Refer to
(1) Ready Indicator (On)
The printer is ready to print.
(Blinking)
The printer is preparing to print.
(5) Online Indicator
(On)
Online (The printer can receive print data from the computer.)
If the printer enters Sleep Mode, the (Online) indicator is off
even when the printer is online.
"Online and
Offline"
(6) Message Indicator
(On)
A problem has occurred and printing cannot be performed.
(If the printer enters Sleep Mode when it is offline, the
(Message) indicator comes on even when no problem is occurring.)
"The
Message
Indicator Is
On"
(7) Job Indicator (On)
The printer is receiving data.
Data remains in the printer memory.
(Blinking)
The printer is processing data.
(8) Main Power
Indicator
(On)
The power of the printer is ON.
(16) Paper Source
Indicators
(On)
A paper source is selected.
Control Panel
㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(Blinking)
Printing cannot be performed because no paper is loaded.
The paper drawer is not installed.
(For the multi-purpose tray, the indicator comes on even when no
paper is loaded.)
"Paper
Loading and
Output"
Keys
Name Function
(When the printer is online)
Function
(When
the
printer
is
offline)
Function
(While the menu is displayed)
(2)
(: Job
Status/Cancel)
If pressed when the (Job) indicator is on or blinking
(When data is being processed or received), displays
the job list. Select a job from the list to cancel the job.
This key is indicated as [ ] ( : Job
Status/Cancel) in this manual.
Does not function.
(3)
(: Utility)
Displays the [Utility Menu] menu. Prints
information about the printer settings
including the current settings. This key is
indicated as [ ] ( :
Utility) in this manual.
Does
not
function.
Goes back up the previous hierarchy. This key is indicated
as [ ] in this manual.
(4)
(: Back)
Does not function. Goes back up the previous hierarchy. This key is indicated
as [ ] ( : Back) in this manual.
(5)
(: Online)
Switches between online and offline. The printer is online when the indicator under the key is on and is offline when
the indicator is off.
This key is indicated as [ ] ( : Online) in this manual.
(9)
(Energy Saver)
If [Sleep Mode] is set to a setting other than [Off], the printer enters Sleep Mode.
This key is indicated as [ ] (Energy Saver) in this manual.
(10)
(: Job)
Displays the [Job] menu. You can print
various log lists. This key is indicated as [
] ( : Job) in this manual.
Does
not
function.
Selects the next upper item in the same hierarchy. When
the setting value is numeric, increases the value. If you
keep holding down the key, the speed of the value
increasing is increased depending on the item. This key is
indicated as [ ] in this manual.
(11)
(: Settings)
Displays the [Setup] menu. Configure the printing
environment including the layout adjustment and
scaling print output. This key is indicated as [
] ( : Settings) in this manual.
Goes down the hierarchy. This key is indicated as [ ] in
this manual.
(12)
(OK)
Does not function. Executes the selected item. Otherwise, goes down the
hierarchy. This key is indicated as [OK] in this manual.
(13)
(: Reset)
Displays the [Reset] menu. Performs the printer reset
operation, the print data output, and the shutdown
operation. This key is indicated as [ ] ( :
Reset) in this manual.
Selects the next lower item in the same hierarchy. When
the setting value is numeric, reduces the value. If you keep
holding down the key, the speed of the value decreasing is
increased depending on the item. This key is indicated as [
] in this manual.
(14)
(Log In/Out)
The log in screen for using MEAP functions is displayed.
If you press this key while logging in, you will log out of the printer.
(15)
,WZLOOWUDQVLWLRQWRWKH0HQX6FUHHQ:KHQHYHUWKHNH\LVSUHVVHGWKH3ULQWLQJ6FUHHQVZLWFKHVWRĺ0($3
$SSOLFDWLRQĺ0($3$SSOLFDWLRQ«0($3$SSOLFDWLRQĺ86%'LUHFW3ULQWĺ3ULQWLQJ6FUHHQĺ0HQX6FUHHQ
This key is indicated as [ ] ( : Application) in this manual.
㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
( :
Application)
If department ID management is set and you are not logged in to the printer, the log in screen before the
MEAP application display is displayed.
(17)
(: Feeder
Selection)
Displays the [Select Feeder] menu. Specify which
paper source is used to print between the paper
drawer and multi-purpose tray and the paper size.
This key is indicated as [ ] ( : Feeder Selection)
in this manual.
Does not function.
Display
The display on the printer's control panel is as shown in the following. It displays the printer status, messages, items and settings of the menu
functions.
When the printer is ready to print
When operating the printer using the control
panel
(1) Status/Operation Field
Displays the printer status and print mode.
(2) Paper Source/Paper Size Field
Displays the size of paper in the currently
selected paper source using an abbreviation.
The names of the following paper sizes are
indicated by an abbreviation. (Legal: LG,
Letter: LT, Executive: EX, Statement: ST,
Foolscap: FC, 16K: 16K, Envelope DL: DL,
Envelope No.10: CO, Envelope ISO-C5: EC5,
Envelope Monarch: MO, Index Card: IC,
Custom Size: 80 to 99, Custom SizeR: 80R to
99R, Mixed Sizes: FR)
(3) Toner Remaining Field
Displays the amount of toner remaining.
㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-015
The following useful utilities are available to perform the printer management and so on.
You can specify the various settings or operate the printer from a remote location. "Remote
UI"
By accessing and operating the printer from the Web browser via a network, you can manage the printer using a computer
in a remote location.
You can perform various operations, such as checking the current printer status or job logs and specifying various settings.
No specific software is needed.
The Remote UI can be operated in a Web browser. You do not need specific software to operate the Remote UI.
Central management of all the printer settings with the administrator password
Only the administrator can configure the settings or perform the operations related to the printer management by setting
the administrator password.
You can specify the network settings at a time. "FTP Client"
By accessing the FTP server of the printer, you can specify the network settings, security settings, and so on. Because the
setting items are listed in a file, you can specify multiple items all at once.
No specific software is needed.
You can operate the FTP Client using the Command Prompt supplied with Windows. You do not need specific software
to operate the FTP Client.
You can check the various printer statuses. "NetSpot Device Installer"
You can view the list of statuses of the Canon devices on a network easily.
Also, you can change the default network settings or basic protocol settings.
Introduction of the Utilities
㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
You do not need to install NetSpot Device Installer.
NetSpot Device Installer is software included in the supplied CD-ROM. You can start NetSpot Device Installer directly
from the CD-ROM without installing it.
You can also install NetSpot Device Installer on a computer.
㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-016
You can reduce power consumption of the printer efficiently by using a sleep mode or by shutting down the printer when it
is not used for a certain time.
Sleep Mode
You can configure the printer to enter the sleep mode when data is not sent from the computer or when the printer status
remains as it is longer than the specified time.
Auto Shutdown
You can configure the printer to shut down when the specified time is elapsed after entering the sleep mode.
Energy-saving Mode
㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-017
This printer consists of various electronic and precision optical parts. Read the following section so that you can handle the
printer properly.
Before handling the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions."
Do not place any objects other than printing paper on the printer, trays, or covers. This may result in damage to the
printer.
Avoid shaking the printer. This may result in poor print quality or damage to the printer.
Do not leave any covers open longer than required. Exposing the printer to direct sunlight or strong light may result in
deterioration in print quality.
Do not open the covers on the printer during printing. This may result in damage to the printer.
Handle each cover gently when opening or closing it. Failure to do so may result in damage to the printer.
If you want to put a cover on the printer to prevent dust from entering the printer, turn the power OFF and allow the
printer to cool down sufficiently before covering the printer.
If you do not plan to use the printer for a long period of time, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
Do not use or store the printer in a room where chemicals are used.
Cautions for Handling the Printer
㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-018
The following consumables are provided for this printer. Purchase them at your local authorized Canon dealer.
Use the following table as rough guides to replace consumables. However, you may need the replacement earlier than the
described lifetimes depending on the printer installation environment, paper size, or document type.
Consumables Replacement Timing Replacement Method
Canon Cartridge
724 Average yield: 6,000 sheets*1 *2
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
Canon Cartridge
724 H Average yield: 12,500 sheets*1 *2
*1 The average yield is on the basis of "ISO/IEC 19752"* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density
setting.
*"ISO/IEC 19752" is the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for
monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components" issued
by ISO (International Organization for Standardization).
*2 When the toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon, the following messages will appear in the control panel.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
IMPORTANT
About replacement toner cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Model Name Supported Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge
LBP6780x Canon Cartridge 724
Canon Cartridge 724 H
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges.
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace.
Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance.
Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.
NOTE
Toner and Toner Cartridge Availability
Toner cartridge for this machine will be available for at least seven (7) years (or any such longer period as required by
applicable laws) after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Consumables
㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-019
Toner Cartridge Replacement
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Storing Toner Cartridges
Adjusting the Printing Position
Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs
Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source
Moving the Printer
Cleaning and Maintaining the Printer
Cleaning the Inside of the Printer
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Location of the Serial Number
Maintenance
㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01A
For details on the yield of the toner cartridge or replacement toner cartridges, see "Consumables."
Toner cartridges are consumable products. When the toner cartridge is nearing the end of its life, the following symptoms
occur.
<16 Tnr cart. will soon reach end of lifetime.>, <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.>, <9F Check the
toner cartridge.> or <1G Change toner cartridge recommended.> appears in the Control Panel.
For details on the contents of and the solutions for the above messages, see "If a Message Appears in the
Display."
White streaks, unevenness, or faded print appears on printout results.
If these types of symptom occur
Perform the procedure described in the following section before replacing the toner cartridge. You may be able to print
for a while until the toner is used up completely.
"Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
If the printout result is not improved
If white streaks, unevenness, or faded print appears on printout results even after performing the above procedure,
replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
<In cases such as where you do not immediately replace the toner cartridge with a replacement
toner cartridge after purchasing it>
Pay attention to the points described in the following section to store it.
"Storing Toner Cartridges"
If a Message Appears in the Display
Toner cartridges are consumable products. When a toner cartridge is nearing the end of its life, a message will appear in
the display. Follow the directions in the message.
Message When it is Displayed Contents and Solutions
You can continue to print.
Toner Cartridge Replacement
㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<16 Tnr cart. will
soon reach end of
lifetime.>
When the toner cartridge
needs to be replaced soon
Have ready a new toner cartridge.
We recommend that you replace the toner cartridge
before printing a large amount of data.
<Toner cartridge will
soon reach end of
lifetime.>
When the toner cartridge
needs to be replaced soon
The printer stops printing.
Pressing [ ] ( : Online) continues the job.
Have ready a new toner cartridge.
We recommend that you replace the toner cartridge
before printing a large amount of data.
<9F Check the
toner cartridge.>
The toner cartridge may
have reached the end of its
life.
You can continue to print.
As continuing to print may result in damage to the printer,
we recommend that you replace the toner cartridge with a
new one.
<1G Change toner
cartridge
recommended.>
The toner cartridge has
reached the end of its life.
You can continue to print.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
<1H Re-insert the
toner cartridge.>
When the toner cartridge is
not installed in the proper
position
Remove the toner cartridge, and then reinstall it properly.
Whether <16 Tnr cart. will soon reach end of lifetime.> or <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.> appears
when the toner is running out depends on the setting for [Warning Step] in the [Setup] menu. The printer is set to
display <16 Tnr cart. will soon reach end of lifetime.> in the default settings. For details on the setting for [Warning
Step], see "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)."
㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01C
Before replacing the toner cartridge, see "Important Safety Instructions" and "Storing Toner Cartridges."
IMPORTANT
About replacement toner cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Model Name Supported Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge
LBP6780x Canon Cartridge 724
Canon Cartridge 724 H
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges.
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace.
Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance.
Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.
Hold the toner cartridge properly.
When handling the toner cartridge, hold it properly as shown in the figure. Do not place it vertically or upside-down.
Do not touch the electrical contacts (A) or the toner cartridge memory (B), and do not open the
drum protective shutter (C).
If you touch the electrical contacts (A) or the toner cartridge memory (B), this may result in damage to the cartridge.
Also, print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the photosensitive drum inside the toner cartridge. Do not
touch or open the drum protective shutter (C).
Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (D) or the electrical contacts (E).
This may result in damage to the cartridge.
Attention (Toner Cartridge)
㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Other precautions
Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or strong light.
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the toner cartridge.
Condensation (water droplets on the inside or outside) may form on the toner cartridge when it is brought into an
environment with a sudden change in temperature or humidity.
When moving a new toner cartridge to a location with change in temperature, leave the cartridge in the protective
bag at the new location for two or more hours to allow it to adjust to the new temperature.
Do not leave the front cover open for a long time with the toner cartridge installed.
Keep toner cartridge away from products that generate magnetic waves, such as a computer or computer display.
A toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep the toner cartridge away from products that may be damaged by
magnetism, such as a floppy disk or disk drive. This may lead to damage to data.
NOTE
About illustrations of the toner cartridge
The e-Manual describes the procedure using illustrations of Canon Cartridge 724 H.
About the packing materials
The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01E
If the message <16 Tnr cart. will soon reach end of lifetime.> or <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.> appears,
or if white streaks, unevenness, or faded print appears on printout results, perform the following procedure before replacing
the toner cartridge. You may be able to print for a while until the toner is used up completely.
Before performing the following procedure, see "Attention (Toner Cartridge)."
1
Open the front cover while pressing the open button.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
3
Shake the toner cartridge five or six times as shown in the figure to evenly distribute the toner inside
the cartridge.
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge
㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Install the toner cartridge.
Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the
toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guides inside the printer.
5
Close the front cover.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as
this may damage the printer
If white streaks, unevenness, or faded print appears on printout results even after performing the above
procedure, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01F
Before replacing the toner cartridge, see "Attention (Toner Cartridge)."
1
Open the front cover while pressing the open button.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
3
Take out the new toner cartridge from the protective bag.
You can open the protective bag with your hands from the notch.
Keep the protective bag. Do not discard it. You will need it when you remove the toner cartridge for printer
maintenance or other purposes.
4
Shake the toner cartridge five or six times as shown in the figure to evenly distribute the toner inside
the cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface.
6
Fold the tab, and then pull out the sealing tape (approx. 50 cm).
IMPORTANT
Precautions when pulling out the sealing tape
Do not pull the sealing tape diagonally, upward, or downward. If the tape is severed, this may become difficult to
pull out completely.
If the sealing tape stops at midpoint, pull it out of the toner cartridge completely. If any tape remains in the toner
cartridge, this may result in low print quality.
Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations.
7
Install the toner cartridge.
Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the
toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guides inside the printer.
㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Close the front cover.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as
this may damage the printer.
㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01H
Be careful of the following points when storing a new toner cartridge or handling a toner cartridge that was taken out of the
printer for maintenance or moving the printer.
IMPORTANT
Precautions when storing toner cartridges
To use toner cartridges in a safe and trouble-free manner, store them in a place that fulfills the following conditions.
Do not store toner cartridges in a location exposed to direct sunlight.
Do not store toner cartridges in a location subject to high temperature or humidity or in a location with dramatic
changes in temperature or humidity.
Storage temperature range: 32 to 95°F (0 to 35°C)
Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Do not store toner cartridges in a location exposed to corrosive gases, such as ammonia, salt air, or large amounts
of dust.
Keep toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
Keep toner cartridges away from products that may be damaged by magnetism, such as a floppy disk or disk drive.
Store toner cartridges in the same orientation as when they are installed in the printer.
Do not store toner cartridges vertically or upside-down.
When removing the toner cartridge which is being used from the printer
Immediately put it in the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.
About a new toner cartridge
Do not take a new toner cartridge out of the protective bag until it is ready to be used.
NOTE
About condensation
Even when toner cartridges are stored within the recommended humidity range, water droplets may form on the inside or
outside of the cartridges when moved to an environment with a sudden change in temperature or humidity. The
formation of water droplets is called condensation.
Condensation will adversely affect the quality of toner cartridges.
Storing Toner Cartridges
㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01J
If you want to adjust the printing position for all the jobs
You can adjust the printing position for all the jobs at once.
"Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs"
If you want to adjust the printing position for each paper source
You can adjust the printing position for each paper source by printing the Position Adjustment Print.
"Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source"
Adjusting the Printing Position
㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01K
Perform [Offset Y] and [Offset X] using the control panel of the printer.
IMPORTANT
Confirm the adjustment result.
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing position, the part will be missing in
the print result.
NOTE
Adjustable area
You can adjust the printing position between -50.0 mm and +50.0 mm for both the vertical direction and horizontal
direction.
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
2
Select [Layout] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select a position you want to correct.
If specifying the setting for [Offset Y]
1. Select [Offset Y] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
2. Specify the target numeric value using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs
㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Each time you press [ ], the setting value increases by 0.5 mm, and each time you press [ ], the setting value
decreases by 0.5 mm. Also, if you keep pressing [ ] or [ ] without releasing your finger, you can keep
increasing or decreasing the value.
ĺThe setting value is changed.
If specifying the setting for [Offset X]
1. Select [Offset X] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
2. Specify the target numeric value using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Each time you press [ ], the setting value increases by 0.5 mm, and each time you press [ ], the setting value
decreases by 0.5 mm. Also, if you keep pressing [ ] or [ ] without releasing your finger, you can keep
increasing or decreasing the value.
ĺThe setting value is changed.
㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01L
If the printing position is skewed when printing from a certain paper source, you can adjust the position from the control
panel.
IMPORTANT
Confirm the adjustment result.
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing position, the part will be missing in
the print result.
NOTE
Be careful of the orientation for 2-sided printing
The orientation of the images on the reverse pages varies depending on the printing orientation or setting for [Binding
Location].
Checking the Printing Position
Perform the Printing Position Adjustment Print and check the position and direction to be adjusted.
IMPORTANT
Adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing
Set [2-Sided Printing] to [On] in advance.
1
Press [ ] ( : Feeder Selection).
2
Select [Paper Source] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select the paper source that you want to check the printing position using [ ] and [ ], and then
press [OK].
When adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, select the desired paper source.
[Drawer 2] and [Drawer 3] are displayed only when the optional paper feeder(s) is (are) installed.
Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source
㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Press [ ] ( : Online).
5
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
6
Press [ ] ( : Utility).
7
Select [Printing Pos. Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
8
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺThe Printing Position Adjustment Print is printed. The top of the output paper is the top of the Printing Position
Adjustment Print.
Next, check the printout results and specify the direction and position to be adjusted in "Adjusting the Printing
Position" (See the next item).
㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Adjusting the Printing Position
Next, check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and specify the direction and position to be
adjusted.
The measurements of printed on paper are as the following:
This section describes the setting procedure for the following Printing Position Adjustment Print printed with Drawer 1
specified, as an example.
In this case, adjust "Y position" by "-5.0 mm" because the printing position of (A) should be moved upward by 5 mm.
IMPORTANT
Adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing
Adjust the printing position of the first page using [Offset Y (2-Sided)] and [Offset X (2-Sided)].
The printing position of the second page depends on the settings for each paper source.
NOTE
Adjustable area
The printing position can be adjusted within a range from -5.0 to +5.0 mm.
1
Press [ ] ( : Online).
The (Online) indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel.
2
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
3
Select [User Maintenance] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Select [Adj. Start Position] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5
Select the direction and paper source that you want to check the printing position using [ ] and [
], and then press [OK].
6
Specify the target numeric value using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and select the numerical value to adjust the position.
Each time you press [ ], the value increases in +0.1 mm increments, and each time you press [ ], the value
decreases in -0.1 mm increments. If you keep holding down [ ] or [ ], the value changes consecutively.
7
Press [ ] ( : Online).
㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
9
Press [ ] ( : Utility).
10
Select [Printing Pos. Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
11
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
The Printing Position Adjustment Print in which the setting is changed is printed.
Check the printout results to confirm the printing position. To make further adjustment, repeat Steps 1 to 11.
㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01R
When changing the location of the printer or moving the printer for maintenance, be sure to perform the following
procedure.
For details on the installation site, see "Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site."
Before moving the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions."
1
Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer.
Shut down the printer before turning it OFF.
For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF."
<How to disconnect the cable or cord>
USB cable*(2) Turn the computer OFF.
(3) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
LAN cable*(4) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet.
(6) Disconnect the cord from the printer.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
2
Pull out the paper drawer.
Moving the Printer
㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Carry the printer unit to the installation site.
After confirming that the covers and trays are closed, carry the printer by holding it by the lift handles from the front side.
If the optional paper feeder is installed
Remove the paper feeder from the printer, place the paper feeder on the new installation site, and then carry the printer to
the site.
Removing the paper feeder from the printer may be difficult. Be careful when removing the paper feeder from the printer.
Do not carry the printer with the paper feeder installed. If you do so, the paper feeder may drop resulting in personal
injury.
For details on the procedure for installing the paper feeder, see "Installing the Paper Feeder."
4
Set the paper drawer in the printer.
Push it in the printer firmly.
5
Connect the removed cable or cord.
<How to connect the cable or cord>
USB cable*Connect to the USB connector on the printer.
LAN cable*Connect to the LAN connector on the printer.
Power cord (1) Plug the power cord to the power socket on the printer.
(2) Plug the power plug in the AC power outlet.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When transporting the printer unit
To prevent damage to the printer during transport, perform the following.
Remove the toner cartridge.
Before removing the toner cartridge, see "Storing Toner Cartridges."
Securely pack the printer in the original box with packing materials.
If the original box and packing materials are not available, find an appropriate box along with packing materials and
pack the printer and the parts appropriately.
㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01S
Cleaning the Inside of the Printer
If the printed paper has smudge marks, clean the inside of the printer.
Print quality deterioration can be prevented by cleaning the inside of the printer.
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Periodically clean the outer surfaces and ventilation slots of the printer to maintain the optimal printing quality.
Cleaning and Maintaining the Printer
㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01W
If the printed paper has smudge marks, clean the fixing roller using the following procedure.
A4 or Letter plain paper is required to clean the fixing roller. Have A4 or Letter plain paper ready.
1
Load A4 size plain paper in the multi-purpose tray.
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
2
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
3
Press [ ] ( : Utility).
4
Select [Cleaning] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5
Select the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray using [ ] and [ ], and then press
[OK].
6
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺ<Insert paper to be used for cleaning.> is displayed on the display.
Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer
㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7
Press [ ] ( : Online).
ĺThe cleaning paper is printed.
ĺ<Set cleaning paper and press the Online key.> is displayed on the display.
Next, clean the fixing roller using the printed cleaning page.
8
If any paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray, remove it.
9
Load the cleaning paper with the printed side facing up and the arrow mark going into the multi-
purpose tray first.
10
Press [ ] ( : Online).
ĺThe paper is fed into the printer slowly, and the printer starts cleaning the fixing roller.
NOTE
Cleaning time
It takes approximately 80 seconds.
㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Cleaning the fixing roller cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
(The cleaning is finished when the paper is output completely.)
The front or back of the printed paper has smudge marks even after performing the above
procedure.
Perform the cleaning again. When doing so, do not use the cleaning paper output but load A4/Letter blank paper in the
multi-purpose tray, and then perform the cleaning.
㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01X
Before cleaning, see "Attention (Cleaning)."
1
Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer.
Shut down the printer before turning it OFF.
For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF."
<How to disconnect the cable or cord>
USB cable*(2) Turn the computer OFF.
(3) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
LAN cable*(4) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet.
(6) Disconnect the cord from the printer.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
2
Firmly wring a soft cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water, and wipe off
the dirt.
3
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
After wiping off the dirt, wipe the printer with a dry cloth.
4
When the printer is completely dry, connect the removed cable or cord.
<How to connect the cable or cord>
USB cable*Connect to the USB connector on the printer.
LAN cable*Connect to the LAN connector on the printer.
Power cord (1) Plug the power cord to the power socket on the printer.
(2) Plug the power plug in the AC power outlet.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-01Y
Before cleaning the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions."
IMPORTANT
Precautions when cleaning the printer
Do not use a cleaning agent other than water or a mild detergent diluted with water, as this may deform or crack
the plastic materials in the printer.
When using a mild detergent, be sure to dilute it with water.
Also, if you use a mild detergent for cleaning, be sure to wipe away the detergent with a soft cloth dampened with
water.
Grease or oil does not have to be applied to this printer. Be sure not to apply grease or oil.
Attention (Cleaning)
㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-020
The serial number is required for receiving maintenance service.
You can find the serial number at the location shown in the following figures.
Do not remove the labels on which the serial number is indicated.
Rear side of the printer
Outside view of the packaging box
Location of the Serial Number
㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-021
Perform the following procedures according to your installation preference.
Before installing the printer, see "Attention (Printer Installation)."
1
Checking before
Installing the Printer
Confirming the
Supplied
Accessories
Checking the
Installation Site
"Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site"
2Removing the
Packing Materials "Removing the Packing Materials"
3
Installing the Paper
Feeder
(Only when installing the
paper feeder)
"Installing the Paper Feeder"
Installing ROM
(Only when installing
ROM)
"Installing ROM"
Installing SD Card
(Only Installing SD Card) "Installing SD Card "
4
Installing the Printer
Carrying the Printer
to the Installation
Site
Connecting the
Power Cord
"Installing the Printer"
5
Specifying the
Printer's Initial
Settings
"Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language"
Specifying a Type of
Printer Driver "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver"
6Loading Paper "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
7Connecting to a
Computer "Connecting to a Computer"
8Installing the Printer
Driver
"For Windows"
"For Macintosh"
9Checking the
Printing Operation
Check the operations by Test Page in Windows.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Printer Installation
㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-022
Before installing the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions."
IMPORTANT
Protecting the printer from condensation
To prevent condensation from forming inside the printer in the following cases, adjust the printer to the ambient
temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.
When the room where the printer is installed is heated rapidly
When the printer is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location
If water droplets (condensation) form inside the printer, this can result in paper jams or poor print quality.
When using an ultrasonic humidifier
When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier, we therefore recommend that you use purified water or other water that is
free of impurities.
If you use tap water or well water, impurities in the water will be dispersed through the air. This can be trapped inside
the printer, causing degradation in print quality.
Precautions for the power supply
Use an AC power outlet exclusively for the printer. Do not use the other sockets of the AC power outlet.
Do not plug the power plug in the auxiliary outlet on a computer.
Do not use the same AC power outlet for both the printer and any of the following equipment.
Copy machine
Air conditioner
Shredder
Equipment that consumes a large amount of electricity
Equipment that generates electrical noise
The maximum power consumption of the printer is 1,400 W or less.
Electrical noise or a dramatic drop in mains voltage may cause the printer or computer to operate incorrectly or lose
data.
Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in damage to the printer.
A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or humidity
A location subject to condensation
A poorly ventilated location
(If you use the printer for a long time or to perform a large amount of printing in a poorly ventilated room, the ozone
or other odors generated by the printer may create an uncomfortable working environment. In addition, chemical
particles are dispersed during printing. Therefore, it is important to provide adequate ventilation.)
A location near equipment that generates magnetic or electromagnetic waves
A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
A location exposed to salt air, corrosive gases, or toxic gases
A location, such as on a carpet or mat, that may warp from the weight of the printer or where the printer is liable to
sink
Precautions when preparing the toner cartridge
If the sealing tape stops at midpoint, pull it out of the toner cartridge completely. If any tape remains in the toner
cartridge, this may result in low print quality.
For other precautions, see "Attention (Toner Cartridge)."
Precautions when connecting the power cord
Do not plug the power plug of the printer into an auxiliary outlet on a computer.
One AC power outlet should be used exclusively for the printer.
Do not connect this printer to an uninterruptible power source.
This may cause printer malfunction or breakdown in the event of a power failure.
When turning ON the printer for the first time after the printer installation
Before turning ON the printer, be sure to insert the paper drawer in the printer.
Attention (Printer Installation)
㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Although a sheet of blank paper may be output, this is not an error.
Precautions when installing the paper feeder
Do not touch the connector (A) on the paper feeder. This may result in damage to the printer or misfeeds.
If you cannot place the printer on the paper feeder properly, lift the printer once, hold it horizontally, and place it
again.
If you try to place the printer forcefully without lifting it, the connector and positioning pins may be broken.
Be sure to turn the printer ON once when loading paper in the paper drawer for the first time after installing the
paper feeder.
Precautions when installing/removing ROM
Be sure not to touch the switches on the main board. If you change the switches, the printer does not operate
properly.
Observe the following precautions when handling ROM to prevent damage from static electricity.
Touch a metal object to dissipate static electricity before handling them.
When handling ROM, do not touch anything that generates static electricity such as the computer display.
Do not touch the main board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.
Take ROM out of the protective bag right before it is installed.
Do not touch the main board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.
When installing ROM, be careful so that any metal objects such as screws do not touch the main board.
If any of screws, clips, staples, and so on should drop inside the printer, do not plug the power plug in the AC
power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not turn the printer ON without the slot cover attached. This may result in damage to the printer.
NOTE
About the toner cartridge included with this printer
The average yield of the included toner cartridges is as follows.
The average yield of the included toner cartridge is 6,000 pages.*1
*1 The average yield is on the basis of "ISO/IEC 19752"* when printing A4 size paper with the default print
density setting.
*"ISO/IEC 19752" is the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for
monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components"
issued by ISO (International Organization for Standardization).
For purchasing replacement toner cartridges, see "Consumables."
㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-023
Confirming the Supplied Accessories
Make sure that all the supplied accessories are contained in the box before installing the printer.
If an item is missing or damaged, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
IMPORTANT
Download the printer driver for Macintosh from the Canon Web site
The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download the printer driver for Macintosh that
supports this printer from the Canon Web site (http://www.canon.com/). If you cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh
that supports this printer on the Canon Web site, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
NOTE
About interface cables
This printer does not come with an interface cable. Have an appropriate one available for the computer you are
using or the connecting method.
Use a USB cable with the following symbol.
About the Supplied Manuals
The manuals supplied with this printer consist of the following. Read these manuals according to your purpose and make
full use of this printer.
Manual Name Contents
Quick Setup Guide Explains the procedure for installing the printer.
Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site
㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
e-Manual
Explains all the operations of this printer, such as how to use the printer and
troubleshooting.
(The contents of "Quick Setup Guide" are also included.)
Getting Started Guide
This is the simple manual (PDF format) written in the following languages.
Arabic, Bulgarian, Croatian, Estonian, Greek, Latvian, Lithuanian, Persian,
Romanian, Slovakian, Slovenian, Ukrainian
To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
If Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on your system, download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated
Web site.
Checking the Installation Site
In order to use this printer in a safe and trouble-free manner, install the printer in a place that fulfills the following
conditions.
Temperature and Humidity Conditions
Temperature range 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Humidity range 20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
Power Supply Requirements
220 to 240 V (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±2 Hz)
Installation Requirements
A location with sufficient space
Refer to the following dimensions of each part and ensure the installation space.
A location with good ventilation
A location with a flat, even surface
A location able to fully support the weight of the printer
㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-024
NOTE
Store the removed packing materials.
They are required when transporting the printer for relocation or maintenance.
About the packing materials
The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
Remove all the orange tape if it is attached to the printer when performing the following
procedure.
1
Open the front cover while pressing the open button.
2
Take out the toner cartridge from the protective bag.
You can open the protective bag with your hands from the notch.
Keep the protective bag. Do not discard it. You will need it when you remove the toner cartridge for printer
maintenance or other purposes.
3
Shake the toner cartridge five or six times as shown in the figure to evenly distribute the toner inside
the cartridge.
Removing the Packing Materials
㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface.
5
Fold the tab, and then pull out the sealing tape (approx. 50 cm).
IMPORTANT
Precautions when pulling out the sealing tape
Do not pull the sealing tape diagonally, upward, or downward. If the tape is severed, this may become difficult to
pull out completely.
If the sealing tape stops at midpoint, pull it out of the toner cartridge completely. If any tape remains in the toner
cartridge, this may result in poor print quality.
Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations.
6
Install the toner cartridge.
Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the
toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guides inside the printer.
㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7
Close the front cover.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as
this may damage the printer.
8
Pull out the paper drawer.
9
Remove the packing material as shown in the figure.
(1) Remove the tape, and fold the protrusions of the packing material on each side.
(2) While holding the lock release levers (A), slide the paper guides in the directions of the arrows.
㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(3) Remove the packing material.
10
Insert the paper drawer into the printer.
Push it into the printer firmly.
Check !
Checking if the packing materials are removed
Check that the following packing materials are completely removed.
Dispose of the left packing materials according to local
regulations.
*Make sure that all the orange tape is completely removed.
㻝㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Close the covers after you finish checking.
Next, perform one of the following procedures.
If you want to use the printer with optional accessories installed
Install the optional accessories before installing the printer.
"Installing the Paper Feeder"
"Installing ROM"
"Installing SD Card"
If you want to use the printer without optional accessories installed
Install the printer.
"Installing the Printer"
㻝㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-025
By installing the optional paper feeder in addition to the supplied multi-purpose tray and paper drawer, the printer can feed
up to 1,600 sheets of paper continuously and automatically.
Paper Feeder Unit PF-45
<If the printer is already installed>
When installing the paper feeder in the printer after installing the printer, move the printer to an appropriate location
temporarily.
"Moving the Printer"
For details on the precautions for when installing the paper feeder, see "Attention (Printer Installation)."
Remove all the orange tape if it is attached to the paper feeder when performing the
following procedure.
1
Take the paper feeder out of the box.
2
Pull out the paper drawer of the paper feeder.
3
Remove the packing material as shown in the figure.
(1) Remove the tape, and fold the protrusions of the packing material on each side.
Installing the Paper Feeder
㻝㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2) While holding the lock release levers (A), slide the paper guides in the directions of the arrows.
(3) Remove the packing material.
Check !
Checking if the packing materials are removed
Check that the following packing materials are completely removed.
Dispose of the left packing materials according to local
regulations.
*Make sure that all the orange tape is completely removed.
㻝㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Carry the paper feeder to the installation site.
When carrying the paper feeder, hold the lift handles on both sides with both hands.
If you want to install the two paper feeders
Gently place the other paper feeder on the one already installed.
Also, match the positioning pins (A) and connector (B) when placing another paper feeder.
5
Pull out the paper drawer of the printer.
㻝㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Carry the printer unit to the installation site.
After confirming that the covers and trays are closed, carry the printer by holding it by the lift handles from
the front side.
7
Gently place the printer on the paper feeder so that each surface of the printer is flush with the front
or side surfaces of the paper feeder.
Also, match the positioning pins (A) and connector (B) when placing the printer.
㻝㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Insert the paper drawers in the printer and paper feeder.
Push them in the printer and paper feeder firmly.
Next, perform the following procedures.
If you want to install the ROM modules, follow the procedure from Step 2 in "Installing ROM."
If you want to install the SD card, follow the procedure from Step 2 in "Installing SD Card."
If you install the printer and paper feeder at the same time
1Connect the power
cord. "Connecting the Power Cord"
2
Specifying the
printer's initial
settings.
"Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language"
Specifying a type of
printer driver. "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver"
3Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
4Connecting to a
computer. "Connecting to a Computer"
5Install the printer
driver.
"For Windows"
"For Macintosh"
6
Register the paper
feeder in the printer
driver.
"Setting the Paper Feeder Information"
7Check the printing
operation.
Check the operations by Test Page in Windows.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
If you install the paper feeder afterward (If you are using the printer already)
1Connect the cables
and cords.
Reconnect the cables and power cords that were removed and restart the
printer.
㻝㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
2Load paper.
(Drawer 2*, 3*)"Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
3
Register the paper
feeder in the printer
driver.
"Setting the Paper Feeder Information"
4Check the printing
operation.
Check the operations by Test Page in Windows.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
*Paper drawer of the paper feeder
Setting the Paper Feeder Information
After installing the paper feeder, set the paper feeder information.
The operation method to use with Windows is explained here. If you are a Macintosh user, see the "Online Manual."
1
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2
Right-click the icon for the printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-up
menu.
3
Obtain paper feeder information.
(1) Display the [Device Settings] tab.
(2) Click [Get Device Status].
㻝㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
ĺPaper feeder information is obtained automatically.
NOTE
When paper feeder information cannot be obtained automatically
Select the paper source option installed on your printer under [Paper Source Options].
㻝㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-026
If you want to use the printer with optional accessories installed, install them before installing the printer.
"Installing the Paper Feeder"
"Installing ROM"
"Installing SD Card"
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
2
Carry the printer unit to the installation site.
After confirming that the covers and trays are closed, carry the printer by holding it by the lift handles from the front side.
3
Insert the paper drawer in the printer.
Push it in the printer firmly.
Connecting the Power Cord
1
Connect the power cord.
Installing the Printer
㻝㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
The form of the supplied power cord
The form of the supplied power cord may differ from the one in the above illustration.
2
Press the power switch to turn the printer ON.
ĺThe indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates a self-diagnostic test on the printer
unit and optional accessories.
If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Main Power indicator (green), (Ready) indicator (green),
(Online) indicator (green) and Paper Source indicator (green) come on, <Ready to print.> appears in the display, and
the printer is ready to print.
The following information is displayed in the display.
㻝㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Next, perform the following procedures.
1
Specifying the
printer's initial
settings
"Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language"
Specifying a type of
printer driver "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver"
2Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
3Connecting to a
computer "Connecting to a Computer"
4Install the printer
driver.
"For Windows"
"For Macintosh"
5Check the printing
operation.
Check the operations by Test Page in Windows.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
㻝㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-027
Insert the ROM in the position shown in the following figure.
After checking the position of the ROM, perform the work.
Installing ROM
It explains the procedure for inserting the ROM.
Insert the ROM correctly using the following procedure.
Checking the ROM Installation
It explains the procedure for checking whether the ROM is inserted correctly.
After inserting, perform a check using the following procedure.
Removing ROM
It explains the procedure for removing the ROM.
Use the following procedure when removing the ROM.
Installing ROM
㻝㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-028
NOTE
A Phillips screwdriver is required.
Have a screwdriver ready that matches the size of the screws for the slot cover.
1
Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer.
Shut down the printer before turning it OFF.
For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF."
<How to disconnect the cable or cord>
USB cable*(2) Turn the computer OFF.
(3) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
LAN cable*(4) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet.
(6) Disconnect the cord from the printer.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
2
Remove the right cover.
(1) While holding the tab (A), open the cover a little.
Installing ROM
㻝㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2) Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow.
3
Remove the slot cover.
(1) Remove the two screws marked with " ".
(2) Open the slot cover.
(3) Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow.
NOTE
About the location for installing ROM
Confirm the installation location and its orientation before installing the ROM module.
4
Install ROM.
㻝㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Push the ROM module into the printer firmly while aligning the module with the two connectors.
5
Attach the slot cover.
(1) Attach the slot cover.
(2) Close the cover.
(3) Attach and fasten the two screws.
6
Attach the right cover.
(1) Attach the right cover.
(2) Close the cover.
㻝㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Next, perform the following procedures. (If you want to install the SD card, follow the procedure from Step 2 in
"Installing SD Card".)
If you install the printer and ROM at the same time
1Connect the power
cord. "Connecting the Power Cord"
2
Specifying the
printer's initial
settings.
"Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language"
Specifying a type of
printer driver. "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver"
3Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
4Connecting to a
computer. "Connecting to a Computer"
5Install the printer
driver.
"For Windows"
"For Macintosh"
6Check the printing
operation.
Check the operations by Test Page in Windows.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
7Check the ROM
installation. "Checking the ROM Installation"
8
Specify the settings
for the ROM module
as needed.
For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing
Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM.
If you install ROM afterward (If you are using the printer already)
1Connect the cables
and cords. Connect the removed cables and cords again.
2Check the ROM
installation. "Checking the ROM Installation"
3
Specify the settings
for the ROM module For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing
Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM.
㻝㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
as needed.
㻝㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-029
After installing a ROM module, print Configuration Page to check if the module is installed properly.
NOTE
Load A4 size paper.
Configuration Page is designed to be printed on A4 size paper.
Be sure to load A4 size paper when printing the Configuration Page.
1
Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer.
"Paper Loading and Output"
2
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
3
Press [ ] ( : Utility).
4
Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK] to print Configuration Page.
NOTE
How to check the installation
Confirm that [BarDIMM] is displayed in [PCL].
Checking the ROM Installation
㻝㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02C
Insert the SD card in the position shown in the following figure.
After checking the position of the card, perform the work.
Installing SD Card
It explains the procedure for inserting the SD card.
Insert the SD card correctly using the following procedure.
Checking the SD Card Installation
It explains the procedure for checking whether the SD card is inserted correctly.
After inserting, perform a check using the following procedure.
Removing SD Card
It explains the procedure for removing the SD card.
Use the following procedure when removing the SD card.
Installing SD Card
㻝㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02E
SD card is installed in the main board of the printer unit using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
When using the "Encrypted Secured Print" function whose security is reinforced for data
communication and stored data
You need to install "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in."
For details on the installation procedure, see "Readme.txt" in the supplied CD-ROM.
We recommend that an encrypted secured print be used when printing secured print jobs.
Before installing SD card
If the SD card is write-protected, release the protection, and then insert the card.
NOTE
A Phillips screwdriver is required.
Have a screwdriver ready that matches the size of the screws for the slot cover.
1
Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer.
Shut down the printer before turning it OFF.
For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF."
<How to disconnect the cable or cord>
USB cable*(2) Turn the computer OFF.
(3) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
LAN cable*(4) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet.
(6) Disconnect the cord from the printer.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
2
Installing SD Card
㻝㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Remove the slot cover.
(1) Remove the screw marked with " ".
(2) Open the slot cover.
(3) Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow.
3
Install SD card.
Install the SD card in the SD card slot until it clicks.
4
Attach the slot cover.
(1) Engage the tab of the SD card slot cover into the matching slit.
(2) Close the cover.
㻝㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(3) Attach and fasten the screw.
5
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
If <Formatting SD Card?> appears in the display after the printer starts, the SD card is being formatted.
Wait for a moment until the format is completed.
IMPORTANT
If <Formatting SD Card?> does not appear in the display
Perform [Format] in [SD Card Maintenance] in the common Setup menu.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
6
Connect all the interface cables.
NOTE
Setting after the SD card is installed
Perform the following procedure after the SD card is installed.
(1) Display the [Device Settings] tab in the printer driver.
For details on the procedure for displaying the sheet, see "Setting the Printer Options."
(2) Click [Get Device Status].
If you cannot obtain the status of the optional accessories automatically, select the [SD Card Installed] check
box.
For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Setting the Printer Options."
Next, perform the following procedures.
If you install the printer and SD card at the same time
㻝㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
1Connect the power
cord. "Connecting the Power Cord"
2
Specifying the
printer's initial
settings.
"Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language"
Specifying a type of
printer driver. "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver"
3Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
4Connecting to a
computer. "Connecting to a Computer"
5Install the printer
driver.
"For Windows"
"For Macintosh"
6Check the printing
operation.
Check the operations by Test Page in Windows.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
7Checking the SD
Card Installation. "Checking the SD Card Installation"
8
Specify the settings
for the ROM module
as needed.
For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing
Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM.
If you install SD card afterward (If you are using the printer already)
1Connect the cables
and cords. Connect the removed cables and cords again.
2Checking the SD
Card Installation. "Checking the SD Card Installation"
3
Specify the settings
for the ROM module
as needed.
For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing
Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM.
㻝㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02F
After installing an SD card, print Configuration Page to check if the module is installed properly.
NOTE
Load A4 size paper.
Configuration Page is designed to be printed on A4 size paper.
Be sure to load A4 size paper when printing the Configuration Page.
1
Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer.
"Paper Loading and Output"
2
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
3
Press [ ] ( : Utility).
4
Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK] to print Configuration Page.
NOTE
How to check the installation
Check to make sure that [SD Card] under the [Control Menu] is set to [On].
Checking the SD Card Installation
㻝㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
ĺIf [SD Card] is not displayed, see "Removing SD Card," remove the SD card, and then try to install it again.
ĺIf the [SD Card] is [Off], set it to [On] using the following procedure.
(1) Press [ ] ( : Settings).
(2) Select [Control Menu] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(3) Select [SD Card] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(4) Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(5) Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺCheck that the SD card is not write-protected. If the card is write-protected, release the protection, and then
insert the card.
The above figure is a sample of Configuration Page. The contents may differ from the Configuration Page printed
by your printer.
㻝㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02K
When the printer is turned ON, the initial setting screen appears.
Specify the setting using the following procedure.
NOTE
About the initial setting screen
The initial setting screen is displayed only when the printer is turned ON for the first time.
1
Press the power switch to turn the printer ON.
ĺThe indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates a self-diagnostic test on the printer
unit and optional accessories.
If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Main Power indicator (green), (Ready) indicator (green),
(Online) indicator (green) and Paper Source indicator (green) come on, <Ready to print.> appears in the display, and
the printer is ready to print.
IMPORTANT
Do not turn the printer ON immediately after turning it OFF.
If you want to cycle the power of the printer, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
If the printer does not operate properly
"Troubleshooting"
If an error message appears in the display on the control panel
"A Message Appears in the Control Panel"
When turning ON the printer for the first time after installing the printer and paper feeder
Do not load paper in the paper drawer.
"Printer Installation"
Precautions when turning OFF the printer
Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language
㻝㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you turn the printer OFF, all print data remaining in the printer memory will be erased.
Power consumption when the power is OFF
Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is inserted in the AC power outlet.
To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
2
Select a display language using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Specify a date, and then press [OK].
4
Specify time, and then press [OK].
ĺThe following screen appears, and the settings are completed.
NOTE
About the clock in this printer
The clock in the printer should be accurate within ± 60 seconds per month. Adjust the clock periodically.
When setting time zones and daylight savings time
See "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" under "Setting Items" in "Managing the Printer."
㻝㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02L
When printing from a computer by USB connection, specify which of the following printer drivers is used.
UFR II
UFR II XPS
PCL5e
PCL6
PS3
XPS (Direct)
You can select the type of printer driver to be installed at the time.
IMPORTANT
When installing the printer driver manually
Be sure to match the setting of this item and the type of the printer driver to be installed. You cannot use printer drivers
of a different type.
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
2
Select [Control Menu] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [Select PDL (PnP)] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message is displayed, press [OK] to continue.
4
Select the printer driver to be used using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Specifying a Type of Printer Driver
㻝㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02R
When Connecting Using a USB Cable
Before connecting the printer to a computer, see "Important Safety Instructions."
IMPORTANT
Do not plug or unplug the USB cable while the printer or computer is ON.
This may cause the printer to malfunction.
About unidirectional communication equipment
The printer performs bi-directional communication. Operation of the printer when connected via unidirectional
communication equipment was not tested, and as a result, Canon cannot guarantee printer operation if the printer is
connected using unidirectional print servers, USB hubs or switching devices.
NOTE
About the USB interface
This printer supports Hi-Speed USB/USB. For more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
About the interface cable
This printer does not come with an interface cable. Have an appropriate one available for the computer you are
using or the connecting method.
Use a USB cable with the following symbol.
1
Make sure that the printer and computer are OFF.
Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned off.
2
Connect the USB cable.
Flat end (A): Connects to a USB port on your computer.
Square end (B): Connects to the USB connector on this printer.
Do not turn the printer ON at this stage even if you want to install the printer driver.
Connecting to a Computer
㻝㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When Connecting with a LAN Cable
IMPORTANT
If more than one devices are connected to an AppleTalk network
Turn on each device at an interval of ten seconds or longer.
NOTE
About the network environment
This printer supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T connections.
About the LAN cable
This printer does not come with a LAN cable or a hub. Have cables or a hub ready as needed.
Use a Category 5 or higher twisted pair cable for the LAN.
If you want to connect the printer to a 100BASE-TX or 1000BASE-T Ethernet network, all the devices to be
connected to the LAN (hub, LAN cable, and network board for computer) must support 100BASE-TX or 1000BASE-
T.
For more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
When the printer is connected to a network
Check the MAC address of the print server with Network Status Print, and then configure the network operating
system (UNIX, etc.) and print server.
"Checking the Printer Settings"
"Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer)"
1
Connect the LAN cable.
㻝㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02W
The printer driver is installed from a User Software CD-ROM.
Content of Each CD-ROM:
Features of the Printer Driver
UFR II Printer Driver:
Using the UFR II printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are
appropriately divided between the host PC and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time.
The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through
optimization.
PCL Printer Driver:
The PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software.
The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, the PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6
printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c and PCL5e, and
offers superior printing quality and speed.
The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard with black-and-white printers.
PS Printer Driver:
The PS printer driver converts print data from applications into data for use with PS printers, and sends it to the printer.
As well as converting print data, it can also enable you to configure settings relating to finishing and detailed settings
such as color adjustment, and provides an appropriate print environment for desktop publishing and publishing on
demand.
Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver
㻝㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02X
From the menu screen of the User Software CD-ROM, you can install the printer driver.
The menu screen also allows you to display the "Printer Driver Installation Guide" describing the installation procedure. To
view the guide, display it before you start the installation.
Installation
㻝㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-02Y
The following software program(s) is (are) included on the User Software CD-ROM. Use it (them) according to your need.
NetSpot Device Installer
Use this software to specify the initial settings for various devices connected to a network from your computer. For
information on installing the software, see the Readme file located in the CD-ROM.
Other Software Program(s)
㻝㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-031
For details about the installation procedure, refer to the appropriate Mac driver guide.
Starting Installation:
Double-click the installation icon in the installer set folder to start the installation.
Viewing the Driver Guide:
Double-click the manual icon in the installation set folder to view the driver guide.
Installation
㻝㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-032
Usable Paper
Precautions for Paper
Printable Area
Paper Loading and Output
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
Loading Custom Size Paper
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Registering the Paper Size
Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
Online and Offline
Canceling a Job
Operations from the Computer
Canceling from the Printer Control Panel
Outputting Data (Forced Output)
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)
Checking the Printer Status
Basic Printer Operations
㻝㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-033
The following shows the paper sizes that can be used with this printer.
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Type Setting for
[Paper Type]*1 Paper Size
Paper Source
2-sided
Printing
Multi-
purpose
Tray
Drawer
1
Drawer 2, 3
(optional)
Plain paper*2 (60 to
74 g/m²) [Plain L]
A4
B5
A5*8
A6
Legal
Letter
Executive
Statement
Foolscap
16K
Custom
size paper *3 *4 *4 *5
Plain paper*2 (75 to
90 g/m²) [Plain] (Default)
A4
B5
A5*8
A6
Legal
Letter
Executive
Statement
Foolscap
16K
Custom
size paper *3 *4 *4 *5
Heavy paper (91 to
105 g/m²) [Heavy 1]
A4
B5
A5*8
A6
Legal
Letter
Usable Paper
㻝㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Executive
Statement
Foolscap
16K
Custom
size paper *3 *4 *4 *5
Heavy paper (106
to 199 g/m²) [Heavy 2]
A4 *6 *6 *6
B5 *6 *6
A5*8 *6 *6
A6 *6 *6
Legal *6 *6 *6
Letter *6 *6 *6
Executive *6 *6
Statement *6 *6
Foolscap *6 *6 *6
16K *6 *6
Custom
size paper *3 *4*6 *4*6 *5*6
Transparency [Transparency] A4
Letter
Label [Labels]
A4
B5
A5*8
A6
Legal
Letter
Executive
Statement
Foolscap
16K
Custom
size paper *3
Index Card*7 [Envelope] Index Card
Envelope [Envelope]
Envelope
Monarch
Envelope
No.10
Envelope
DL
Envelope
ISO-C5
㻝㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
*1 The setting is located in the [Paper Source] tab in the printer driver. If you print from DOS, UNIX, or other operating
system, specify a paper type in [Standard Paper Size] in the control panel.
*2 Recycled paper can also be used.
*3 You can load custom size paper that is 76.2 to 215.9 mm wide and 127.0 to 355.6 mm long. (If you are using the
UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 127.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 127.0 to 215.9 mm long
also in landscape orientation.)
*4 You can load custom size paper that is 105.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 148.0 to 355.6 mm long. (If you are using the
UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 148.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 148.0 to 215.9 mm long
also in landscape orientation.)
*5 You can perform 2-sided printing with custom size paper that is 210.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 279.4 to 355.6 mm
long.
*6 You can use heavy paper of up to 120 g/m².
*7 The following Index Card size is supported.
76.2 x 127.0 mm
*8 A5 size paper can also be loaded in landscape orientation.
IMPORTANT
About print speed
The print speed may drop depending on the paper settings for the size, type, orientation, and number of copies.
The print speed may drop in the following cases.
- The short edges of the paper are less than 210.0 mm.
- The long edges of the paper are less than 279.4 mm.*
* Excluding cases when A5 paper is printed in landscape orientation
Precautions for paper
"Precautions for Paper"
NOTE
Printable area
"Printable Area"
Envelope sizes
The envelope sizes are as follows.
Envelope Monarch 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm
Envelope No.10 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm
Envelope DL 110.0 mm x 220.0 mm
Envelope ISO-C5 162.0 mm x 229.0 mm
Chlorine-free paper
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this printer.
㻝㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-034
Paper Which Requires Attention Before Use
When using the following types of paper, this may cause influence to the printout results or printer in some cases.
Paper that was stored improperly
Creased or folded paper
Torn or damaged paper
Wrinkled paper
Curled paper
Wet or moist paper
Paper with rough edges
Irregularly-shaped paper
Paper with holes or perforations
Paper with binding holes
Paper with perforations
Paper with adhesive or a special coating
Heat-sensitive paper
Paper with adhesive
Carbon paper
Treated color paper
Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc)
Paper that was printed by another printer
Paper that was printed by a copy machine or another printer (The back side of the paper is also not usable.)
Paper that is difficult for the toner to fix onto
Paper with rough surfaces
Paper containing thick fibers
Paper with an extremely rough or smooth surface
Paper that is thicker or thinner than the specified usable paper
"Usable Paper"
IMPORTANT
About paper with staples, clips, ribbons or tape
This kind of paper may result in the printer malfunction or damage to the printer.
About paper that contains ink that melts, burns, evaporates or emits harmful gases at or lower
than the heating temperature of the fixing unit
This kind of paper may result in the printer malfunction or damage to the printer.
Printing on the back side of paper whose front side is already printed
This printer enables you to perform 2-sided printing by manually inserting the back side of the paper*whose front side
was previously printed even if the paper cannot be used for 2-sided printing.
When printing on the back side of paper whose front side was previously printed, flatten out any curled paper and load
one sheet of paper at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
*This is only for paper that has been printed using this printer. Also, you cannot print again on the same side of the
paper that was printed before.
Storing Paper
Precautions for Paper
㻝㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The quality of paper may deteriorate if stored improperly even when the paper meets the normal specifications.
Inferior paper may cause misfeeds, paper jams, or deterioration in print quality.
How to store paper
Observe the following guidelines when storing and handling paper.
Store paper on a flat surface.
To help paper avoid moisture or dryness, keep paper in its wrapper until it is ready to be used.
Do not place paper in the condition where it may curl or become creased.
Do not store paper vertically or store too many stacks of paper in one pile.
Do not store paper in the following locations.
A location exposed to direct sunlight
A location subject to high humidity
A dry location
A location with a temperature or humidity that differs significantly from the location where it will be used
If you print on damp paper
If you print on damp paper, steam may be emitted from the printer output area.
This is due to moisture in the paper evaporating because of the heat generated when toner fixes. This is not a malfunction.
(This is likely to occur when the room temperature is low.)
Storing Printouts
When handling or storing paper printed by this printer, be careful of the following points.
How to store printouts
Store paper on a flat surface.
Avoid storing printouts in folders made of PVC material, as this may cause the toner to melt and stick to the PVC
material. Toner may peel when printouts are folded or creased.
Store printouts in the condition where they are not folded or creased as toner may peel.
Avoid rubbing the printed paper with fingers or cloth because it may cause toner stain or toner peeling.
Put printouts in a binder when storing for a long period of time (two years or longer).
Printouts may discolor when stored for a long period of time.
Avoid storing printouts in a location subject to high temperatures.
Precautions when sticking printouts with adhesive
Be sure to use insoluble adhesive.
Test the adhesive on an unneeded printout before using.
Before stacking printouts that have adhesive, check that the adhesive completely dried.
㻝㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-035
NOTE
If you want to extend the printable area
Specify the following settings in the printer driver.
UFR II Printer Driver/PCL Printer Driver
1. Click [Advanced Settings] in the [Finishing] tab.
2. Set [Expand Print Region and Print] to [On].
PS Printer Driver
See Help of the PS printer driver.
The edges of the printout may be partly missing, depending on the settings of the document to be printed.
Plain Paper/Heavy Paper/Transparency/Label/Index Card
The printable areas are as follows.
Envelope
This printer can print on the following area.
You may have to change the printable area before printing, depending on the application you use.
Printable Area
㻝㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻝㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-036
This printer has the following paper sources and output trays.
Paper Source
(A): Multi-purpose tray "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
(B): Drawer 1
"Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
(C): Drawer 2 (optional)
(D): Drawer 3 (optional)
Output Tray
(E): Output tray Outputs paper with the printed side facing down.
(F): Sub-output tray
Outputs paper with the printed side facing up.
The sub-output tray is suitable to print transparencies, labels, or
envelopes which tend to curl, since the printed paper is output
flattened.
How to Switch Output Trays
When switching to the sub-output tray
(1) Open the sub-output tray as shown in the figure. (2) Pull out the tray extension until it stops.
When switching to the output tray
(1) Place the tray extension back into its original position as
shown in the figure.
(2) Close the sub-output tray.
Paper Loading and Output
㻝㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Precautions for Output Trays
Pay attention to the following points when handling the output trays.
See "Important Safety Instructions" also.
When performing 2-sided printing, close the sub-output tray.
(When outputting paper to the sub-output tray, you cannot perform 2-sided printing.)
During 2-sided printing, do not touch the paper until it is output to the output tray completely. The paper is first output
partially after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side.
When printing on 16K paper, transparency or envelopes, output them to the sub-output tray. Outputting them to the
output tray may cause paper jams.
When outputting long-size paper, such as Legal paper, to the output tray, open the auxiliary tray to prevent the paper
from hanging out of the output tray.
Paper Capacity of the Paper Sources and Output Trays
: Unavailable
Paper Type
Paper Source Output Tray*
Multi-purpose tray Drawer 1 Drawer 2, 3
(optional) Output tray Sub-output tray
Plain paper (75
g/m²) Approx. 100 sheets Approx. 500
sheets
Approx. 500
sheets
Approx. 250
sheets
Approx. 50
sheets
Heavy paper (91
g/m²) Approx. 80 sheets Approx. 400
sheets
Approx. 400
sheets
Approx. 100
sheets
Approx. 50
sheets
Heavy paper (128
g/m²) Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 40
sheets
Approx. 30
sheets
Transparency Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 10
sheets
Label Approx. 40 sheets Approx. 60
sheets
Approx. 40
sheets
Index Card Approx. 35 sheets Approx. 35
sheets
㻝㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Envelope Approx. 10 sheets Approx. 10
sheets
*Actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation environment, paper type or paper size to be used.
㻝㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-037
NOTE
When loading custom size paper
Because the procedure for loading custom size paper is different from that for loading standard size paper, see "Loading
Custom Size Paper."
Loading Standard Size Paper
For details on the paper that you can load in the paper drawer, see "Usable Paper."
Load paper in Drawer 2 or 3 (optional) in the same manner as you load paper in Drawer 1.
Before loading paper, see "Attention (Paper Drawer)."
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
2
Slide the paper guides to the position of the size of the paper to be loaded.
While holding the lock release lever (A), adjust the guides.
Align the position of (B) with the size mark of the paper to be loaded.
When loading A6 paper in portrait orientation
or A5 paper in landscape orientation
Slide the paper guide at the rear center toward you.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
㻝㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Load the paper with the printing side facing down so that the paper stack is aligned with the rear
paper guide.
NOTE
When loading paper with a letterhead or logo
See "Paper Loading Orientation" and load the paper in the correct orientation.
4
Hold down the paper, then set it under the hooks (A) on the paper guides.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the paper.
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
5
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines (A) or (B).
(A): Paper larger than A5 or Statement
(B): A6 paper
Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark
㻝㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-038
Before loading paper, see "Important Safety Instructions."
IMPORTANT
When loading paper for the first time after installing the paper feeder
Before loading paper, be sure to turn ON the printer once.
Do not touch the black rubber pad (A) in the paper drawer.
This may result in misfeeds.
When printing from Drawer 2 or 3 (both optional)
Make sure that Drawer 1 is set before printing from Drawer 2 or 3.
If you print from Drawer 2 or 3 when Drawer 1 is not set, this will cause paper jams.
Do not pull out the paper drawer during printing.
This may result in paper jams or damage to the printer.
When using paper that is poorly cut
Multiple sheets of paper may be fed at a time. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the
stack properly on a hard, flat surface.
NOTE
When loading A5 paper
The orientation setting to be selected on the control panel depends on how you load paper. Select the correct setting.
When loading paper in landscape orientation
Select [ A5] for paper size.
When loading paper in portrait orientation
Select [ A5R] for paper size.
For paper orientation and printing side, see "Paper Loading Orientation."
For settings displayed on the control panel, see "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" or "[Select Feeder] Menu."
Attention (Paper Drawer)
㻝㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-039
NOTE
When loading custom size paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load custom size paper in the same manner as you load standard size paper.
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
Loading Custom Size Paper in the Paper Drawer
For details on the paper that you can load in the paper drawer, see "Usable Paper."
Load paper in Drawer 2 or 3 (optional) in the same manner as you load paper in Drawer 1.
Before loading paper, see "Attention (Paper Drawer)."
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
2
Slide the paper guides a little wider and longer than the actual paper size.
While holding the lock release lever (A), adjust the guides.
3
Load the paper with the printing side facing down so that the edges of the stacked paper are aligned
with the front side of the paper drawer.
Loading Custom Size Paper
㻝㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
IMPORTANT
About the paper loading orientation
Be sure to load paper in landscape orientation if all the following conditions are fulfilled.
You are using the UFR II printer driver.
[Drawer 1 Size], [Drawer 2 Size] and [Drawer 3 Size] are set to [Mixed Sizes].
Custom size paper whose long edges are 215.9 mm or less is loaded.
NOTE
When loading paper with a letterhead or logo
See "Paper Loading Orientation" and load the paper in the correct orientation.
4
Align the paper guides with the loaded paper.
While holding the lock release lever (A), adjust the guides.
When loading paper whose length is shorter than A5
Slide the paper guide at the rear center toward you.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the paper.
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
5
㻝㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines (A) or (B).
(A): Paper larger than A5
(B): Paper smaller than A5
Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark
lines, this may result in misfeeds.
6
Set the paper drawer in the printer.
Next, register a paper size.
"Registering the Paper Size"
㻝㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03A
For details on the paper that you can load in the multi-purpose tray, see "Usable Paper."
Before loading paper, see "Attention (Multi-purpose Tray)."
1
Open the multi-purpose tray, and then pull out the auxiliary tray.
When loading long-size paper
Open the tray extension also.
2
Slide the paper guides a little wider than the actual paper width.
3
Gently load paper with the printing side facing up until it touches the back of the tray.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
㻝㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
IMPORTANT
About the loading orientation of custom size paper
Be sure to load paper in landscape orientation if all the following conditions are fulfilled.
You are using the UFR II printer driver.
[MP Tray Paper Size] is set to [Mixed Sizes].
The long edges of the paper is 215.9 mm or less.
About the loading orientation of envelopes
See "Printing on Envelopes" and load envelopes in the correct orientation.
NOTE
When loading paper with a letterhead or logo
See "Paper Loading Orientation" and load the paper in the correct orientation.
4
Align the paper guides with the width of the paper.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the paper.
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
5
㻝㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03C
Before loading paper, see "Important Safety Instructions."
IMPORTANT
Precautions when loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper so that it is straight.
If the rear edge of the paper stack is not properly aligned, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
If the paper is curled or folded at corners, flatten it before loading it in the printer.
Do not touch the paper in the multi-purpose tray or pull it out during printing.
This may result in paper jams or damage to the printer.
When using paper that is poorly cut
Multiple sheets of paper may be fed at a time. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the
stack properly on a hard, flat surface.
Do not place any objects other than paper on the multi-purpose tray. Do not press the top of or
apply excessive force to the multi-purpose tray.
This may result in damage to the multi-purpose tray.
NOTE
When loading A5 paper
The orientation setting to be selected on the control panel depends on how you load paper. Select the correct setting.
When loading paper in landscape orientation
Select [ A5] for paper size.
When loading paper in portrait orientation
Select [ A5R] for paper size.
For paper orientation and printing side, see "Paper Loading Orientation."
For settings displayed on the control panel, see "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" or "[Select Feeder] Menu."
Attention (Multi-purpose Tray)
㻝㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03E
This printer cannot automatically detect the paper size. Therefore, you need to register the size of the loaded paper.
Register the paper size using the following procedure. (The paper size setting is set to [A4] by default.)
NOTE
Precautions when specifying [Mixed Sizes]
The printer performs printing without checking the paper settings in the printer driver.
Make sure that the paper specified in the printer driver matches that loaded in the paper drawer before using the
printer.
If you are using the UFR II printer driver, load custom size paper whose long edges are 215.9 mm or less in
landscape orientation.
1
Press [ ] ( : Feeder Selection).
2
Select the paper source using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select a paper size using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺPaper size is registered.
Next, specify the following settings.
When printing from the printer driver on Windows or Macintosh, configure the printer
driver.
"Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
When printing from DOS or UNIX, specify the settings for [Standard Paper Size] and
[Default Paper Type] using the control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
Registering the Paper Size
㻝㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03F
After loading paper in a paper source, configure the printer driver to print using the following procedure.
This section describes the basic procedure for printing from an application, taking Adobe Reader as an example.
The printing procedure may differ depending on the application you are using.
Before printing, see "Attention (Printer Driver Configuration)."
1
Load paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
"Paper Loading and Output"
2
Open the PDF file to be printed using Adobe Reader.
3
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
4
Configure the printing preferences.
(1) Select this printer.
You can change the printer name in the printer folder ( "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows").
(2) Configure the printing preferences.
Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing
㻝㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Click [Properties].
6
Specify the settings for [Page Size] and [Output Size].
(1) Display the [Page Setup] tab.
(2) Select the page size of the document created by an application.
(3) Select if the size of the paper to be printed is different from that of the data.
㻝㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
IMPORTANT
If the [Page Size] setting and [Output Size] setting are different
The print is automatically reduced or enlarged to fit on the page.
7
Specify the settings for [Paper Source] and [Paper Type].
(1) Display the [Paper Source] tab.
(2) Set the paper source you want to use.
(3) Select the type of the paper loaded in the paper source.*
*Specify the setting according to the paper type as follows.
Paper Type Setting for [Paper Type]
Plain Paper 60 to 90 g/m² [Plain]
[Plain L]**
Heavy paper 91 to 105 g/m² [Heavy 1]
106 to 199 g/m² [Heavy 2]
Transparency [Transparency]
Label [Labels]
㻝㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Index Card [Envelope]
Envelope [Envelope]
** If the printed paper curls (the printed side curls outward) when printed with [Plain] selected, select [Plain L].
NOTE
Using Preview to specify a paper source
You can also specify a paper source by clicking each paper source or [Auto] using Preview when [ ] is selected.
8
Specify the other printing preferences as needed.
"Useful Printing Functions" describes the printing procedures that use the various printing functions. Make full use of
the functions of this printer.
NOTE
For details on the settings
See Help of the printer driver.
"Viewing the Online Help"
9
Confirm the settings, and then click [OK].
ĺThe [Print] dialog box reappears.
10
Click [OK].
ĺThe printer starts printing.
If the printer cannot print properly
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)"
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)"
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server)"
㻝㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03H
IMPORTANT
Be sure to match the setting in the control panel.
Match the setting specified in the [Setup] menu and that specified in [Output Size] in the printer driver.
If they do not match, the message <Set below paper.> appears.
In this case, the paper size for the paper source to be used is changed to that in the printer driver by pressing [ ] (
: Online), allowing you to continue printing.
"Registering the Paper Size"
NOTE
About configuration samples
The display may differ depending on the operating system in addition to the type and version of the printer driver.
How to install the printer driver
If you are using Windows, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." To view "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see
"Installation."
If you are using Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." To view "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
When printing on custom size paper
You need to register the custom paper size in the printer driver previously.
For details on the procedure for registering a custom paper size, see Help of the printer driver.
"Viewing the Online Help"
About the contents specified in "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
The specified settings apply only to data to be printed from the same application. Exiting the application resets the
changed settings to the default settings.
For details on the procedure for changing the default values for printing preferences, see "Configuring the Default Print
Settings."
Attention (Printer Driver Configuration)
㻝㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03J
This section describes the procedures for turning the printer ON/OFF and checking the printer operation.
Before printing, see "Attention (Turning the Printer ON/OFF)."
Turning ON the Printer
To use this printer, press the power switch to turn the printer ON. After checking the status of the printer unit and optional
accessories, the printer is ready to print.
1
Press the power switch to turn the printer ON.
The indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates a self-diagnostic test on the printer
unit and optional accessories.
If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Main Power indicator (green), (Ready) indicator (green),
(Online) indicator (green) and Paper Source indicator (green) come on, <Ready to print.> appears in the display, and
the printer is ready to print.
The following information is displayed in the display.
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
㻝㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Turning OFF the Printer
To stop the printer properly, use the following procedure for turning the printer OFF.
1
Check that the printer is not performing the following operations.
Printing
While the printer is running a self-diagnostic test immediately after turning the power ON
While the (Job) indicator is on or blinking
When any of the following messages appears
<Starting up...>
<Initializing NVRAM>
2
Press [ ] ( : Reset).
3
Select [Shut Down] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
IMPORTANT
If "Could not execute." is displayed
There is a Secure Print job in the SD card.
If shutdown is running, after deleting the job using a soft reset, run the shutdown operation again.
If shutdown is not running, press [ ] ( : Online).
NOTE
When you are using WSD printing
The shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is turned OFF.
4
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺAfter the message appears, the printer turns OFF automatically.
㻝㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
If the printer is not turned OFF immediately
Depending on the process in the printer, it may take up to 10 minutes to turn the printer OFF.
㻝㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03K
IMPORTANT
Do not turn the printer ON immediately after turning it OFF.
If you want to cycle the power of the printer, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
If the printer does not operate properly
"Troubleshooting"
If an error message appears in the display on the control panel
"A Message Appears in the Control Panel"
When turning ON the printer for the first time after installing the printer and paper feeder
Do not load paper in the paper drawer.
"Attention (Printer Installation)"
Precautions when turning OFF the printer
If you turn the printer OFF, all print data remaining in the printer memory will be erased.
When you attempt to turn the printer OFF suddenly, an unexpected error may occur. Use the procedure described
in the e-Manual to turn the printer OFF.
Power consumption when the power is OFF
Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is inserted in the AC power outlet.
To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
Attention (Turning the Printer ON/OFF)
㻝㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03L
When the printer can receive data from the computer and print the data, the printer is "Online". When the printer is
disconnected with the computer and cannot receive data, the printer is "Offline."
To perform the settings for each menu using the control panel, switch the printer status as follows.
: You can enter the menu
: You cannot enter the menu
When the printer is online When the printer is offline
[Setup] menu *
[Select Feeder]
menu
[Reset] menu
[Job] menu
[Utility Menu] menu
Application menu
*The [User Maintenance] options cannot be specified when the printer is online.
Placing the Printer Online
When printing from the computer, the printer has to be online.
If the printer is offline, place the printer online using the following procedure.
1
Press [ ] ( : Online).
The (Online) indicator turns on, and the printer is online.
IMPORTANT
If you cannot place the printer online
If an error is occurring in the printer, the printer does not come online.
Eliminate the cause of the error before you place the printer online.
NOTE
About the (Online) indicator during Sleep Mode
During Sleep Mode, the (Online) indicator is off even when the printer is online.
Placing the Printer Offline
To configure the printer so that it does not receive data from the computer or specify the settings for all the items in the
[Setup] menu, place the printer offline using the following procedure.
1
Press [ ] ( : Online).
Online and Offline
㻝㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The (Online) indicator goes off, and the printer is offline.
IMPORTANT
About the automatic online function
You can specify the time interval until the printer automatically enters the online status. The default is [2 minutes].
[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)
The printer does not automatically enter online status in the following cases.
The printer is in error status.
The printer is in Sleep mode.
[Auto Reset Time] under [Timer Settings] is set to [Off].
㻝㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03R
You can cancel a print job using either of the following methods.
Operations from the Computer
You can select jobs from the print queue and cancel them.
When the printer is connected to the computer using a LAN cable, you can cancel printing from the Remote UI.
"Managing Print Jobs"
Canceling from the Printer Control Panel
You can press [ ] ( : Job Status/Cancel) and cancel the job.
You can cancel other user's jobs.
<If an error is occurring to a job>
Solve the problem using either of the following methods.
Outputting Data (Forced Output)
You can force the printer to output the print data.
"Outputting Data (Forced Output)"
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)
You can cancel the process currently being performed.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
<When canceling all the jobs>
You can cancel all the jobs using the following method.
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)
You can delete all the jobs or data which was already sent to the memory.
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
Canceling a Job
㻝㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03S
This section describes the procedure for when you are using Windows.
If you are using Macintosh, see "Driver Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing Driver Guide, see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
1
Display the print queue.
1. Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2. Double-click the icon for this printer.
2
Right-click the job that you want to cancel, and then select [Cancel] from the pop-up menu.
If a print job does not appear
Another user's job is not displayed. (For the print server environment, all print jobs are displayed on the print server.)
If an error is occurring with a print job from another user, press the [ ] ( : Job Status/Cancel) key to cancel
the job.
"Canceling from the Printer Control Panel"
NOTE
For details on the print queue
See Windows Help.
3
Click [Yes] to cancel the print job.
If you cannot cancel a job
Operations from the Computer
㻝㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
You cannot cancel the job whose pages are in the process of printing.
㻝㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03U
When you want to cancel printing using the printer's control panel, run "Job Cancel" using the following procedure. A job
cancel allows you to cancel the job currently being received or processed.
IMPORTANT
The data for which the printer started to feed paper cannot be canceled.
If the job is canceled in this state, the next print job may be canceled.
About print jobs for other than the printer driver for this printer
When there is any print data for other than the printer driver for this printer, multiple data may be canceled.
NOTE
About print jobs which cannot be canceled
When canceling a job, you may not be able to cancel the job even if <Canceling jobs...> is displayed.
Also, you cannot cancel the following jobs.
Jobs saved to boxes
Delete such jobs using the Remote UI.
"Remote UI"
1
Make sure that the (Job) indicator is on or blinking.
Cancel the job while the printer is processing the data (while the (Job) indicator is on or blinking).
2
Press the [ ] ( : Job Status/Cancel) key.
3
Select a job you want to cancel using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Select [Yes] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Canceling from the Printer Control Panel
㻝㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
ĺ<Canceling jobs...> appears, and the print data being processed is canceled.
When <Ready to print.> appears, the job cancellation completes.
IMPORTANT
While <Canceling jobs...> is displayed
You cannot operate the printer.
㻝㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03W
When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the data may remain in the printer memory,
and the job may not be completed properly. As long as the printer remains in this state, you cannot perform printing
because the printer cannot receive the next data.
In this case, force the printer to output the print data using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
If you cannot output data
You cannot output data for the following jobs or in the following state.
Data from the PCL/PS/UFR II printer driver
When the (Message) indicator is on
Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
The data that is being printed is deleted.
When you output data, print it again.
NOTE
About automatic output
When [Timeout] under [Interface] in the Setup Menu is set to [On], even less than a page of data is discharged
automatically. (Data from the PCL/UFR II printer driver is not output.) [Timeout] for a job is set to 15 seconds in the
default settings.
1
Press [ ] ( : Reset).
2
Select [Form Feed] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺThe data remaining in the memory is printed.
Outputting Data (Forced Output)
㻝㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03X
If you want to cancel the process currently being performed, perform [Soft Reset] using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
The data that is being printed, that is on the print queue, or that is being received is deleted.
Performing a soft reset deletes all the jobs (those from other computers and interfaces).
Make sure that other users are not printing before performing a soft reset.
NOTE
About the difference from a hard reset
Hard resets delete all the registered files, such as the form data saved in the RAM of the printer, but soft resets do not
delete them.
1
Cancel printing from the computer.
2
Press [ ] ( : Reset).
3
Select [Soft Reset] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Hold down the [OK] key 5 seconds or more if you want to perform a [Hard Reset].
4
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺWhen <Resetting software...> disappears, the soft reset is completed.
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)
㻝㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-03Y
When you want to delete all the jobs and data sent to memory for some reason, perform [Hard Reset] using the following
procedure.
IMPORTANT
The data that is being printed, that is on the print queue, or that is being received is deleted.
Performing a hard reset deletes all the jobs (those from other computers and interfaces).
Make sure that other users are not printing before performing a hard reset.
If the printer is reset while it is receiving data
The data that is not being received will be received after the resetting process completes. However, the data may not be
printed properly.
NOTE
About the difference from a soft reset
Hard resets delete all the registered files, such as the form data saved in the RAM of the printer, but soft resets do not
delete them.
1
Press [ ] ( : Reset).
2
Select [Soft Reset] using [ ] and [ ], press [OK] for at least five seconds, and then release your
finger.
ĺWhen you release your finger, <Execute hard reset?> is displayed.
3
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺWhen <Resetting hardware...> disappears, the hard reset is completed.
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)
㻝㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-042
Confirming usable paper
This printer can print plain paper (60 to 90 g/m²) and heavy paper (91 to 199 g/m²) of the following sizes or Index Card.
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-purpose Tray
Standard sizes
A4*2, B5, A5, A6, Legal*2, Letter*2,
Executive, Statement, Foolscap*2, and
16K
A4*2, B5, A5, A6, Legal*2, Letter*2, Executive,
Statement, Foolscap*2, 16K, and Index Card
Custom paper
sizes*3
Width 105.0 to 215.9 mm, Length 148.0 to
355.6 mm*4
Width 76.2 to 215.9 mm, Length 127.0 to 355.6
mm*5
*1 You can use heavy paper of up to 120 g/m².
*2 Can be used for 2-sided printing. (Heavy paper of 121 to 199 g/m² cannot be used for 2-sided printing.)
*3 Custom size paper that is 210.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 279.4 to 355.6 mm long can be used for 2-sided printing.
(Heavy paper of 121 to 199 g/m²) cannot be used for 2-sided printing.)
*4 If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 148.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 148.0 to
215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
*5 If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 127.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 127.0 to
215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
Recycled paper can also be used.
NOTE
When using custom size paper
See "Printing on Custom Size Paper."
Loading paper
The paper which you can load in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray varies depending on the paper type.
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Type Paper Drawer Multi-purpose Tray
Plain paper (60 to 74 g/m²)
Plain paper (75 to 90 g/m²)
Heavy paper (91 to 105 g/m²)
Heavy paper (106 to 199 g/m²) *1
Index Card
*1 You can use heavy paper of up to 120 g/m².
"Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
The following Index Card size is supported.
76.2 x 127.0 mm
Printing from an application
After loading paper, perform printing.
"Registering the Paper Size"
Printing on Plain Paper, Heavy Paper, or Index Card
㻝㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The print speed drops when printing on heavy paper (91 to 199 g/m²).
㻝㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-043
Confirming usable transparencies
This printer can use the following sizes of transparencies.
Standard sizes A4, Letter
Loading transparencies
You can load transparencies only in the multi-purpose tray.
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
<Precautions when loading transparencies>
Thoroughly fan the transparencies, and then align the edges before loading them as they may stick to each other. If
they are not fanned enough, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at once, causing paper jams.
When fanning or aligning the transparencies, try to hold the edges to avoid touching the printing surface.
Take care not to mark or stain the printing surface of the transparencies with fingerprints, dust, or oil. This may result in
poor print quality.
Printing from an application
After loading transparencies, perform printing.
"Registering the Paper Size"
The print speed drops when printing on transparencies.
If the output transparencies curl
Switch the output tray to the sub-output tray.
"Paper Loading and Output"
Printing on Transparencies
㻝㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-044
Confirming usable labels
This printer can use the following sizes of labels.
Standard sizes A4, B5, A5, A6, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, Foolscap, and 16K
Custom paper sizes Width 76.2 to 215.9 mm, Length 127.0 to 355.6 mm*
*If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 127.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 127.0 to
215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
Using the following types of labels may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the
printer.
Peeled labels or partly used labels
Coated labels that are easily peeled off from the backing sheet
Labels with uneven adhesive
Loading labels
You can load labels only in the multi-purpose tray.
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
<Precautions when loading labels>
Fan the labels thoroughly, and then align the edges before loading them. If they are not fanned enough, multiple sheets
of paper may be fed at once, causing paper jams.
Take care not to mark or stain the printing surface of the labels with fingerprints, dust, or oil. This may result in poor
print quality.
Printing from an application
After loading labels, perform printing.
"Registering the Paper Size"
If the output labels curl
Switch the output tray to the sub-output tray.
"Paper Loading and Output"
Printing on Labels
㻝㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-045
Confirming usable envelopes
This printer can use the following envelopes.
Using the following types of envelopes may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to
the printer.
Envelopes with fasteners or snaps
Envelopes with address windows
Envelopes with adhesive on the surface
Wrinkled or creased envelopes
Poorly manufactured envelopes in which the glued parts are uneven
Irregularly-shaped envelopes
Loading envelopes
You can load envelopes only in the multi-purpose tray.
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
<Precautions when loading envelopes>
Load envelopes in the correct orientation as follows.
(: Feeding direction)
Before loading envelopes, align them as follows.
1. Place the stack of envelopes on a flat
surface, and then flatten them to release
any remaining air.
2. Loosen any stiff corners of the
envelopes and flatten curls as
shown in the figure.
3. Align the edges of the
envelopes on a flat
surface.
Printing on Envelopes
㻝㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Then, press the edges tightly.
Printing from an application
After loading envelopes, perform printing.
"Registering the Paper Size"
Do not print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.
When envelopes are printed, they may be creased.
If the output envelopes curl
Switch the output tray to the sub-output tray.
"Paper Loading and Output"
㻝㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-046
Confirming usable custom size paper
This printer can use the following custom size paper.
Paper drawer Width 105.0 to 215.9 mm, Length 148.0 to 355.6 mm*1
Multi-purpose tray Width 76.2 to 215.9 mm, Length 127.0 to 355.6 mm*2
*1 If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 148.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 148.0 to
215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
*2 If you are using the UFR II printer driver, you can load custom size paper that is 127.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 127.0 to
215.9 mm long also in landscape orientation.
Loading custom size paper
The custom size paper which you can load in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray varies depending on the paper type.
: Available
Paper Type Paper Drawer Multi-purpose Tray
Plain paper (60 to 74 g/m²)
Plain paper (75 to 90 g/m²)
Heavy paper (91 to 105 g/m²)
Heavy paper (106 to 199 g/m²) *1
*1 You can use heavy paper of up to 120 g/m².
"Loading Custom Size Paper"
Registering a custom paper size
If printing custom size paper, you need to register the custom paper size in the printer driver previously.
For details on the procedure for registering a custom paper size, see Help of the printer driver.
"Viewing the Online Help"
Printing from an application
After loading custom size paper, perform printing.
"Registering the Paper Size"
The print speed drops when printing on heavy paper (91 to 199 g/m²).
Printing on Custom Size Paper
㻝㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-047
To print paper with letterheads or logos, load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.
When printing on envelopes, see "Printing on Envelopes."
(: Feeding direction)
When paper is loaded in landscape
orientation
When paper is loaded in portrait
orientation
Portrait Layout Landscape Layout Portrait Layout Landscape Layout
Paper drawer (1-
sided printing) *1
(With the printing
side facing down)
(With the printing
side facing down)
(With the printing
side facing down)
(With the printing
side facing down)
Paper drawer (1-
sided printing) *2
(With the printing
side facing up)
(With the printing
side facing up)
Paper drawer (2-
sided printing)
(With the front side
facing up)
(With the front side
facing up)
Multi-purpose tray
(1-sided printing) *1
(With the printing
side facing up)
(With the printing
side facing up)
(With the printing
side facing up)
(With the printing
side facing up)
Multi-purpose tray
(1-sided printing) *2
(With the printing
side facing down)
(With the printing
side facing down)
Multi-purpose tray
(2-sided printing)
(With the front side
facing down)
(With the front side
facing down)
*1 With [Paper Feed Method] set to [Speed Priority]
*2 With [Paper Feed Method] set to [Print Side Priority]
For details on [Paper Feed Method], see "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)."
Paper Loading Orientation
㻝㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-048
Printing from a Computer (Windows)
Printing Fundamentals
Printing Functions
Scaling Documents
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing
Booklet Printing
Poster Printing
Watermark Printing
Combining and Printing Multiple Files
Selecting a Profile for Printing
Registering a Profile for Printing
Printing from a Computer (Macintosh)
Printing Fundamentals
Printing Functions
Scaling Documents
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
1-sided and 2-sided Printing
Using [Presets] for Printing
Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods)
Functions Which Can Be Specified from the Control Panel
Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print)
Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print)
Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)
Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client
Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print)
Useful Printing Functions
㻝㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-049
Printing Fundamentals
Printing
Configuring the Default Print Settings
Setting the Printer Options
Viewing the Online Help
Printing Functions
Common Functions
[Page Setup] Tab
[Finishing] Tab
[Paper Source] Tab
[Quality] Tab
[Device Settings] Tab
Scaling Documents
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing
Booklet Printing
Poster Printing
Watermark Printing
Combining and Printing Multiple Files
Selecting a Profile for Printing
Registering a Profile for Printing
Printing from a Computer (Windows)
㻝㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04C
This section explains the basic printing method using the printer driver.
NOTE
Printing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided
with the application.
1.
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
2.
3.
Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items.
Printing
㻞㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
The default setting for [Print Style] in the [Finishing] tab is [2-sided printing]. For details, see "1-sided Printing and
2-sided Printing."
For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Online
Help.")
4.
Click [OK].
Printing begins.
NOTE
If a printer icon is displayed in the task tray at the bottom right of your computer monitor, you can stop printing from your
FRPSXWHU'RXEOHFOLFNWKHSULQWHULFRQĺFOLFNWKHQDPHRIWKHILOH\RXZDQWWRVWRSSULQWLQJĺFOLFN>'RFXPHQW@ĺ
[Cancel].
㻞㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04E
This section describes how to access the printer setup screen from the [Control Panel] and how to configure the printing
function settings beforehand.
The printer whose settings you have configured will print with those settings every time.
When printing, you can change these settings beforehand whenever required. To change the settings, configure them in the
[Print] dialog box from the application.
IMPORTANT
To change the default print settings, you must log on to your computer as a member of the Administrators.
1.
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2.
(or [Printing preferences]).
3.
Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items.
Configuring the Default Print Settings
㻞㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04F
Before printing, you need to set up the printer configuration in order to use the functions of printer options (such as paper
feed options, paper output options, etc.) attached to and installed in the machine.
The printer configuration can be set up automatically while installing the driver. If the machine cannot be configured during
the installation, follow the procedure below.
IMPORTANT
To configure the printer option settings, you must log on to your computer as a member of the Administrators.
1.
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2.
properties]).
3.
Setting the Printer Options
㻞㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4.
NOTE
If the information request returns an error message, you need to configure the settings (such as paper feed options,
paper output options, etc.) manually.
If the printer and computer are connected via USB or a WSD (Web Services on Devices) port, the [Get Device
Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually.
㻞㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04H
You can display the online help by clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen.
The online help includes additional information about each printing option. If the e-Manual does not provide the information
you need, see the online help.
1.
Click [Help].
The online help is displayed.
Topic pane (right side): Displays the description of the information.
Navigation pane (left side): Click [Contents] / [Search] to search for information.
Viewing the Online Help
㻞㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04J
This section explains printing functions which can be configured in the printer driver screen.
Common Functions
[Page Setup] Tab
[Finishing] Tab
[Paper Source] Tab
[Quality] Tab
[Device Settings] Tab
NOTE
The items displayed in the printer driver screen and available functions differ according to the printer model you are
using.
Printing Functions
㻞㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04K
The following functions are common to the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs.
1.Profiles You can select a profile to conveniently repeat the same
print settings (see "Selecting a Profile for Printing").
2.Adding/Editing
Profiles
You can
add and
edit profile
settings.
3.Changing the
Output Method
Enables you to change output methods. For example,
you can combine multiple sets of print data and
configure print settings for the combined data (see
"Combining and Printing Multiple Files").
4.Preview
The
settings
configured
in each
sheet are
displayed
in the
preview.
5.Verifying
Settings You can verify the settings specified in each sheet.
NOTE
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
Common Functions
㻞㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04L
1.Output Paper Size
Enables you to select the paper
size actually output from the printer
(see "Scaling Documents").
2.Print Direction
Sets the print
direction relative to
the orientation of the
paper.
3.Page Layout
Prints multiple pages arranged on
one sheet of paper (see "Printing
Multiple Pages on One Sheet").
4.Watermark Prints pages with a
watermark (such as
"COPY")
superimposed on the
document (see
"Watermark
Printing").
5.Page Border
Prints each page with a border.
6.Header/Footer
Prints pages with
headers and/or
footers with the date,
page number, etc.
NOTE
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
[Page Setup] Tab
㻞㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04R
1.1-sided/2-sided
Printing
Prints on one or both sides of
the paper. The default setting for
[Print Style] is [2-sided printing].
2.Booklet Printing Prints pages in a
sequence that allows
them to be folded and
grouped into a booklet
when output (see
"Booklet Printing").
3.Collating
When printing multiple sets of
copies, outputs each set
separately in page order.
4.Grouping When printing multiple
sets of copies, outputs
the pages in groups
according to their page
numbers.
NOTE
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
[Finishing] Tab
㻞㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04U
1.Objective
Enables you to conveniently select the
appropriate settings for the current content.
2.Toner Reduction Prints
with a
reduced
amount
of toner.
NOTE
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
[Quality] Tab
㻞㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04W
1.Set Options
You can set the printer options (such
as paper feed options, paper output
options, etc.) attached to the machine.
2.Obtain
Device
Information
You can obtain device information
and update the settings displayed
in the sheet (see "Setting the
Printer Options").
3.Display
Version
Information
You can display version information.
NOTE
For instructions on how to display the printer properties dialog box, see "Setting the Printer Options."
[Device Settings] Tab
㻞㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04X
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify
the scaling value manually.
1.
Click [Page Setup].
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
2.
Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page Size].
3.
Select output size of the document from [Output Size].
Scaling Documents
㻞㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].
4.
scaling ratio for [Scaling].
5.
Click [OK].
NOTE
Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the
document.
Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio
for the selected page size.
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-04Y
Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper.
1.
Click [Page Setup].
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
2.
Select [N on 1] from [Page Layout] (where "N" is the number of pages you want to print on the sheet).
Note
If you cannot select the options for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] tab, and then select [Auto] or [Enabled]
from [Spooling at Host]. For instructions on how to display the [Device Settings] tab, see "Setting the Printer Options."
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
㻞㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3.
Select the page order from [Page Order].
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
4.
Click [OK].
NOTE
You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not use
it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-050
You can select whether to print on one side or both sides of each sheet of paper.
The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided printing].
Paper Type Paper Size
Plain paper
(60 to 90 g/m²)
Heavy paper
(91 to 120 g/m²)
Standard size paper
A4, Legal, Letter and Foolscap
Custom size paper:
210.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 279.4 to 355.6 mm long
Before performing 2-sided printing, see "Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing)."
IMPORTANT
Precautions when performing 2-sided printing
Do not touch the paper during 2-sided printing until it is completely output. The paper is first partially output after
the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side.
Be sure to close the output selection cover before performing 2-sided printing.
"Paper Loading and Output"
Printing on the back side of paper that was previously printed (performing 2-sided printing
manually)
The printer can manually print the back side* of paper that has been printed once.
When printing on the back side of paper whose front side was previously printed, flatten out any curled paper and load
one sheet of paper at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
*This is only for paper that has been printed using this printer. Also, you cannot print again on the same side of the
paper that was printed before.
1.
Click [Finishing].
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing
㻞㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
2.
Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style]
NOTE
The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided Printing]. You can also change the default setting to [1-sided Printing]. For
instructions on changing the default settings, see "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
3.
Select the binding edge from [Binding Location].
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
4.
Click [OK].
Note
㻞㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-051
NOTE
Paper loading orientation
On 2-sided printing, the back side of the paper is printed first, therefore the paper should be loaded in the opposite
orientation to that for 1-sided printing.
If printing on such paper with letterheads, in which faces and directional orientations are specified, see "Paper Loading
Orientation" and load the paper in the proper orientation.
In the case where the last page is 1-sided printing
In cases such as where the last page for the 2-sided printing is 1-sided printing, specifying the following setting allows
you to print faster than normal 2-sided printing.
1. Press [ ] ( : Settings).
2. Select [Layout] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3. Select [Alternative Method] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4. Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
However, when performing 2-sided printing on punched paper or previously printed paper, the orientation or printing
surface of the last page may differ from other pages. In this case, set to [Off].
Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing)
㻞㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-052
You can print two pages of a document on each side of each sheet, and then fold the sheets in half to create a booklet.
Paper Type Paper Size
Plain paper
(60 to 90 g/m²)
Heavy paper
(91 to 120 g/m²)
Standard size paper
A4, Legal, Letter and Foolscap
Custom size paper:
210.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 279.4 to 355.6 mm long
IMPORTANT
Precautions when performing booklet printing
Do not touch the paper during booklet printing until it is completely output. The paper is first partially output after the
front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side.
Be sure to close the output selection cover before performing booklet printing.
"Paper Loading and Output"
1.
Click [Finishing].
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
2.
Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style].
Booklet Printing
㻞㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
You can also configure detailed settings such as the opening direction and gutter width for booklet printing in the [Detailed
Settings for Booklet] dialog box, displayed by clicking [Booklet].
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
NOTE
For details about the various settings in the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box, view the online help. (See "Viewing
the Online Help.")
3.
Click [OK].
NOTE
You cannot specify the [Finishing] options in the [Finishing] tab when performing Booklet Printing.
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-053
You can enlarge a one-page image and print it over multiple pages. You can then glue the printed pages together to create
a poster.
NOTE
[Poster Printing] can be selected under the following conditions:
[1-sided Printing] is selected from [Print Style] in the [Finishing] tab. For details, see "1-sided Printing and 2-sided
Printing."
[Auto] or [Enabled] is selected from [Spooling at Host] in the [Device Settings] tab. For instructions on how to
display the [Device Settings] tab, see "Setting the Printer Options."
1.
Click [Page Setup].
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
2.
Select [Poster [1 × 2]]/[Poster [N x N]] (N = 2, 3, or 4) from [Page Layout].
Poster Printing
㻞㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
NOTE
If you cannot select the options for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] tab, and then select [Auto] or [Enabled]
from [Spooling at Host]. For instructions on how to display the [Device Settings] tab, see "Setting the Printer Options."
3.
Click [OK].
NOTE
When outputting the pages face-up, the print sequence for the pages (the sheets into which the image is divided)
starts from the top left proceeds to the right. When outputting the pages face-down, the sequence starts from the
bottom right and proceeds to the left.
2-sided printing is not supported when performing poster printing. Switch to 1-sided printing.
"1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing"
Poster printing cannot be used together with "Watermark Printing", "Scaling Documents", or "Printing Multiple Pages
on One Sheet."
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-054
You can print a watermark (such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "COPY") on a document created using an application. You can
also register customized watermarks in addition to the predefined watermarks.
1.
Click [Page Setup].
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
2.
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
NOTE
By clicking [Edit Watermark], you can create and register new watermarks. For details, view the online help (see "Viewing
the Online Help").
Watermark Printing
㻞㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3.
Click [OK].
NOTE
You can register up to 50 watermarks, not including the watermarks already provided.
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-055
You can combine two or more files created using different applications and edit and print them as a single file.
1.
Select [Edit and Preview] from [Output Method].
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
2.
Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items.
NOTE
For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Online
Help.")
Combining and Printing Multiple Files
㻞㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3.
Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box of the application.
The [Canon PageComposer] dialog box is displayed.
4.
For each file you want to combine, repeat Steps 1 to 3.
5.
] (Combine Documents).
6.
7.
] (Print).
㻞㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
For details on settings of Canon PageComposer, see the Canon PageComposer online help.
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-056
Combinations of printer driver settings corresponding to a variety of printing purposes are provided with the printer driver as
"profiles." This enables you to print documents according to a desired objective by simply selecting a profile from the
[Profile] list.
You can register the customized profiles other than the various predefined profiles. (See "Registering a Profile for
Printing.")
1.
Select a profile from the [Profile] list according to your objective.
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
2.
Click [OK].
NOTE
If you cannot select a profile, display the printer properties dialog box from [Control Panel] and click the [Profile] tab,
then check [Allow Profile Selection] is selected. For details about how to display the printer properties dialog box,
see "Setting the Printer Options."
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Selecting a Profile for Printing
㻞㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-057
If you have registered frequently used settings as "profiles," you can apply the settings by simply selecting them from the
[Profile] list.
1.
Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items.
For instructions on how to specify the print settings, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings."
For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help (see "Viewing the Online Help").
2.
Enter additional information in [Comment] if necessary.
NOTE
To edit or delete a profile, in the printer driver screen, click [Edit] at the right of [Profile]. However, pre-defined
profiles cannot be modified.
If you cannot select a profile, display the printer properties dialog box from [Control Panel], click the [Profile] tab,
and then check whether [Allow Profile Selection] and [Allow Setting Addition] are selected. For details about how to
display the printer properties dialog box, see "Setting the Printer Options."
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Registering a Profile for Printing
㻞㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-058
Printing Fundamentals
Printing
Configuring the Default Page Settings
Setting the Printer Options
Viewing the Online Help
Viewing the Driver Guide
Printing Functions
Common Functions
[Layout] Preferences Pane
[Finishing] Preferences Pane
[Paper Source] Preferences Pane
[Quality] Preferences Pane
[Special Features] Preferences Pane
Scaling Documents
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing
Using [Presets] for Printing
Printing from a Computer (Macintosh)
㻞㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05A
This section explains the basic printing method using the printer driver.
NOTE
Printing methods may vary depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided
with the application.
1.
Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of the application.
NOTE
The [Page Setup] dialog box may not be displayed, depending on the application you are using. If this is the case, skip
to step 4. You can specify [Paper Size], [Orientation], and [Scale] in the [Print] dialog box.
2.
Select [Page Attributes] from [Settings].
3.
click [OK].
4.
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
Printing
㻞㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5.
6.
Select the appropriate preferences panes, and configure the print settings.
NOTE
The default setting for [Print Style] in the [Finishing] preferences pane is [2-sided printing]. For details, see "1-sided and
2-sided Printing."
For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Driver
Guide.")
㻞㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7.
Click [Print].
Printing begins.
NOTE
7RVWRSVHQGLQJGDWDWKDWLVZDLWLQJWREHRXWSXWIURP0DF26FOLFNWKHSULQWHULFRQLQWKH'RFNĺFOLFNWKHQDPH
RIWKHILOH\RXZDQWWRVWRSSULQWLQJĺFOLFN>'HOHWH@
The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05C
The procedure for configuring the page settings prior to printing is as follows.
1.
Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of the application.
2.
Select [Page Attributes] from [Settings].
3.
4.
Configuring the Default Page Settings
㻞㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The settings are saved as the default settings.
NOTE
The [Page Setup] dialog box may not be displayed, depending on the application you are using.
The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05E
Before printing, you need to set up the printer configuration in order to use the printer options (such as paper feed options,
paper output options, etc.) attached to and installed in the machine. When using the printer driver for the first time, or
changing the printer options, set up the printer configuration in the driver.
If the machine is connected by bidirectional communication, the options are set automatically when you verify the printer
information. If the machine is connected by unidirectional communication, you must set the options manually.
Verifying the Printer Information
Manually Setting the Printer Options
Setting the Printer Options
㻞㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05F
You can verify the communication method with the machine and the printer options (such as paper feed options, paper
output options, etc.) attached to and installed in machine.
If the machine is connected by bidirectional communication, the options are set automatically when you verify the printer
information.
Mac OS X 10.5
Mac OS X 10.6 and Later
Mac OS X 10.5
1.
2.
3.
Verifying the Printer Information
㻞㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Click [Utility].
4.
Click [Printer Information].
5.
If [Bidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], the options are automatically set.
If [Unidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], you must set the options manually (see "Manually Setting the
Printer Options").
Mac OS X 10.6 and Later
㻞㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
1.
2.
3.
4.
㻞㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Click [Printer Information].
5.
If [Bidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], the options are automatically set.
If [Unidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], you must set the options manually (see "Manually Setting the
Printer Options").
NOTE
If the printer driver name displayed at the top of the [Printer Information] dialog box and the printer name displayed
as [Name Retrieved from the Printer] do not correspond correctly, you may not be able to use the printer functions
correctly. If the names do not correspond, delete the printer you have added in [System Preferences] and add it
again. For details, see the NOTE (see "Printer Driver Installation Guide").
The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05H
If the machine is connected by unidirectional communication, you must set the printer options (such as paper feed options,
paper output options, etc.) attached to and installed in the machine manually.
NOTE
If the machine is connected by bidirectional communication, the settings for this procedure are disabled. Follow the
procedure in "Verifying the Printer Information" to automatically set the options.
1.
2.
3.
in the printer.
Manually Setting the Printer Options
㻞㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
Be sure to select only those options that are actually installed in the printer.
4.
Click [OK].
㻞㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05J
You can display the online help by clicking [ ] in the [Print] dialog box.
The online help includes additional information about every printing option. If this manual does not provide the information
you need, see the online help.
1.
].
Select one of the following preferences panes:
[Layout] preferences pane
[Finishing] preferences pane
[Paper Source] preferences pane
[Quality] preferences pane
[Special Features] preferences pane
The online help is displayed.
Viewing the Online Help
㻞㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05K
To view the driver guide, follow the procedure below.
1.
Open the [Documents] folder in the printer driver install set folder.
The location of the [Documents] folder may vary depending on the type and version of the printer driver.
2.
Double-click the "index.html" icon.
The driver guide is displayed.
NOTE
The location of the [Documents] folder may vary depending on the type and version of the printer driver.
Viewing the Driver Guide
㻞㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05L
This section explains printing functions which can be configured in the printer driver screen.
Common Functions
[Layout] Preferences Pane
[Finishing] Preferences Pane
[Paper Source] Preferences Pane
[Quality] Preferences Pane
[Special Features] Preferences Pane
NOTE
Available settings may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Click [ ] to the right of [Printer] to display all of the settings in the [Print] dialog box.
Printing Functions
㻞㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05R
Selecting [Print] from the [File] menu of the application displays the [Print] dialog box.
1.Printer Selection
Selects the printer to use from those
previously added to the [Printing] pane of
the [Print & Fax] or [Print & Scan] dialog
box in the [System Preferences].
2.Presets
Combinations of frequently
used settings can be saved
as presets. These saved
presets can then be
selected for printing (see
"Using [Presets] for
Printing").
3.Save As PDF Saves the document as a PDF file. 4.Copies Specifies the number of
copies to print.
5.Collated
If two or more copies are to be printed,
enables them to be output in sets. 6.Pages Specifies the range of
pages to be printed.
7. Output Paper
Size Enables you to select the paper size
actually output from the printer. You can
enlarge or reduce documents to match
the output paper size (see "Scaling
Documents").
NOTE
The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions.
If the above functions cannot be set in the upper part of the [Print] dialog box, display and set them in the [Copies
& Pages] preferences pane or the [Page Setup] dialog box.
Common Functions
㻞㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05U
1.1-sided/2-sided
Printing Prints on one or both sides of the paper. The
default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided printing]
(see "1-sided and 2-sided Printing").
2.Binding
Location/Gutter
Sets the
orientation
and width
of the
gutter.
NOTE
The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions.
[Finishing] Preferences Pane
㻞㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05W
1.Paper Source
When you want to print on a specific type of paper, specify the paper source containing
the paper, or the paper type.
NOTE
The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions.
[Paper Source] Preferences Pane
㻞㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05X
1.Quality Settings
Enables you to configure settings relating to print quality.
NOTE
The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions.
[Quality] Preferences Pane
㻞㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-05Y
1.Job
Processing
Enables you to change the output method so that print data is saved to a mail box in the printer
memory etc.
NOTE
The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions.
[Special Features] Preferences Pane
㻞㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-060
You can enlarge or reduce the size of the document to be printed.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the paper size to be printed to scale it automatically, or specify the
scaling value manually.
1.
Select [Page Attributes] from [Settings] in the [Page Setup] dialog box.
For details on how to display the [Page Setup] dialog box, see "Configuring the Default Page Settings."
2.
Where the paper size specified in the application and that specified in this preferences pane differ, scaling is set
automatically.
If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, specify the zoom ratio for [Scale].
3.
Click [OK].
4.
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
5.
NOTE
Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio
for the selected page size.
The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Scaling Documents
㻞㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-061
A multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper.
1.
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
2.
of paper from [Pages per Sheet].
3.
Select the page order from [Layout Direction].
4.
If you want to add a border to each page, select the line type from [Border].
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
㻞㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5.
Click [Print].
NOTE
You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-062
You can select whether to print on one side or both sides of each sheet of paper.
Paper Type Paper Size
Plain paper
(60 to 90 g/m²)
Heavy paper
(91 to 120 g/m²)
Standard size paper
A4, Legal, Letter and Foolscap
Custom size paper:
210.0 to 215.9 mm wide and 279.4 to 355.6 mm long
Before performing 2-sided printing, see "Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing)."
IMPORTANT
Precautions when performing 2-sided printing
Do not touch the paper during 2-sided printing until it is completely output. The paper is first partially output after
the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side.
Be sure to close the output selection cover before performing 2-sided printing.
"Paper Loading and Output"
Printing on the back side of paper whose front side is already printed
This printer enables you to perform 2-sided printing by manually inserting the back side of the paper* whose front side
was previously printed even if the paper cannot be used for 2-sided printing.
When printing on the back side of paper whose front side was previously printed, flatten out any curled paper and load
one sheet of paper at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
*This is only for paper that has been printed using this printer. Also, you cannot print again on the same side of the
paper that was printed before.
1.
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
2.
[Print Style].
1-sided and 2-sided Printing
㻞㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided printing]. You can save the 1-sided printing setting as a preset. For details,
see "Using [Presets] for Printing."
3.
Select the binding edge from [Binding Location].
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
4.
If you want to set the gutter width, click [Gutter].
㻞㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you do not set the gutter width, skip to step 6.
5.
6.
Click [Print].
NOTE
The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
㻞㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-063
You can save print settings that you specified in each preferences pane of the [Print] dialog box use as a preset. A preset
is a combination of settings that you use frequently, saved as a single setting. If you select a preset when printing a file, the
file will be printed with the saved settings.
1.
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
2.
print settings you want to save as a preset.
Note
For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Online
Help.")
3.
Select [Save As] from [Presets].
4.
The saved preset will be displayed in [Presets] in the [Print] dialog box.
Using [Presets] for Printing
㻞㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5.
NOTE
7RHGLWDSUHVHWLQWKH>3ULQW@GLDORJER[VHOHFWWKHSUHVHWĺVSHFLI\WKHSULQWHUGULYHUVHWWLQJVĺVHOHFW>6DYH@IURP
[Presets].
7RFKDQJHDSUHVHWVQDPHVHOHFWWKHSUHVHWĺVHOHFW>5HQDPH@IURP>3UHVHWV@
7RGHOHWHDSUHVHWVHOHFWWKHSUHVHWĺVHOHFW>'HOHWH@IURP>3UHVHWV@
㻞㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-064
When the setting values for the same item are different between an application or the printer driver and the menu
functions, the setting specified in the application or printer driver is effective. When specifying an item only in the menu
functions using the control panel or the Remote UI, the most recently specified setting is effective.
Setting priority of direct print
The direct print function gives priority to the contents specified using the [Direct Print] menu in the Remote UI or tags in
IFD (Image file directory) that the header of TIFF data of image file has over those specified using the control panel or the
[Preferences] menu in the Remote UI.
Some of the tag function that the header of TIFF data has may not become valid.
Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple
Methods)
㻞㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-065
This printer allows you to specify the printing functions from the printer driver. However, some printing functions are
specified from the control panel or the Remote UI. The following table shows the functions to be specified from the control
panel or the Remote UI.
For details on the items you can manage using the control panel, see "Setting Items."
Function Overview of the Function
Multi-purpose tray
paper size
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Multi-purpose tray
priority
Specifies whether the printer should detect the paper source in order starting with the multi-
purpose tray.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Drawer N (N=1, 2,
3) size
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1 or 2).
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Standard paper size
Since paper size cannot be specified when printing from DOS, UNIX or other operating system,
specify it using this setting.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Diff. paper tray
Specifies whether to use the multi-purpose tray when the paper settings for the selected paper
source are not the same as the paper settings in the received data.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Auto selection
Specifies the paper source to be automatically selected.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Standard paper type
Since paper type cannot be specified when printing from DOS, UNIX or other operating system,
specify it using this setting.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Adjust Print Position
Adjusts the printing position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction (X).
"[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
Alternative method
If the last page for the 2-sided printing is 1-sided printing, 1-sided printing is applied to the last
page.
"[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)"
Image Refinement Set whether to use the smoothing process to print the jagged edges of text and graphics.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
Recovery printing
Specifies whether to print the partially printed page when the printer stops printing due to a
paper jam or an error occurring.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
Check paper size
Specifies whether the printer should stop printing, displaying the message <Check paper size.>
or continue printing.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
Substitute size
The printer switches the paper size if the paper of the size to be used is not loaded in the
printer.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
Plain paper curl
adjustment
If printed plain paper curls, specify the setting for this item.
Functions Which Can Be Specified from the Control Panel
㻞㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-066
The direct print function is a function that transmits a file from the host terminal to the printer without the printer driver and
allows the printer to detect the file and print. Therefore, you do not need to open a file to print.
Direct Print from the Remote UI
You can specify PDF, TIFF, JPEG, PS, EPS, or XPS format image files from the remote UI and perform Direct Print.
For details on operating the Remote UI, see "Remote UI."
Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function
Printing the PS/EPS File Using the Direct Print Function
Printing the TIFF/JPEG File Using the Direct Print Function
Printing the XPS File Using the Direct Print Function
<Direct Print using Command Prompt>
You can Direct Print using the LPR command line.
"Direct Printing from Command Prompt"
IMPORTANT
When printing PDF files using the direct print function
The PDF version that is supported is version 1.7.
Decoding of encrypted PDF files is supported. The following encryption algorithms can be handled.
RC4 128bit
AES 128bit
AES 256bit
When printing image files using the direct print function
JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81. TIFF data is in compliance with
the specifications of Adobe TIFF Revision 6.0.
The supporting status of encoding methods for JPEG data is as follows.
Supported encoding method
DCT baseline
Unsupported encoding methods
DCT extension
Reversible compression
Hierarchical
The supporting status of encoding methods for TIFF data is as follows.
Supported encoding methods
Uncompressed
ITU-T recommendation T.4 One-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.4 Two-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.6 Basic facsimile coding
ITU-T recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT only)
Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print)
㻞㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits)
LZW
Unsupported encoding methods
ITU-T recommendation T.82 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.43 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.44 MRC
NOTE
If you cannot print a file using the direct print function or if the printing position is skewed
The file may be printed properly by opening it from an application and using the printer driver.
㻞㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-067
1
Start the Remote UI.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Select [PDF File] from the [Direct Print] menu.
3
Specify [Select PDF File].
When specifying [File Path]
Click [Browse...], select the file, and then click [Open...].
When specifying [URL]
Enter the URL of the PDF file that you want to print.
If you specify a URL that requires user authentication, enter [User Name] and [Password].
When specifying a URL and printing, the next print job cannot be performed until the PDF is finished downloading or
the connection with the Web server is terminated.
The protocol for specifying a URL and printing only supports HTTP.
Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function
㻞㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Enter the password in [Document Password] when a password is specified for opening the document
or when it is necessary to enter a password to print.
If printing is attempted without entering a password, <Cannot decode PDF data.> is displayed, and printing is cancelled.
When printing PDF files with settings that do not allow them to be printed or when printing in high resolution PDF files
with settings that only allow them to be printed in low resolution, enter the master password.
When you print a PDF file linked to a policy server, enter [Policy Server User Name] and [Policy Server Password].
5
Specify the setting for [Specify Print Range].
㻞㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[All] Select if you want to print all the pages.
[Pages] Select [Pages], and then enter the starting page number and ending page number if you want
to specify the print range.
6
Specify the settings for [Quality Settings] as the following, as needed.
[Resolution] Specify the resolution for printing the data. It is effective to set [600 dpi] when printing
photographs at standard quality, and to set [1200 dpi] when printing at a higher quality.
[Dot Gain
Adjustment]
You can adjust dotted areas to change darkness and lightness of painted areas. A higher
number specifies a darker printed area.
7
Specify the settings for [Halftones] as the following, as needed.
㻞㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Halftones]
Specify the halftone display method when printing.
You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] and [Image].
[Resolution]: You can perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality.
It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation]: You can print with a sharp gradation and well-balanced texture, contrasting
light and shade, which is best suited for printing photo images.
[High
Resolution]:
You can print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen
clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines.
8
Specify the settings for [Color Settings] as the following, as needed.
[Grayscale
Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing.
This setting is for converting color data to B&W data.
[sRGB]: It calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion
method.
㻞㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Conversion] [NTSC]: It calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion
method.
[Uniform
RGB]:
It takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the
grayscale value.
9
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed.
[Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed.
[Paper Size]
Specify the size of paper to print.
If data is input that is outside the engine's maximum and minimum paper size range when the
paper size is automatic, it is printed on the paper size that is set with [Standard Paper Size].
[Auto]: It selects the most suitable paper source for the PDF file page size, and prints.
Other
than
[Auto]:
It prints so that the long side of the page size of the PDF file and the long side
of the selected paper size go in the same direction.
[Paper Type] Specify the type of paper to print.
[Manual Feed] You can fix the paper source in the multi-purpose tray.
[Enlarge/Reduce to
Fit Paper Size]
If the check box is selected, it fixes the aspect ratio and scales it to fit with the effective print
area of the paper size that is set and prints. However if [Paper Size] is set as [Auto], this item
cannot be set.
[Enlarge Print Area]
Specify whether to expand the printable area and print.
Depending on the document to be printed, part of the edges of the paper may not be
printed.
[Print 2-Sided] Specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing.
[Binding Location]
Set the binding position on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of
the paper (short-edged binding). If binding is set from the printer side, the position of the
"gutter" is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper.
㻞㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[N on 1] You can print multiple pages of the PDF file data arranged on one page.
When printing multiple pages side by side, set [Paper Size] to a setting other than [Auto].
[Page Order] The [N on 1] setting enables you to set the order the pages will be arranged on the paper
when printing multiple pages on one page.
[Finishing]
(It is only displayed when an SD card is used.)
It collates and prints in page or section units.
[Off]: Print the number of copies specified for every page.
[Collate]: The specified number of copies are collated.
[Comment Print]
Specify whether to print the notes of PDF files.
[Off]: The notes are not printed.
[Auto]: It only prints the notes that are specified within the PDF file as printable.
[Store in Box]
(It is only displayed when an SD card is used.)
When storing it in a box, check the [Store in Box] check box before selecting the box where
you want to store it.
10
Click [Start Printing].
Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you
keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it.
ĺWhen the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed.
Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent.
㻞㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻞㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Specify the settings for [Quality Settings] as the following, as needed.
[Resolution] Specify the resolution for printing the data. It is effective to set [600 dpi] when printing
photographs at standard quality, and to set [1200 dpi] when printing at a higher quality.
5
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed.
㻞㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed.
[Print 2-Sided] Specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing.
[Binding Location]
Set the binding position on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of
the paper (short-edged binding). If binding is set from the printer side, the position of the
"gutter" is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper.
[Store in Box]
(It is only displayed when an SD card is used.)
When storing it in a box, check the [Store in Box] check box before selecting the box where
you want to store it.
6
Click [Start Printing].
Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you
keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it.
㻞㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
ĺWhen the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed.
Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent.
㻞㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Specify the setting for [Specify Print Range].
[All] Select if you want to print all the pages.
[Pages]
Select [Pages], and then enter the starting page number and ending page number if you want
to specify the print range.
You cannot print JPEG data by specifying a print range.
5
Specify the setting for [Quality Settings].
㻞㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Resolution] Specify the resolution for printing the data. It is effective to set [600 dpi] when printing
photographs at standard quality, and to set [1200 dpi] when printing at a higher quality.
[Halftones]
Specify the halftone display method when printing.
[Resolution]: You can perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality.
It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation]: You can print with a sharp gradation and well-balanced texture, contrasting
light and shade, which is best suited for printing photo images.
[High
Resolution]:
You can print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen
clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines.
6
Specify the setting for [Color Settings].
㻞㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Grayscale
Conversion]
Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing.
This setting is for converting color data to B&W data.
[sRGB]: It calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion
method.
[NTSC]: It calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion
method.
[Uniform
RGB]:
It takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the
grayscale value.
7
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed.
[Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed.
[Paper Size] Specify the size of paper to print.
[Paper Type] Specify the type of paper to print.
[Image Orientation] Select the orientation of the images from [Auto], [Vertical] or [Horizontal].
[Print Position]
Set the location of the images from [Auto], [Center] or [Top Left]. When [Auto] is selected, if the
print location is specified in the TIFF format data, it will print at the specified location. If the
print location is not set, it will print centered. Since print location is not specified in JPEG
format, if [Auto] is selected, it will print centered.
[Zoom] Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the printing. When it is set to [Auto], it automatically
scales them to match with the effective print area of the paper and prints.
[Enlarge Print Area]
Specify whether to expand the printable area and print.
Depending on the document to be printed, part of the edges of the paper may not be
printed.
[Print 2-Sided] When it is set, it will print 2-sided.
[Binding Location]
Set the binding position on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of
the paper (short-edged binding).
If binding is set from the printer side, the position of the "gutter" is automatically adjusted on the
front and back sides of the paper.
㻞㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Show Warnings]
You can select a job processing method for when it detects an Imaging function error.
When it is set to [Print], the error description list is printed at the same time.
[Print] The error description is printed on the paper and the job is terminated.
[Panel] The error message is displayed on the printer's display, and printing stops.
[Off] Even if an error occurs and nothing is displayed, the job is terminated.
8
Click [Start Printing].
Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you
keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it.
ĺWhen the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed.
Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent.
㻞㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻞㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06A
1
Start the Remote UI.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Select [XPS Files] from the [Direct Print] menu.
3
Specify [Select XPS File].
(1) Click [Browse...], select the file, and then click [Open...].
(2) Clear the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box.
If the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box is selected, some items cannot be set via the Remote UI. To use all the print
settings made via the Remote UI, clear the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box.
Printing the XPS File Using the Direct Print Function
㻞㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Specify the setting for [Specify Print Range].
[All] Select if you want to print all the pages.
[Pages] Select [Pages], and then enter the starting page number and ending page number if you want
to specify the print range.
5
Specify the settings for [Quality Settings] as the following, as needed.
㻞㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Resolution] Specify the resolution for printing the data. It is effective to set [600 dpi] when printing
photographs at standard quality, and to set [1200 dpi] when printing at a higher quality.
6
Specify the settings for [Halftones] as the following, as needed.
[Halftones]
Specify the halftone display method when printing.
You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] and [Image].
[Resolution] You can perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It
is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation] You can print with a sharp gradation and well-balanced texture, contrasting
light and shade, which is best suited for printing photo images.
[High
Resolution]
You can print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly.
It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines.
㻞㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7
Specify the settings for [Color Settings] as the following, as needed.
[Grayscale
Conversion]
Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing.
You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] and [Image].
This setting is for converting color data to B&W data.
[sRGB]: It calculates the grayscale value using the RGB standard color conversion
method.
[NTSC]: It calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion
method.
[Uniform
RGB]:
It takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the
grayscale value.
8
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed.
㻞㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed.
[Paper Size]
Specify the size of paper to print.
If data is input that is outside the engine's maximum and minimum paper size range when the
paper size is automatic, it is printed on the paper size that is set with [Standard Paper Size].
[Auto]: It selects the most suitable paper source for the XPS file page size, and
prints.
Other than
[Auto]:
It prints so that the long side of the XPS file and the long side of the selected
paper size go in the same direction.
[Paper Type] Specify the type of paper to print.
[Manual Feed] You can fix the paper source in the multi-purpose tray.
[Enlarge/Reduce to
Fit Paper Size]
If the check box is selected, it fixes the aspect ratio and scales it to fit with the effective print
area of the paper size that is set and prints. However if [Paper Size] is set as [Auto], this item
cannot be set.
[Enlarge Print Area]
Specify whether to expand the printable area and print.
Depending on the document to be printed, part of the edges of the paper may not be
printed.
[Print 2-Sided] Specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing.
[Binding Location]
Set the binding position on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of
the paper (short-edged binding). If binding is set from the printer side, the position of the
"gutter" is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper.
[N on 1] You can print multiple pages of the XPS file data arranged on one page.
When printing multiple pages side by side, set [Paper Size] to a setting other than [Auto].
[Page Order] The [N on 1] setting enables you to set the order the pages will be arranged on the paper
when printing multiple pages on one page.
[Finishing]
(It is only displayed when an SD card is used.)
It collates and prints in page or section units.
[Off]: Print the number of copies specified for every page.
[Collate]: The specified number of copies are collated.
(It is only displayed when an SD card is used.)
㻞㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Store in Box] When storing it in a box, check the [Store in Box] check box before selecting the box where
you want to store it.
9
Click [Start Printing].
Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you
keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it.
ĺWhen the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed.
Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent.
㻞㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06C
The command of the following format is effective.
lpr (a space) -S (a space) <the IP address of the printer> (a space) -P (a space) <the printer name> (a space) <the file
name>
The printer name Enter the printer name. You can check the printer name in [Device Name] on the Remote UI
portal page.
The file name Enter the name of the file to be printed.
Input Example
<If the IP address of the printer is "192.168.0.215", if the printer name is "LBP-Printer", and if the file name is
"sample.jpg">
lpr -S 192.168.0.215 -P LBP-Printer sample.jpg
NOTE
The settings which can be used for Direct Print
The settings specified using the printer's control panel become effective. You can use the following [Setup] menus.
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) "
"[Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)"
Direct Printing from Command Prompt
㻞㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06E
You can print data in USB memory device directly from the machine. Because it is possible to print without a computer, you
can easily print data stored in a USB memory device at a location where the machine is installed. This makes immediate
handling possible when printed documents are needed quickly.
Printing Directly from USB Memory Device
You can print files directly from a USB memory device that is connected to the printer.
Print Setting Menu List
You can change the settings when printing.
Changing the Default Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria
You can change the default print settings and default file display sorting criteria. Settings that are often used can be
conveniently set in advance as defaults.
Remove the USB Memory Device
Remove the USB memory device after printing has stopped. Use the correct method to remove the USB memory
device.
IMPORTANT
In order to use USB memory devices, the following settings are necessary.
Set [MEAP Driver] to [Off].
(1) Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Interface] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(2) Select [Interface Selection] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(3) Select [USB Storage Device] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(4) Select [MEAP Driver] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(5) Select [Off] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Enable [USB Direct Print] under [USB Direct Print Settings] in the Remote UI.
"Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print"
About USB memory support
Only the file format FAT32 is supported.
USB memory drives cannot be read by this printer if:
these drives are partitioned
these drives contain encrypted data
Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print)
㻞㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06F
1
Insert the USB memory device into USB memory slot at the top of the printer.
2
Press [ ] ( : Application).
The "USB Direct Print Mode Screen" is displayed.
When the department ID management function is enabled, the authentication screen appears. After you enter the
department ID and password, select [<Log In>], and then press [OK].
NOTE
In order to automatically display the USB direct print mode screen
When the [Automatically Display USB Direct Print Screen] setting is checked on [USB Direct Print Settings] in the [Edit
Management Settings] on the Remote UI, the "USB Direct Print Mode Screen" is displayed automatically when a USB
memory device is inserted.
"Starting the Remote UI"
3
Select [Select File(s)] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Changing the order of the files displayed in Step 5
(1) Select [Sort Files] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Printing Directly from USB Memory Device
㻞㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2) When the message is displayed, press [OK].
(3) Select the sorting criteria with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Select the type of file to print with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5
Select the file to print with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
[ ] will be attached to the file name. If a file with [ ] attached is selected, and [OK] is pressed again, the
selection is removed.
If a folder is selected, and [OK] is pressed, the list of files inside the folder is displayed.
If [<Clear All>] is selected, all the file selections are removed.
Up to 10 files in the same folder can be selected.
If the folder hierarchy is moved, all of the file selections are removed.
6
Select [<Apply>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When printing using an XPS file print ticket
㻞㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Select [<Use Print Ticket>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(2) Select [<Start Printing>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
It is printed using the print settings specified inside the file.
7
Select [<Start Printing>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
To confirm/ change the print settings, select the setting to be confirmed/changed with [ ] and [ ], and then press
[OK]. For details on print settings, see "Print Setting Menu List."
The selected file begins printing.
Remove the USB memory device after printing has finished.
"Remove the USB Memory Device"
㻞㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06H
You can set the following items when printing.
NOTE
Viewing the Tables
The default value for each setting is displayed in bold text. To change the default values, see "Changing the Default
Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria."
The items and setting values marked with "*" may or may not be displayed depending on the availability of the
optional accessories or the content of the setting.
Items that can be set for all file formats
Setting Item Setting
Value Setting
[No. of Copies] 1 to
9999
Specify the number of copies to be printed. Only the number of copies specified by
the setting value are printed.
[Resolution]
[600
dpi] /
[1200
dpi]
You can specify the resolution before making a print.
[600 dpi]: Prints with 600 dpi resolution. Suitable for printing regular files and tables.
[1200 dpi]: Prints with 1200 dpi resolution. Enables you to clearly print fine text and
diagrams. Particularly suitable for data that includes a lot of small text or fine lines.
[2-Sided Printing] [Off] /
[On]
Specify whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper.
When it is set to [On], it prints on both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location]
[Long
Edge] /
[Short
Edge]
It sets the binding location on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or
the short side of the paper (short-edged binding). During 2-sided printing, the
binding location is automatically adjusted on both the front and back sides.
When it is set to [Long Edge], the binding location is on the long side of the
paper.
When it is set to [Short Edge], the binding location is on the short side of the
paper.
[Enlarge Print Area] [Off] /
[On]
Specify whether to expand the printable area and print.
When it is set to [On], the printable area is expanded and printed.
When it is set to [Off], the effective print area becomes that area except for 5
mm at the top, bottom right and left edges.
When it is set to [On], images on the edges of the paper may be partially
cut off.
Items that can be set for PDF/XPS formats
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Print Range]
[Designation Method] :
[All] / [Specified
Pages]
[Page Range] : [First
Page] / [Last Page]
Specify the print range. Only the range specified by the setting
value is printed.
When [All] is selected, all the pages are printed.
When [Specified Pages] is selected, and the page range is
entered, only the specified page range is printed. If the page
range is selected, select [<Apply>], and then press [OK].
[Page Range] is only displayed when [Specified Pages] is
selected in [Designation Method].
Specify the size of paper to output.
Print Setting Menu List
㻞㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Select Paper]
[Auto] / [Multi-
Purpose Tray] /
[Drawer 1] / [Drawer
2]*/[Drawer 3]*
When it is set to [Auto], it selects the most suitable paper
source for the page size of the file to be printed, and prints.
When it is not set to [Auto], it prints so that the long side of the
page size of the file to be printed and the long side of the
selected paper size go in the same direction.
You cannot select the paper source for which a custom
paper size is specified.
[Halftones]
[Text] : [Resolution] /
[Gradation] / [High
Resolution]
[Graphics] :
Resolution] /
[Gradation] / [High
Resolution]
[Image] :
[Resolution] /
[Gradation] / [High
Resolution]
Specify the halftone display method when printing.
You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] and [Image].
[Resolution] allows you to perform printing that combines
smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing
graphics or graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation] allows you to print with a sharp gradation and well-
balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best
suited for printing photo images.
[High Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the
edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing
data containing text and fine lines.
[Match Paper Size] [Off] / [On]
When it is set to [On], it automatically scales them to match with the
effective print area of the output paper and prints.
When the [Select Paper] setting on the printer is set to
[Auto], this setting is not available.
[N on 1]
[Off] / [2 on 1] / [4 on
1] / [6 on 1] / [8 on 1] /
[9 on 1] / [16 on 1]
You can print multiple pages of the file data to be printed arranged
on one page.
When the [Paper Size] setting on the printer is set to [Auto],
this setting is not available.
[Finishing] [Off] / [Collate]
Specify the finishing options.
When it is set to [Off], the number of copies set for each page
is printed.
when it is set to [Collate], the specified number of copies are
collated.
Items that can be set for JPEG/TIFF formats
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Print Range (TIFF)]
[Designation Method]
:[All] / [Specified
Pages]
[Page Range] : [First
Page] / [Last Page]
Specify the print range. Only the range specified by the setting value
is printed.
When [All] is selected, all the pages are printed.
When [Specified Pages] is selected, and the page range is
entered, only the specified page range is printed. If the page
range is selected, select [<Apply>], and then press [OK].
[Page Range] is only displayed when [Specified Pages] is
selected in [Designation Method].
[Select Paper]
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
/[Drawer 1] /
[Drawer 2]*/[Drawer
3]*
Specify the paper size for printing.
Print with the paper size specified for the selected paper source.
You cannot select the paper source for which a custom paper
size is specified.
Specify the halftone display method when printing.
[Resolution] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth
㻟㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Halftones]
[Resolution] /
[Gradation] /
[High Resolution]
gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or
graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation] allows you to print with a sharp gradation and well-
balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best
suited for printing photo images.
[High Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the
edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing
data containing text and fine lines.
[Zoom] [Off] / [Auto]
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the printing.
When it is set to [On], it automatically scales them to match with
the effective print area of the output paper and prints.
[Image Orientation] [Auto] / [Vertical] /
[Horizontal] Specify whether to print the image vertically or horizontally.
[Print Position] [Auto] / [Center] /
[Top Left] Specify the location where the image will be printed.
㻟㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06J
1
Press [ ] ( : Application).
The "USB Direct Print Mode Screen" is displayed.
When the department ID management function is enabled, the authentication screen appears. After you enter the
department ID and password, select [<Log In>], and then press [OK].
2
Select [USB Print Settings] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select items for which to set default values using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
Set default print settings
(1) Select [PDF/XPS Default Set.] or [JPEG/TIFF Def. Set.] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
(2) Set the default value of each item.
For details on the settings, see "Print Setting Menu List."
Setting default values for file display sorting criteria
(1) Select [File Sort Def. Set.] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(2) Select the default sorting criteria using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
Changing the Default Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria
㻟㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06K
IMPORTANT
When removing USB memory devices
Always use the following procedure when removing USB memory devices.
Using other methods to remove USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the printer.
1
Display the "USB Direct Print Mode Screen."
When other screens are displayed, press [ ] ( : Back) or [ ] ( : Application) until the "USB Direct Print
Mode Screen" is displayed.
2
Select [<Remove USB Memory>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [Yes] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
When the following message is displayed, remove the USB memory device from the printer.
Remove the USB Memory Device
㻟㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If an error message is displayed, wait a few seconds before starting the removal procedure again from the beginning.
㻟㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06L
E-mail print is a function in which this printer receives e-mails sent from the host terminal and prints the text as well as the
attached files. Therefore, you do not need to use a printer driver or open the attached files to print.
Available Protocol Requirements
POP3
The UIDL command of the POP3 protocol needs to be supported. You can access the mail
server but cannot receive e-mails in the following circumstances. For details on the mail server,
ask your network administrator.
The UIDL command is not supported
The response to the UIDL command is negative ("-ERR")
Select the [POP3 RX] check box.*
SMTP
Set the IP address of the printer.
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
Select the [SMTP RX] check box.*
For other settings and the setting procedures, see "How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print" and specify them as
needed.
How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print
You can set e-mail print settings from the printer control panel, Remote UI or FTP client.
Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually
You can receive and print e-mails manually. There are two types of manual printing methods: printing from the printer
control panel and printing from the Remote UI.
Printing the E-mail Receive Log List
You can print the e-mail sending/receiving history. You can print the subject and sender in sending/receiving history.
There are two ways of printing e-mail sending/receiving history: from the printer control panel and from the Remote UI.
When E-mail Print Fails
If for some reason an email does not print normally, an error message is displayed on the printer display or Remote
UI and network status print, or an error code is displayed in the e-mail sending/receiving history. Take action
according to the displayed error messages and error codes.
IMPORTANT
Restrictions for E-mail Print
Attached files are printable only when they are in TIFF or JPEG format.
The number of attached files has to be 3 or less for each mail. If the number exceeds 3, the first 3 files are printed.
However, the files of the 4th or later are not printed.
The body of an HTML e-mail is printed as a plain text message.
E-mail text is printed with its mail header information.
If the number of characters in one text line (without a line break) in an e-mail exceeds 1000, an automatic linefeed
is performed. Because of this, the text in the next line may not be printed properly.
Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)
㻟㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Restrictions for E-mail Print (Only when the optional SD card is installed)
If text data of an e-mail exceeds 25 MB, the text is not printed.
If header data of an e-mail exceeds 20 KB, the excess part of 20 KB or more header data is not printed.
Attached files are printable only when the size of each file is 100 MB or less. Attached files of more than 100 MB
are not printed.
If the size of an e-mail exceeds 1.5 GB, the e-mail text is not printed.
Emails cannot be printed if there is no free space on the SD card.
JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81.
On e-mail print with this printer, JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81. TIFF
data is in compliance with the specifications of Adobe TIFF Revision6.0 and IETF RFC2301 (File Format for Internet
FAX).
Internet FAX Simple Mode is supported.
The e-mail print function of this printer supports Internet FAX Simple Mode.
About the supporting status of encoding methods for JPEG data
For this printer, the supporting status is as follows.
Supported encoding method
DCT baseline
Unsupported encoding methods
DCT extension
Reversible compression
Hierarchical
About the supporting status of encoding methods for TIFF data
For this printer, the supporting status is as follows.
Supported encoding methods
Uncompressed
ITU-T recommendation T.4 One-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.4 Two-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.6 Basic facsimile coding
ITU-T recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT only)
PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits)
LZW
Unsupported encoding methods
ITU-T recommendation T.82 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.43 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.44 MRC
About the supporting status for encoding types
For this printer, the supporting status is as follows.
7bit
8bit
binary
quoted-printable
base64
uuencode
x-uuencode
About the supporting status for character sets
For this printer, the supporting status is as follows. (If no character sets are specified, the data is processed with "us-
ascii.")
us-ascii
iso-8859-1
iso-8859-15
㻟㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06R
Before performing the setup, see "Attention (How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print)."
You can set e-mail print settings from the printer control panel, Remote UI or FTP client.
This section describes the procedures for registering or changing the settings using a Web browser (Remote UI).
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Network] under [Preferences] in the [Settings/Registration] menu.
3
Click [E-Mail Print Settings].
How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print
㻟㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Edit...] on the right side of [E-Mail Print Settings].
5
Specify the settings for the e-mail print function.
㻟㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you want to use the POP3 protocol
[POP3 Server
Name] Specifies the name or sets the IP address of the server which receives e-mails.
[POP3 User Name] Specifies the name of the user which receives e-mails.
You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
[Set/Change
Password] Specifies the password for the name of the user which receives e-mails.
[Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password.
You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
[Confirm] For confirmation, enter the same [Password] again.
[POP3 RX Interval]
Set the interval for automatically connecting to the server that receives e-mail in minute units.
Receive e-mail at specified intervals and print it automatically.
You can set from [0] (minutes) to [90] (minutes).
When it is set to [0], it does not automatically receive e-mail from the server.
When it is set to [0] and when you want to connect to the server before it automatically
connects to the server that receives e-mail, you can receive e-mail manually.
"Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually"
[POP3 RX] Specifies whether to enable the e-mail print function.
[POP3 Server Port
Number]
Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails. You can specify the port
number between [0] and [65535].
If you want to use the SMTP protocol
[SMTP RX] When it is checked, e-mail is relayed using SMTP protocol and it is automatically received and
printed.
[SMTP Server Port
Number]
Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails. You can specify the port
number between [0] and [65535].
6
㻟㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Click [OK].
㻟㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06S
The following are settings for printing e-mails.
You can set them from the printer control panel, Remote UI or FTP client.
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Settings for Using the POP3 Protocol
Option Setting
Setting Method
Control
Panel
Remote
UI
FTP
Client
POP3 Server Name Specifies the name or sets the IP address of the server which
receives e-mails.
POP3 User Name Specifies the name of the user which receives e-mails.
Password Specifies the password for the name of the user which receives
e-mails.
POP3 RX Interval
Set the interval for automatically connecting to the server that
receives e-mails in minute units. Receive e-mail at specified
intervals and print it automatically.
POP3 RX Specifies whether to enable the e-mail print function. When it is
enabled, e-mail is automatically received and printed.
POP3 Server Port
Number Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails.
E-Mail RX Performs manual receiving of e-mails.
Settings for Using the SMTP Protocol
Option Setting
Setting Method
Control
Panel
Remote
UI
FTP
Client
SMTP RX Select whether to enable the e-mail printing function. When it is
enabled, e-mail is automatically received and printed.
SMTP Server Port
Number Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails.
Other Settings
Option Setting
Setting Method
Control
Panel
Remote
UI
FTP
Client
Print History List (E-
Mail Print) Prints e-mail print logs.
Show Warnings
Specifies whether a message should appear or any indicator
should blink when a reception error has occurred on printing e-
mails.
Print E-Mail Text Specifies whether the printer should print the text on printing e-
mails.
Limit E-Mail Print Specifies whether to limit the number of the print pages of e-
Attention (How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print)
㻟㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
mail text.
㻟㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06U
There are two types of manual printing methods: printing from the printer control panel and printing from the Remote UI.
IMPORTANT
Receiving E-mails
The printer can receive e-mails only when it is online.
When using POP3 protocol
When it is set to receive e-mail automatically using [POP3 RX Interval], if you attempt to receive e-mail manually while e-
mail is being received automatically, your actions will be ignored.
"How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print"
When using SMTP protocol
It automatically receives and prints e-mails. There is no need to manually receive and print them.
"How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print"
Printing from the Printer Control Panel
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
2
Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display the Utility menu.
3
Press [ ] and [ ], select [E-Mail Print Utility], and then press [OK].
4
Press [ ] and [ ], select [Received E-Mails], and then press [OK].
5
When <Execute?> is displayed, press [ ], select [Yes], and then press [OK].
The printer is connected to the mail server. The printer receives e-mails addressed to the printer and print them.
Printing from a Remote UI
1
Start the Remote UI.
Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually
㻟㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Network] under [Preferences] in the [Settings/Registration] menu.
3
Click [E-Mail Print Settings].
4
Click [E-Mail RX] on the right side of [E-Mail Print Settings].
The printer is connected to the mail server. The printer receives e-mails addressed to the printer and print them.
㻟㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻟㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06W
Before beginning to print, see "Attention (Printing E-mail Sending/Receiving History)."
Printing from the Printer Control Panel
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
2
Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display the Utility menu.
3
Press [ ] and [ ], select [E-Mail Print Utility], and then press [OK].
4
Press [ ] and [ ], select [Received E-mail List], and then press [OK].
5
When <Execute?> is displayed, press [ ], select [Yes], and then press [OK].
The e-mail receive log list is printed.
Printing from a Remote UI
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Utility Menu] under [Output/Control] in the [Settings/Registration] menu.
Printing the E-mail Receive Log List
㻟㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Select [E-Mail RX History List], and then click [Execute].
The e-mail receive log list is printed.
㻟㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06X
IMPORTANT
Deleting all the e-mail receive logs
Delete them using the following procedure.
When the optional SD card is installed
Format the SD card using the procedure in [SD Card Maintenance].
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
When the optional SD card is not installed
Turn the printer OFF.
"Turning the Printer ON/OFF"
NOTE
About the e-mail receive log
Up to 60 e-mail receive logs can be printed.
If an e-mail is not printed properly for some reason
An error code is printed in [RX Results] in the e-mail receive log. See "When E-mail Print Fails."
Attention (Printing E-mail Sending/Receiving History)
㻟㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-06Y
Perform the following actions depending on the displayed error messages and error codes.
Error messages and error codes are displayed in the following locations.
Printer Display
Remote UI ([Error Information] page in the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu)
Network Status Print
"The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode"
E-Mail Sending/Receiving History
See "Printing the E-mail Receive Log List" for printing methods.
The error messages that appear in the display, Remote UI, and Network Status Print
Error Message
Cause Remedy
Display
Remote
UI,Network
Status
Print
EM POP3 server
error.
POP3
Server
Connection
Error
Could not connect to the POP3
server when printing e-mails.
Check the following points.
Whether the following settings in
the [Network] page in the Remote
UI are correct
[POP3 Server Name] and
[POP3 Server Port Number] in
[E-Mail Print Settings]
DNS in [TCP/IP Settings]
Whether the POP3 server and
the DNS server are operating
properly
POP3
Server User
Name Error
Failed to authenticate the user name
in the POP3 server when printing e-
mails.
Check the following points.
Whether the setting for [POP3
User Name] in [E-Mail Print
Settings] in the [Network] page in
the Remote UI is correct
Whether the user name is
registered in the POP3 server
properly
POP3
Server
Password
Error
Failed to authenticate the password
in the POP3 server when printing e-
mails.
Check the following points.
Whether the setting for
[Password] in [E-Mail Print
Settings] in the [Network] page in
the Remote UI is correct
Whether the password is
registered in the POP3 server
properly
Whether the setting for [POP3
User Name] in [E-Mail Print
Settings] in the [Network] page in
the Remote UI is correct
Whether the user name is
registered in the POP3 server
properly
POP3
Server
Could not connect to the POP3
server when printing e-mails,
because the server does not support
Use a POP3 server that supports
UIDL.
When E-mail Print Fails
㻟㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
UIDL Error the UIDL command.
EM E-Mail access
error.
The printer could not connect to the
POP3 server because an error had
occurred in its hard disk.
Clear the hard disk error on the POP3
server.
The error codes that are displayed in the e-mail receive log list*
If multiple errors have occurred, only the error of the highest priority is displayed (high: 407 > low: 499).
Error Code Cause Remedy
407
The connection to the POP server was
disconnected. Consult your network administrator.
If errors occur many times on the same e-mail
data, check if the e-mail data is normal.
Could not receive data of 1 Kbyte
(1024 byte) for 10 minutes while
receiving e-mails.
408 The response <ERR> was returned
from the POP server. Consult your network administrator.
412
Could not receive data of 1 Kbyte
(1024 byte) for 10 minutes while
receiving e-mails.
Consult your network administrator.
If errors occur many times on the same e-mail
data, check if the e-mail data is normal.
420 The size of the e-mail data exceeded
1.5 GB.
Reduce the size of the e-mail data to 1.5 GB or
less.
421 The size of the e-mail text exceeded
25 MB. Reduce the amount of the e-mail text.
422 The size of the attached files
exceeded 100 MB.
Reduce the size of the attached files to 100 MB or
less.
423 An attached file in an unsupported
format was sent.
Change the format of the attached file into TIFF or
JPEG.
424 The number of the attached files
exceeded 3. Reduce the number of the attached files to 3 or less.
430 An e-mail in which [From] is blank was
sent. Enter a name in [From].
431
Received a divided mail.
Apply the following remedies to send the e-mail so
that it is not divided.
Reducing the size of the e-mail to be sent
(Reducing it to the size which cannot be
divided).
Specifying the application settings so that the
e-mail is sent without being divided.
An e-mail which included unsupported
encoding or character encoding was
sent.
Change the encoding or character encoding into that
supported by this printer.
"Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and
Printing (E-mail Print)"
Received a mail of an unsupported
type (message type).
Change the content type into any one of the
following types that are supported by this printer.
text/plain
image/jpeg
image/tiff
image/tiff-fx
application/octet-stream
Change the content type of the multipart mail into
any one of the following types that are supported by
this printer.
㻟㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Received an unsupported multipart
mail.
multipart/mixed
multipart/parallel
multipart/alternative
If the mail is nested, the mail is supported only when
"multipart/alternative" is nested in "multipart/mixed."
432 Invalid data was sent. Check if the sent e-mail data is normal.
433 An e-mail in HTML format was sent. This printer does not support e-mails in HTML
format.
434 The e-mail does not contain a text. Enter the text.
440 The job was canceled for some
reason. Send the e-mail again.
441 An error has occurred during the
process. Send the e-mail again.
499 An error has occurred in the printer. "A Message Appears in the Control Panel"
㻟㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-070
You can print files from the printer by accessing the FTP server of the printer using FTP Client.
IMPORTANT
When performing FTP printing, select the [Use FTP Print] check box.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
1
Run Command Prompt.
NOTE
If you are using Windows
Run Command Prompt using the following procedure.
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@
If you are using UNIX
Display the console screen.
2
Copy the file to be printed in the directory displayed in Command Prompt.
3
Enter "ftp <the IP address of the printer>" in Command Prompt, and then press the [ENTER] key on
your keyboard.
Input Example: "ftp 192.168.0.215"
If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer
Consult your network administrator.
4
Enter the FTP print user name, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
The default user name is "guest".
You cannot perform an anonymous login.
5
Enter the FTP print password, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
The default password is "7654321".
Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client
㻟㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Enter "put <the name of the file to be printed>", and then press [ENTER] on your keyboard.
Input Example: "put sample.txt"
ĺThe file is printed from the printer.
IMPORTANT
When printing a file
Print the file in the binary mode.
7
Enter "quit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
8
Enter "exit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
ĺCommand Prompt closes.
㻟㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-071
In a secured print or encrypted secured print, a print job for which a password is specified is saved in the SD card of the
printer, and the job is printed by entering the password using the printer's control panel. This function is convenient when
you print a confidential document etc. that you do not want others to read.
Before beginning to print, see "Attention (Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print))."
It is used only when the optional SD card is installed.
1
Print a secured print job or encrypted secured print job using the printer driver.
NOTE
How to print a secured print job
Print a secured print job by selecting [Secured Print] in the printer driver, and then entering the user name and
password.
The number of characters which can be specified for a secured print job
Specify the user name for a secured print with 15 or less alphanumeric characters and the password with 1 to 7
characters.
For details on the encrypted secured print
For details on the restriction for the number of characters of an encrypted secured print password and how to print the
job, see Help of "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in."
You can display Help from the print driver after installing "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in."
2
Move to the printer when printing.
3
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
4
Press [ ] ( : Job).
5
Select [Secured Print] or [Encrypted Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print)
㻟㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
If the user names appear, select the target user name using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
7
If the file names appear, select the target file name using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
8
Enter [PIN], and then press [OK].
Increase or decrease a number using [ ] and [ ], and then move the cursor using [ ] and [ ].
ĺThe specified file is printed.
NOTE
Entering a password using the control panel
Only numbers can be entered.
If a password includes alphabetical characters or symbols
Alphabetical characters or symbols can be specified for a password depending on the encrypted secured print driver
version. In this case, print an encrypted secured print job from the Remote UI.
For details on the procedure for operating the Remote UI, see "Remote UI."
㻟㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-072
NOTE
The environment in which this function is unavailable
You cannot use this function on the DOS application, UNIX or other computer on which the printer driver cannot be
used. Print jobs are processed in the [Print] mode.
When the amount of data or number of jobs that you can save on the SD card exceeds the limit
The message <Cannot perform secured print.> appears. When the message is displayed, perform the following
procedure.
(1) Press [ ] ( : Online) to skip the error. (The job for which the error was skipped will be deleted.)
(2) Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card.
(3) Save the secured print jobs again.
When using the "Encrypted Secured Print" function whose security is reinforced for data
communication and stored data
You need to install "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in."
For details on the installation procedure, see "Readme.txt" in the supplied CD-ROM.
We recommend that an encrypted secured print be used when printing secured print jobs.
Timing to delete secured print jobs
Secured print jobs/encrypted secured print jobs are deleted in the following circumstances:
When the printer is turned OFF
When a hard reset or soft reset is performed
After a secured print job/encrypted secured print job is printed
When no printing operation has been performed by the printer's control panel or Remote UI for a fixed period
The time interval from when no printing operation is performed by the Remote UI or printer's control panel for a
fixed period until the printer deletes jobs is set to "1 hour" in the default settings. You can change the setting for
the time interval.
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
Attention (Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured
Print))
㻟㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-073
You can save print jobs in the SD card (box) in the printer by selecting [Store] from the printer driver for this printer.
In addition, stored jobs can perform the following operations from the printer's control panel and the Remote UI.
Performing a Stored Job Print Using the Control Panel of the Printer
You can print data by selecting the saved box or job.
Displaying or Operating the Jobs Stored in a Box (Resume/Delete)
You can check or operate the jobs stored in a box. You can perform operations of Resume (Print) and Delete. You
can also check the jobs in detail. This operation is performed from the Remote UI.
Changing the Box Settings
You can change the name of the box in which data is saved or password. This operation is performed from the
Remote UI.
NOTE
About stored jobs
The stored jobs can be displayed or operated only when the SD card is installed, and [SD Card] is set to [On]. For
details on the settings for [SD Card], see "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)."
The saved jobs are saved on the SD card even after printing, and they are not deleted even after turning the printer
OFF. When you want to delete the saved jobs, use the Remote UI.
Up to the total of 1000 jobs in all the boxes can be saved.
You can change the name of the stored job in the printer driver before printing.
Stored jobs can be deleted automatically by setting a length of time to pass between storing of the jobs and their
deletion. On how to set the length of this time, see "Automatically Deleting Files Stored in a Box."
Since processing for deleting stored jobs is performed in background, the screen display does not always show the
actual state depending on your system environment. For example, even if "0" is displayed as number of jobs stored
in a box, you may not be able to store new jobs in the same box. In this case, wait for some time and then try again
the job storing operation.
When the amount of data or number of jobs that you can save on the SD card exceeds the limit
The message <Cannot store.> is displayed. When the message is displayed, perform the following procedure.
(1) Press [ ] ( : Online) to skip the error. (The job for which the error was skipped will be deleted.)
(2) Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card.
(3) Save the jobs again.
Operating the Remote UI
"Remote UI"
Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print)
㻟㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-074
1
Select [Store] from [Output Method] in the printer driver, specify the box in which you want to store
the job, and then send it.
2
Move to the printer when printing.
3
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
4
Press [ ] ( : Job).
5
Select [Stored Job Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the department ID management function is enabled, the authentication screen appears. After you enter the
department ID and password, select [<Log In>], and then press [OK].
6
Select the number for the box in which the job is stored using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
7
If [PIN] appears, enter the password, and then press [OK].
Performing a Stored Job Print Using the Control Panel of the Printer
㻟㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Increase or decrease a number using [ ] and [ ], and then move the cursor using [ ] and [ ].
8
Select the name of the target file using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
The specified file is printed.
NOTE
If the stored job has been deleted
If the stored job has been deleted by an external operation, for example an operation from the Remote UI, a screen such
as the following is displayed.
When the file name is selected
When printing is performed
㻟㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-075
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Select [Box] Menu.
3
Enter the box number of the box where the job that you want to check or operate is stored, and then
click [Open...].
You can also display the job list inside the box by clicking on the icon displayed on [Box Number].
If a password is specified for the box, enter the password, and then click [OK].
Displaying or Operating the Jobs Stored in a Box (Resume/Delete)
㻟㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
When you want to operate any stored job, perform the following procedure.
(1) Select the [Select] check box by the first job on the list.
(2) Click the operation buttons.
[Print...]: Prints the selected job.
[Delete]: Deletes the selected job.
You can display the page that allows you to change the print copies etc. by clicking [Print...].
(3) Change the settings, and then click [Start Printing].
㻟㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
Changing the number of the print copies
You cannot change the number of the print copies depending on the job.
Also, changes to print runs of saved jobs that have [Prioritize Print Ticket] set in XPS format will be ignored.
Displaying a document name
A job file name of up to 32 characters can be displayed for a document name. If the file name has more than 32
characters, the characters after the limited number are not displayed. Also, depending on the application, the application
name may be added to the beginning of the file name.
About department ID management
When the department ID management function is enabled, clicking [Start Printing] may display an authentication dialog.
You can start printing by entering the registered department ID and password in [User Name] and [Password].
If you perform printing as a member of a different department from the one you specified to log in, log out once and log
in again to restart the Remote UI.
5
Click the document name to display details of the saved job.
㻟㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
The detailed information of the stored jobs is displayed.
㻟㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-076
Stored jobs can be deleted automatically by setting a length of time to pass between storing of the jobs and their deletion.
This setting is made using the Remote UI.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Control Menu] from the [Preferences] menu.
Automatically Deleting Files Stored in a Box
㻟㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Edit...].
5
Set a length of time to pass before deletion of stored jobs.
㻟㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The default setting is [3 days].
To not delete automatically, select [Off].
6
Click [OK].
㻟㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-077
NOTE
You can change the settings only if you have logged on as Administrator.
"Remote UI"
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Select the [Box] menu.
3
Enter the box number of the box where the job that you want to check or operate is stored, and then
click [Open...].
You can also display the job list inside the box by clicking on the icon displayed on [Box Number].
If a password is specified for the box, enter the password, and then click [OK].
Changing the Box Settings
㻟㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Settings...].
5
Enter the box name in [Box Name].
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
㻟㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Specify the password.
When specifying a password for a box
(1) Select the [Set PIN] check box.
(2) Enter the password that you want to specify in [PIN], and then enter the same number in [Confirm] as the one you
entered in [PIN].
㻟㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When not specifying a password for a box
Clear the [Set PIN] check box.
In [PIN] and [Confirm], you can enter a number of 1 to 7 digits except for those beginning with the digit "0."
7
Click [OK].
㻟㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-078
This mode is used for pausing the job currently being processed and start printing the specified job on ahead. The paused
print jobs are saved on the SD card in the printer and printed again after the print job that interrupted is completed.
Select [Interrupt Print] from [Output Method] in the printer driver, and then print.
NOTE
If a print job for interrupt printing has already being processed
You cannot give priority anymore to another print job.
Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt Printing)
㻟㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-079
Checking Your Network Environment
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)
Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)
Configuring the Protocol Settings
Setting IP v. 6 (if necessary)
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare)
Configuring NetWare
Configuring the Protocol Settings
Network Settings for the Printer (SMB)
Configuring the Protocol Settings
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)
Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer)
㻟㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07A
Check the network environment to which the printer is connected and perform the requisite tasks referring to the following
figures.
Example of a Windows Network
Example of a Macintosh Network
Example of a UNIX Network
Example of a Network Using a Variety of Computers
Checking Your Network Environment
㻟㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07C
When the NetWare Server is on the Network
When the NetWare Server is not on the Network
When the NetWare Server is on the Network
In the network environment as shown in the following figure, TCP/IP or NetWare can be used.
See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used.
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
"Setting the Spooling Function "
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Setting IP v. 6"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare)
"Configuring NetWare"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
Network Settings for the Printer (SMB)
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
When the NetWare Server is not on the Network
In the network environment as shown in the following figure, TCP/IP can be used.
See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used.
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
Example of a Windows Network
㻟㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
"Setting the Spooling Function "
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Setting IP v. 6"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
Network Settings for the Printer (SMB)
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
IMPORTANT
About SMB printing
You can use SMB printing only when an SD card is installed.
NOTE
To manage the printer effectively
By performing the above tasks, computers on a network can be connected to the printer directly.
When using a TCP/IP protocol, you can manage the printer effectively by specifying Windows on the network as the print
server.
For details on the procedure for configuring the print server, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
About NetBEUI
This printer does not support NetBEUI.
㻟㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07E
A Macintosh network can use either of an AppleTalk protocol or TCP/IP protocol.
See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used.
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
"Setting the Spooling Function "
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)
"Macintosh Network Settings"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Setting IP v. 6"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
IMPORTANT
About a LocalTalk network
This printer does not support a Macintosh LocalTalk network.
Example of a Macintosh Network
㻟㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07F
A UNIX network uses a TCP/IP protocol.
See the following and perform the requisite tasks.
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
"Setting the Spooling Function "
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Setting IP v. 6"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
Example of a UNIX Network
㻟㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07H
If there are a variety of computers on a network, specify the settings appropriate to each computer.
For example, if you are using Windows and Macintosh on the same network, perform both "Example of a Windows
Network" and "Example of a Macintosh Network."
See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used.
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
"Setting the Spooling Function "
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Setting IP v. 6"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare)
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
Network Settings for the Printer (SMB)
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)
"Macintosh Network Settings"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
IMPORTANT
About SMB printing
You can use SMB printing only when an SD card is installed.
Example of a Network Using a Variety of Computers
㻟㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07J
This section describes the setting items which are common to each protocol to use this printer in a network environment.
Selecting a Communication Method or Ethernet Type
If you want to fix the type of communication method and Ethernet type, set [Auto Detect] on the Ethernet Drive Setting to
[Off]. (This printer can detect the communication method and Ethernet type automatically. Normally, you do not need to
specify the setting.)
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
Setting the Spooling Function
You can speed up the exiting time of the computer to which you send print jobs, see the following item and configure the
spooler function.
"Setting the Spooling Function "
Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time
If the printer cannot be connected to a network, see the following item and specify the setting for the startup waiting time.
(Normally, you do not need to change the setting for startup waiting time.)
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor and Change the Settings
If you want to restrict the users who can monitor and change the settings, see the following items and configure the SNMP
protocol.
"Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol"
Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication
You can specify the settings for using IEEE802.1X authentication with the printer.
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
Network Setting Items
This section describes the setting items which you can change using a Web browser (Remote UI), FTP Client, or NetSpot
Device Installer.
"Network Setting Items"
Initializing the Network Settings
You can reset the network settings for the printer to the default values.
"Initializing the Network Settings"
Checking the MAC Address
You can check the MAC address by printing Network Status Print.
"Checking the MAC Address"
Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol)
㻟㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07K
Configure the Ethernet driver for this printer using either of the following methods.
"Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up)"
Configure the Ethernet driver using the control panel while checking the display on the printer.
"Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI)"
Change the settings for the Ethernet driver by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the network.
IMPORTANT
When configuring the interface first
Use the printer's control panel. After configuring the TCP/IP protocol settings, you can change the settings for the
interface using the Web browser (Remote UI).
NOTE
Ethernet
Ethernet is a LAN standard, and this printer supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T connections. When this printer
is used on a network, the Ethernet driver controls the communication method and Ethernet type.
Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode
㻟㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07L
When configuring the interface using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchy.
*1 [Communication Mode] and [Ethernet Type] are displayed when [Auto Detect] is set to [Off].
*2 [Communication Mode] appears only when [Ethernet Type] is set to a setting other than [1000 Base-T].
Pressing [ ] ( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel.
IMPORTANT
After performing the configuration
To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)."
To go back up the hierarchy
Press [ ] ( : Back).
About the control panel
For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel."
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message is displayed, press [OK].
You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the
(Online) indicator is off).
2
Select [Ethernet Driver] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When
You First Set it Up)
㻟㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Configure the Ethernet driver.
This printer can detect the communication method and Ethernet type automatically. Normally, set [Auto Detect] to [On].
If you want to fix the communication method and Ethernet type, set [Auto Detect] to [Off].
If you are using a hub, match the settings for the hub and the printer. For the settings of the hub you are using, consult
your network administrator.
(Example)
Hub settings
Communication mode: Full duplex
Ethernet type: 10 Base-T
Printer settings
[Auto Detect]: [Off]
[Communication Mode]: [Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type]: [10 Base-T]
When detecting the Ethernet driver automatically (Default)
(1) Select [Auto Detect] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(2) Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When detecting the Ethernet driver manually
(1) Select [Auto Detect] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(2) Select [Off] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(3) Select [Communication Mode] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(4) Select an Ethernet communication method appropriate for your network environment using [ ] and [ ], and then
press [OK].
[Half Duplex]: Receives and transmits data alternately, not simultaneously.
[Full Duplex]: Receives and transmits data simultaneously.
(5) Select [Ethernet Type] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(6) Select an Ethernet type appropriate for your network environment using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
For details on a hard reset
See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)."
㻟㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Ethernet Driver Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻟㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Set the Ethernet driver.
If you want the communication method and Ethernet type to be set automatically, select the [Auto Detect] check box.
If you want to fix the settings for communication method and Ethernet type, clear the [Auto Detect] check box, and
set the following.
Using [Communication Mode], select the Ethernet communication method that matches the network
environment you are using.
[Half Duplex] Sending and receiving are not performed simultaneously. They are performed
alternately.
[Full Duplex] Sending and receiving are performed simultaneously.
If you select half duplex when fixing the Ethernet type, sending and receiving are not performed
simultaneously. They are performed alternately. If you select full duplex, sending and receiving are performed
simultaneously.
If you are using a hub, match the settings for the hub and the printer. For the settings of the hub you are
using, consult your network administrator.
(Example)
Hub settings
Communication mode: Full duplex
Ethernet type: 10 Base-T
Printer settings
[Auto Detect]: [Off]
[Communication Mode]: [Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type]: [10 Base-T]
Using [Ethernet Type], Select the Ethernet type that matches the network environment you are using.
(2) Click [OK].
㻟㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻟㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07S
Specify the setting for the spooler function using either of the following methods.
"Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (the Settings to Be Performed First)"
Specify the setting for the spooler function using the control panel while checking the display on the printer.
"Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI)"
Specify the setting for the spooler function by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the network.
IMPORTANT
When specifying the communication environment settings first
Use the printer's control panel. After configuring the TCP/IP protocol settings, you can change the settings using the Web
browser (Remote UI) or FTP Client.
Because the options which can be specified vary depending on the software, see "Network Setting Items" and use
each software appropriate to the environment you are using or options that you want to specify.
The Spooling Function
It can only be used when the SD card is installed.
NOTE
Changing the settings using FTP Client
You can also specify the communication environment settings using FTP client.
"FTP Client"
Setting the Spooling Function
㻟㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07U
When configuring the spooler function using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchy.
Pressing [ ] ( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel.
IMPORTANT
After performing the configuration
To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)."
To go back up the hierarchy
Press [ ] ( : Back).
About the control panel
For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel."
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message is displayed, press [OK].
You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the
(Online) indicator is off).
2
Select [Spooler] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Specify the setting for the spooler function using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (the
Settings to Be Performed First)
㻟㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Spooler].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻟㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Specify the setting for the spooler function.
(1) When using the spooling function, select the [Use Spooler] check box.
(2) Click [OK].
7
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
㻟㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻟㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07X
Specify the setting for startup waiting time using either of the following methods.
"Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up)"
Specify the setting for startup waiting time using the control panel while checking the display on the printer.
"Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI)"
Specify the setting for startup waiting time by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the network.
Normally, you do not need to change the setting for startup waiting time (the time from when you turn the printer ON to
when the printer starts communication). Specify the setting for the startup waiting time only when the printer cannot be
connected to the network.
NOTE
If this printer is connected to a switching hub etc.
The printer may not be able to be connected to the network even when the network settings are correct. This is because
the printer and hub cannot communicate each other immediately after this printer is connected to the hub due to a
spanning tree process. In this case, it is necessary to set a delay before establishing the network connection with the
printer using this setting. For details on the functions of a switching hub, contact the manufacturer of the switching hub.
Changing the settings using FTP Client
You can also specify the setting for startup waiting time using FTP Client.
"FTP Client"
Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time
㻟㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-07Y
When configuring the startup waiting time using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchy.
Pressing [ ] ( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel.
IMPORTANT
After performing the configuration
To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)."
To go back up the hierarchy
Press [ ] ( : Back).
About the control panel
For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel."
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message is displayed, press [OK].
You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the
(Online) indicator is off).
2
Select [Network Delay Time] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Specify the setting for startup waiting time using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Set a delay of between 0 and 300 seconds from the time the printer is turned ON until it begins communicating.
4
Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When
You First Set it Up)
㻟㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Startup Time Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻟㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Specify the setting for startup time.
(1) Enter the Startup Time from when you turn the printer ON to when the printer starts communication (0 to 300
seconds).
(2) Click [OK].
7
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
㻟㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻟㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-081
You can restrict the users who can specify and browse the settings using the SNMP protocol using a Web browser
(Remote UI).
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the
SNMP Protocol
㻟㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [SNMP Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻟㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Specify the settings for SNMP.
Configuring the SNMP Protocol
Specifying User Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol
Specifying Context Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol
Configuring the SNMP Protocol
(1) Configure the SNMP v. 1 protocol.
When using SNMPv1 protocol
a. Select the [Use SNMPv1] check box.
b. When using Community Name 1, select the check box for [Use Community Name 1], and set the following
items.
Set the SNMP Community Name in [Community Name 1]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. The
default setting is [public].
Using [MIB Access Permission], select whether to operate the SNMPv1 agent in one of [Read/Write] or
㻟㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Read Only] modes.
c. When using Community Name 2, select the check box for [Use Community Name 2], and set the following
items.
Set the SNMP Community Name in [Community Name 2]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. The
default setting is [public2].
Using [MIB Access Permission], select whether to operate the SNMPv1 agent in one of [Read/Write] or
[Read Only] modes.
When you are not using SNMPv1 protocol
Clear the [Use SNMPv1] check box.
IMPORTANT
When the [Use SNMPv1] check box is cleared
The following problems may occur.
* You may not be able to use some functions of Canon utility software or to use the software properly
due to an error occurring.
* You may not be able to specify or browse each option for this printer from utility software that uses
the SNMP v. 1 protocol to obtain information.
If you clear the [Use SNMPv1] check box, set it after consulting with the network administrator.
(2) Set a dedicated community.
For the setting of [Dedicated Community], select [Off], [Read/Write], or [Read Only].
To use Canon utility software, it may be necessary to select [Read/Write].
(3) Configure the SNMP v. 3 protocol.
㻟㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When using SNMPv3 protocol
a. Select the [Use SNMPv3] check box.
b. When setting user information used by SNMPv3 protocol, set user information using [User Settings 1] to
[User Settings 5].
See "Specifying User Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol" for the method for setting
user information.
c. When setting context information used by SNMPv3 protocol, set context information using [Context Settings].
See "Specifying Context Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol" for the method for
setting context information.
When you are not using SNMPv3 protocol
Clear the [Use SNMPv3] check box.
(4) Specify [Obtain Printer Management Information from Host] as needed.
If the [Obtain Printer Management Information from Host] check box is selected, when the printer driver is installed in
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, port monitoring by SNMP is activated automatically.
NOTE
The port monitoring function by SNMP
㻟㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The port monitoring function by SNMP is a function of Standard TCP/IP Port, and it periodically obtains printer
management information such as information about print applications and ports, using SNMP.
(5) Make a setting for rejecting to receive SNMP packets while in sleep mode, as necessary.
If you select the check box for [Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode], you may be unable to access the
printer from Canon software (iW Series) or applications using the SNMP protocol.
(6) Proceed to Step 7.
Specifying User Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol
(1) Specify the user information to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol.
If You Want to Register/Edit User Information
If You Want to Change the Status (Valid/Invalid) of User Information
If You Want to Register/Edit User Information
1. Select the [Enable User] check box under [User Settings 1].
2. In [User Name], enter the user name to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol. Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.
㻟㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3. For [MIB Access Permission], select in which mode the SNMP v. 3 agent can operate, [Read/Write] or
[Read Only].
4. Under [Security Settings], select from [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes], [Authentication Yes/Encryption
No] or [Authentication No/Encryption No] for the security used by SNMPv3.
㻟㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5. If [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] or [Authentication Yes/Encryption No] is set for [Security Settings],
select [MD5] or [SHA1] for [Authentication Algorithm] as the authentication algorithm used by SNMPv3.
6. When [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] is set using [Security Settings], set an authentication
password.
[Authentication
Password]:
Enter the password to be used for the authentication function of the authentication
algorithm. 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[Confirm]: To confirm the password, enter the entered [Authentication Password] again.
㻟㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If the SSL encrypted communication function is not used, this item cannot be set by the Remote
UI. Either enable the SSL encrypted communication function, or set from the control panel using
the following procedure.
a. Press [ ] ( 6HWWLQJVVHOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>6103Y6HWWLQJV@DQGWKHQ
set [SNMP v. 3] to [On].
b. Set each password using [Auth. Password] from [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5].
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates."
7. If [Security Settings] are set to [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes], set an encrypted password.
Set [Encryption Algorithm] to [DES] or [AES].
[Encryption
Password]:
Enter the password to be used for the encryption function of the encryption
algorithm. 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[Confirm]: To confirm the password, enter the entered [Encryption Password] again.
If the SSL encrypted communication function is not used, this item cannot be set by the Remote
UI. Either enable the SSL encrypted communication function, or set from the control panel using
the following procedure.
a. Press [ ] ( 6HWWLQJVVHOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>6103Y6HWWLQJV@DQGWKHQ
㻟㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
set [SNMP v. 3] to [On].
b. Set each password using [Auth. Password] from [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5].
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates."
8. Set [User Settings 2] to [User Settings 5] using the same procedure as needed.
If You Want to Change the Status (Valid/Invalid) of User Information
To enable registered user information, select the [Enable User] check box at the top of the targeted user information.
To disable registered user information, clear the [Enable User] check box at the top of the targeted user information.
(2) Proceed to Step 7.
Specifying Context Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol
(1) Specify the context information to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol.
If You Want to Register Context Information
If You Want to Erase Context Information
If You Want to Register Context Information
1. Enter the context names used by the SNMPv3 protocol in [Context Name 1] to [Context Name 5] under
[Context Settings]. Up to 32 characters can be entered.
㻟㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If You Want to Erase Context Information
1. Delete the context names that are entered in [Context Name 1] to [Context Name 5] under [Context
Settings] that you want to delete.
(2) Proceed to Step 7.
7
Click [OK].
8
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
㻟㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻟㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-082
Specify the settings for using IEEE802.1X authentication with the printer.
See the following sections according to the protocol to be used for authentication.
"Setting TLS Authentication Information"
"Setting TTLS/PEAP Authentication Information"
IMPORTANT
Conditions for Using IEEE802.1X Authentication
In order to use IEEE802.1X authentication, an authentication server (RADIUS server) is required.
NOTE
IEEE802.1X Authentication Protocol
The printer supports TLS, TTLS and PEAP IEEE802.1X authentication.
TLS performs mutual authentication using the certificate sent from the authentication server and the certificate set in
the printer.
TTLS and PEAP perform mutual authentication using the certificate sent from the authentication server and the user
name and password set in the printer.
Note the following when simultaneously specifying multiple options from TLS, TTLS, and PEAP:
To select TLS: TTLS or PEAP cannot be specified.
To select TTLS: TLS cannot be specified. PEAP can be specified.
To select PEAP: TLS cannot be specified. TTLS can be specified.
The network authentication method to use is determined by the configuration of the authentication server in use.
Choose the method based on the configuration of the authentication server
IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings
We recommend that network settings be performed by the network administrator.
Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication
㻟㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-083
Set authentication information for using TLS with the IEEE802.1X authentication method.
TLS performs mutual authentication using the authentication server's certificate and the printer's certificate.
IMPORTANT
In order to set up TLS authentication
You need to register a key and certificate or a CA certificate used for authentication to the printer in advance.
"Setting Keys and Certificates"
"Setting CA Certificates"
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
Setting TLS Authentication Information
㻟㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [IEEE802.1X Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻟㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Enter the login name.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
7
Select the [Use TLS] check box.
㻟㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Click [Key and Certificate...].
9
Select the key to use, and then click [Default Key Settings].
㻟㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
12
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻟㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-084
Set authentication information for using TTLS or PEAP with IEEE802.1X authentication.
TTLS and PEAP perform mutual authentication using the authentication server's certificate and the user name and
password set in the printer.
IMPORTANT
In order to set a user name and password
You need to set up the SSL encryption communication function in advance.
Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
Starting the Remote UI
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
Setting TTLS/PEAP Authentication Information
㻟㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [IEEE802.1X Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻟㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Enter the login name.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
7
Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
㻟㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When using TTLS
Select the internal TTLS authentication method.
(1) Select [MSCHAPv2] or [PAP].
8
Click [Change User Name/Password...].
When using the log in name entered in Step 6 as the user name
Select the [Use Login Name as User Name] check box.
9
Enter user name.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
㻟㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
10
Enter password.
(1) Select the [Change Password] check box.
(2) Enter password.
You can enter up to 24 characters.
(3) Enter the same password in the [Confirm] field.
(4) Click [OK].
11
Select the [Use IEEE802.1X] check box.
If a Message Appears
A message will be displayed if there is anything wrong with the settings. See Steps 6 to 10, and check the settings.
12
Click [OK].
㻟㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
13
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻟㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-085
You can change the network settings using various methods.
Network Setting Items
Software That Can Be Used for the Network Settings
Network Setting Items
The setting items you can change using NetSpot Device Installer, FTP Client, or the control panel on the printer are as
follows.
NOTE
The settings that you cannot specify using FTP Client, NetSpot Device Installer, or the control
panel on the printer
Specify them using a Web browser (Remote UI).
(However, you cannot specify the settings with even using the Remote UI.)
About the item names
In the following table, the characters shown in parentheses are exclusively for FTP Client.
For example, "[IP Address] (INT_ADDR)" is displayed differently as follows, depending on the application.
Web browser (Remote UI): [IP Address]
NetSpot Device Installer: [IP Address]
config file of FTP Client: [INT_ADDR]
Control Panel: [IP Address]
General Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using
the Control
Panel
[Device Name]
(DEVICE_NAME) Up to 32 characters LBP6780x
[Location]
(SYS_LOC) Up to 32 characters (Blank)
[System Manager]
(SYS_CONTACT) Up to 32 characters (Blank)
[System Manager
Password]
(ROOT_PWD)
Up to 16 characters 7654321
[Permit End-User's
Job Operation]
(USER_JOB_CONT)
ON, OFF OFF
Support Link
[URL]
(LINK_URL1)
Up to 128 alphanumeric
characters http://www.canon.com
Network Setting Items
㻟㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
TCP/IP (IP v. 4) Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings
Using
the
Control
Panel
[Use IPv4] (IPV4_USE) ON, OFF ON
[DHCP] (DHCP_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[RARP] (RARP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[BOOTP] (BOOTP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[IP Address] (INT_ADDR) IP address 0.0.0.0
[Subnet Mask] (NET_MASK) IP address 0.0.0.0
[Gateway Address] (DEF_GW) IP address 0.0.0.0
[Primary DNS Server Address]
(DNS_PADDR) IP address 0.0.0.0
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
(DNS_SADDR) IP address 0.0.0.0
[Host Name] (HOST_NAME) Up to 47 alphanumeric
characters
"Canon" +
"Last 6
digits of
the MAC
address"
[Domain Name] (DOMAIN_NAME) Up to 47 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[DNS Dynamic Update]
(DDNS_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[WINS Resolution] (WINS_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[WINS Server Address]
(WINS_SERVER) IP address 0.0.0.0
[Scope ID] (WINS_SCOPEID) Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[Use ARP/PING]
(ARP_PING_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[Use FTP Print]
(FTP_PRINT_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[FTP Print User Name]
(FTP_PRINT_USER)
Up to 24 alphanumeric
characters guest
[Password] (FTP_PRINT_PWD) Up to 24 alphanumeric
characters 7654321
[FTP Settings] ON, OFF OFF
[Use LPD Printing] (LPD_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[Print LPD Banner Page]
(LPD_BANN) ON, OFF OFF
[Use RAW Printing] (RAW_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[Use Bidirectional Communication] ON, OFF OFF
㻟㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(RAW_BIDIR_ENB)
[Use IPP Print] (IPP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[SSL]
ON, OFF (Fixed at OFF
when a key is not
registered.)
OFF
[IPP Authentication]
(IPP_AUTH_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[User Name]
(IPP_AUTH_ACCUNT1)
Up to 24 characters (Must
be entered when using IPP
Authentication)
guest
[Password]
(IPP_AUTH_PASSWD1)
Up to 24 characters (Must
be entered when using IPP
Authentication)
7654321
[Use WSD Printing] (WSD_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Use WSD Browsing]
(WSD_BROWSING) ON, OFF OFF
[Use Multicast Discovery]
(WSD_MULTICAST_DISCOVERY) ON, OFF OFF
[Use HTTP] (HTTP_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[Use Proxy] ON, OFF OFF
[HTTP Proxy Server Address] Up to 128 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number] 1 to 65535 80
[Use Proxy within Same Domain] ON, OFF OFF
[Proxy Authentication] ON, OFF OFF
[User Name] Up to 24 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[Password] Up to 24 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[Discovery Response]
(DISCOVERY_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[Scope Name]
(DISCOVERY_SCOPE_NAME)
Scope name to be used for
discovery using utility
software such as NetSpot
Device Installer. (Up to 32
characters)
default
[Use SNTP] (SNTP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[NTP Server Name]
(SNTP_ADDR) IP address or host name (Blank)
[Polling Interval]
(SNTP_INTERVAL)
Interval for synchronizing
time (1 to 48 hours) 24
TCP/IP (IP v. 6) Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings
Using the
Control
Panel
㻟㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Installer
[Use IPv6] (IPV6_USE) ON, OFF OFF
[Use Stateless Address]
(IPV6_STATELESS_USE) ON, OFF ON
[Use Manual Address]
(IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_USE) ON, OFF OFF
[IP Address]
(IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_SET) IP address (Blank)
[Prefix Length]
(IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_PREFIX) 0 to 128 64
[Default Router Address]
(IPV6_MANUAL_ROUTER_ADDR) IP address (Blank)
[Use DHCPv6] (IPV6_DHCPV6_USE) ON, OFF OFF
[Primary DNS Server Address]
(IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_PRI) IP address (Blank)
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
(IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_SEC) IP address (Blank)
[Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names]
(IPV6_DNS_NAME_SAME_AS_IPV4) ON, OFF OFF
[Host Name]
(IPV6_DNS_HOST_NAME_V6)
Up to 47
alphanumeric
characters
"Canon" +
"Last 6 digits
of the MAC
address"
[Domain Name]
(IPV6_DNS_DOMAIN_NAME_V6)
Up to 47
alphanumeric
characters
(Blank)
[DNS Dynamic Update]
(IPV6_DNS_DYNAMIC_SET) ON, OFF OFF
[Register Manual Address]
(IPV6_DNS_MANUAL) ON, OFF OFF
[Register Stateful Address]
(IPV6_DNS_STATEFUL) ON, OFF OFF
[Register Stateless Address]
(IPV6_DNS_STATELESS) ON, OFF OFF
NetWare Network Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings
Using
the
Control
Panel
[Use NetWare] (NW_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Frame Type] (NW_FRAME_TYPE)
Frame type
used by
NetWare
AutoSense([Auto
Detect])
[IPX External Network Number] (Display only)
[Node Number] (Display only)
Print service to ndsPserver([NDS
㻠㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Print Service] (NW_PRINT_SERVICE) be used PServer])
Bindery PServer
[File Server Name]
(NW_PSERVER_FILE_SERVER_
NAME)
Name of the
NetWare file
server to which
the NetWare
print server
belongs (1 to
47 characters)
(Blank)
[Print Server Name]
(NW_PSERVER_PRINT_SERVER_NAME)
NetWare print
server name to
be used (1 to
47 characters)
(Blank)
[Print Server Password]
(NW_PSERVER_PASSWD)
Password for
accessing the
print server (0
to 20
characters)
(Blank)
[Printer Number]
(NW_PSERVER_PRINTER_NO)
Number for the
printer
connected to
the NetWare
print server (0
to 15)
0
[Service Mode]
(NW_PSERVER_SERVICE_MODE)
Service mode
to be used
psMode1: Only
the currently
loaded paper
can be
serviced.
psMode2:
Paper can be
changed as
needed.
psMode3: The
order of the
jobs is
rearranged to
minimize the
frequency of
changing paper.
psMode4: The
order of the
jobs in a queue
is rearranged to
minimize the
frequency of
changing paper.
psMode4
[Printer Form]
(NW_PSERVER_PRINTER_FORM)
Paper Define
Form (0 to 255) 0
[Polling Interval]
(NW_PSERVER_POLLING_INT)
Interval for
checking the
jobs (1 to 15
seconds)
5
[Buffer Size]
(NW_PSERVER_BUFFER_SIZE)
Data Buffer
Size (1 to 20
KB)
20
㻠㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NDS PServer
[Tree
Name](NW_NDSSERVER_TREE_NAME)
Name of the
NDS tree to
which the
NetWare print
server belongs
(1 to 32
characters)
(Blank)
[Context Name]
(NW_NDSSERVER_CONTEXT_
NAME)
Name of the
context to which
the NetWare
print server
belongs (1 to
256 characters)
(Blank)
[Print Server Name]
(NW_NDSSERVER_PRINT_
SERVER_NAME)
NetWare print
server name to
be used (1 to
64 characters)
(Blank)
[Print Server Password]
(NW_NDSSERVER_PRINT_
SERVER_PASSWORD)
Password for
accessing the
print server (0
to 20
characters)
(Blank)
[Printer Number]
(NW_NDSSERVER_PRINTER_NO)
Number for the
printer
connected to
the NetWare
print server (0
to 254)
0
[Service Mode]
(NW_NDSSERVER_SERVICE_
MODE)
Service mode
to be used
psMode1: Only
the currently
loaded paper
can be
serviced.
psMode2:
Paper can be
changed as
needed.
psMode3: The
order of the
jobs is
rearranged to
minimize the
frequency of
changing paper.
psMode4: The
order of the
jobs in a queue
is rearranged to
minimize the
frequency of
changing paper.
psMode4
[Printer Form]
(NW_NDSSERVER_PRINTER_FORM)
Paper Define
Form (0 to 255) 0
[Polling Interval]
Interval for
checking the 5
㻠㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(NW_NDSSERVER_POLLING_INT.) jobs (1 to 255
seconds)
[Buffer Size]
(NW_NDSSERVER_BUFFER_SIZE)
Data Buffer
Size (3 to 20
KB)
20
RPrinter
[File Server Name]
(NW_RPRINTER_FILE_SERVER_
NAME)
Name of the
NetWare file
server to which
the NetWare
print server
belongs (1 to
47 characters)
(Blank)
[Print Server Name]
(NW_RPRINTER_PRINT_SERVER_
NAME)
NetWare print
server name to
be used (1 to
47 characters)
(Blank)
[Printer Number]
(NW_RPRINTER_PRINTER_NO)
Number for the
printer
connected to
the NetWare
print server (0
to 15)
0
NPrinter
[Tree
Name](NW_NPRINTER_TREE_NAME)
Name of the
NPrinter tree to
which the
NetWare print
server belongs
(1 to 32
characters)
(Blank)
[Context Name]
(NW_NPRINTER_CONTEXT_NAME)
Name of the
context to which
the NetWare
print server
belongs (1 to
256 characters)
(Blank)
[Print Server Name]
(NW_NPRINTER_PRINT_SERVER_
NAME)
NetWare print
server name to
be used (1 to
64 characters)
(Blank)
[Printer
Number](NW_NPRINTER_PRINTER_NO)
Number for the
printer
connected to
the NetWare
print server (0
to 254)
0
AppleTalk Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings
Using the
Control
Panel
㻠㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Use AppleTalk]
(ATLK_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Phase] Fixed at [Phase 2] [Phase 2]
[Service Name]
(APRINT_1) Up to 32 characters *1 LBP6780x
[Zone]
(ATK_ZONE) Up to 32 characters *1*2 *
[Print Mode] [Open Both Spool and Direct],
[Open Spool], [Open Direct]
[Open Both
Spool and
Direct]
*1 "=", "@", "*", ":", and "~" cannot be used.
*2 As for "*", only one of it can be used.
SMB Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using the
Control Panel
[Use SMB Server](SMB_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Server Name](SMB_SERVER) Up to 15
characters (Blank)
[Workgroup Name](SMB_WG) Up to 15
characters (Blank)
[Comments](SMB_COMMENT) Up to 48
characters (Blank)
[Use LM
Announce](SMB_LM_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Use SMB
Printing](SMB_PRINT_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Printer
Name](SMB_PRINTER)
Up to 13
characters (Blank)
SNMP Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using the
Control Panel
[Use SNMPv1]
(SNMP_V1_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[Use Community Name 1]
(SNMP_COMMUNITY1_ENB) ON, OFF ON
[Community Name 1]
(SNMP_COMMUNITY1_NAME)
Up to 32
characters public
[MIB Access Permission] RW, RO RO
㻠㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(SNMP_COMMUNITY1_ACCESS) ([Read/Write],
[Read Only])
([Read
Only])
[Use Community Name 2]
(SNMP_COMMUNITY2_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Community Name 2]
(SNMP_COMMUNITY2_NAME)
Up to 32
characters public2
[MIB Access Permission]
(SNMP_COMMUNITY2_ACCESS)
RW, RO
([Read/Write],
[Read Only])
RO
([Read
Only])
[Use SNMPv3]
(SNMP_V3_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[Obtain Printer Management
Information from Host]
(SNMP_GET_PRT_MNG_INFO)
ON, OFF OFF
[Reject SNMP Packets While in
Sleep Mode] ON, OFF OFF
User Settings (SNMPv3)
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings
Using
the
Control
Panel
[User Name] Up to 32 alphanumeric characters initial
[MIB Access
Permission] [Read/Write], [Read Only] [Read/Write]
[Security Settings]
[Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes],
[Authentication Yes/Encryption No],
[Authentication No/Encryption No]
[Authentication
Yes/Encryption
Yes]
[Authentication
Algorithm] [MD5], [SHA1] [MD5]
[Authentication
Password] *6 to 16 alphanumeric characters initial
[Encryption
Algorithm] [DES], [AES] [DES]
[Encryption
Password] *6 to 16 alphanumeric characters initial
*Can be specified only when the printer is in the state of SSL encrypted communication. (If the printer is not in the
state of encrypted communication, specify the setting using the printer's control panel.)
Context Settings (SNMPv3)
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using the
Control Panel
[Context Name 1] -
[Context Name 5]
Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
㻠㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Spooler Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using the Control Panel
[Use
Spooler](SPOOL_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
Startup Time Setting
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings
Using
the
Control
Panel
[Startup Time]
(STRT_DELAY_TIME)
Waiting time from when you turn the printer
ON to when the printer starts obtaining the
address (0 to 300 seconds)
0
Ethernet Driver Setting
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using the
Control Panel
[Auto Detect] ON, OFF ON
[Communication
Mode] [Half Duplex], [Full Duplex] [Half
Duplex]
[Ethernet Type] [10 Base-T], [100 Base-TX],
[1000 Base-T]
[10
Base-T]
E-Mail Print Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using
the Control
Panel
[POP3 Server
Name](EMAIL_POP_ADDR)
Up to 48 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[POP3 User
Name](EMAIL_POP_ACCOUNT)
Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[Password](EMAIL_POP_PASSWD) Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters (Blank)
[POP3 RX
Interval](EMAIL_POP_INTERVAL) 0 to 90 minutes 0*
㻠㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[POP3 RX](EMAIL_PRINT_ENB) ON, OFF OFF
[POP3 Server Port
Number](EMAIL_POP_PORTNO) 0 to 65535 110
[SMTP RX] ON, OFF OFF
[SMTP Server Port Number] 0 to 65535 25
* When it is set to [0], it does not automatically receive e-mail from the server.
Remote UI Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using the
Control Panel
[Remote
UI](RUI_ENB)*
Turing ON or OFF the
Remote UI ON
[Use SSL] ON, OFF OFF
*Can be specified only by FTP Client or the printer's control panel
Permitted Receiving MAC Address Settings
: Can be specified : Cannot be specified
Option Contents Default
Settings
Using
NetSpot
Device
Installer
Settings
Using
FTP
Client
Settings Using the Control Panel
[MAC Address
Filter] ON, OFF OFF
[MAC Address] (Display only)
Software That Can Be Used for the Network Settings
You can perform the network settings for this printer using the following software.
: Specifiable
: Not specifiable
: Can perform a part of the settings
Setting Type Web Browser
(Remote UI)
FTP
Client
NetSpot Device
Installer
ARP/PING
Command
Control Panel of
the Printer
Configuring the
Ethernet Driver
"Changing the
Network
Transmission
Speed or
Transfer
Mode"
Setting the Spooling
㻠㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Function
"Setting the
Spooling
Function "
Setting the Startup
Waiting Time
"Specifying the
Setting for
Startup Waiting
Time"
Setting the IP
Address of the
Printer
"Setting the IP
Address (IP v.
4)"
Setting the TCP/IP
Protocol
"Configuring
the Protocol
Settings"
Setting IP v. 6
"Setting IP v.
6"
Preparing the
NetWare Protocol
Settings
"Configuring
NetWare"
Setting the NetWare
Protocol
"Configuring
the Protocol
Settings"
Setting the
AppleTalk Protocol
"Network
Settings for the
Printer
(AppleTalk)"
Changing the
Device Name or
Administrator
Information
"Specifying the
Device Name
or
Administrator
Information"
Changing the
Administrator
Password
"Setting the
Administrator
Password"
Specifying the Job
Operation
Permission for End-
㻠㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
users
"Specifying the
Job Operation
Permission for
End-Users"
Restricting the Job
Requests by Certain
Devices
"Restricting the
Users Who
Can Print or
Perform the
Printer
Settings"
Setting the Key
Lock Function
"Locking the
Keys on the
Control Panel
(Key Lock
Function)"
Changing E-Mail
Print Settings
"Receiving E-
mail Data on
the Mail Server
and Printing
(E-mail Print)"
㻠㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-086
If you want to reset the network settings for the printer to the default values, use the printer's control panel.
"Initializing the Network Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel"
Initialize the network settings using the control panel while checking the display on the printer.
IMPORTANT
Precautions when initializing the network settings
Make sure that the printer is not operating before initializing the network settings.
If you initialize the network settings while the printer is printing or receiving data, the received data may not be printed
properly, or may result in paper jams or damage to the printer.
NOTE
When checking the current settings
"Checking the Printer Settings"
About the default settings (settings after the initialization)
"Network Setting Items"
Initializing the Network Settings
㻠㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-087
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
2
Select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message is displayed, press [OK].
3
Select [Init. Network Set.] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
Initializing the Network Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel
㻠㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-088
You need the MAC address of the printer to set the IP address using NetSpot Device Installer or the ARP/PING command.
There are the following three methods for checking MAC addresses.
"Checking the Network Ethernet Driver Screen from a Remote UI"
"Printing a Network Status Print from the Printer's Control Panel and Checking It"
"[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)"
Checking the Network Ethernet Driver Screen from a Remote UI
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
Checking the MAC Address
㻠㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Ethernet Driver Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻠㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Check the MAC address.
Printing a Network Status Print from the Printer's Control Panel and Checking It
NOTE
Loading A4 size paper
The Network Status Print is designed to be printed on A4 size paper.
Be sure to load A4 size paper when printing the Network Status Print.
1
Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer.
㻠㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Paper Loading and Output
2
Press [ ] ( : Utility).
3
Select [Network Status Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
Network Status Print is printed. The MAC address (A) is indicated in [Ethernet Driver Settings] on the upper left of the
Network Status Print.
㻠㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08A
There are the following three methods for setting the IP address.
Setting the IP Address Using the Printer's Control Panel
Set the IP address using the control panel while checking the display on the printer.
Setting the IP Address Using the ARP/PING Commands
Set the IP address using the ARP/PING command in Command Prompt.
Setting the IP Address Using NetSpot Device Installer
Set the IP address using NetSpot Device Installer in the supplied CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
When setting the IP Address using the ARP/PING command or NetSpot Device Installer
The MAC address of the printer is required. For details on the procedure for checking the MAC address, see "Checking
the MAC Address."
Before setting the IP address
Make sure that the printer is connected to the network and the printer is ON.
NOTE
If you changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
Specify the port to be used again in the printer driver.
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)
㻠㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08C
To set the IP address using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchies.
*[Protocol] is displayed when [IP Mode] is set to [Auto].
Pressing [ ] ( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel.
indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel.
IMPORTANT
After setting the IP address
To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)."
To go back up the hierarchy
Press [ ] ( : Back).
About the control panel
For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel."
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message is displayed, press [OK].
You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the
(Online) indicator is off).
Setting the IP Address Using the Printer's Control Panel
㻠㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
2
Select [TCP/IP Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [IPv4 Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Set it to use [IPv4].
(1): After selecting [IPv4] using [ ] or [ ], press [OK].
(2): After selecting [On] using [ ] or [ ], press [OK].
5
Select the method for setting the IP address.
(1): Select [IP Mode] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
(2): Select a method for setting the IP address using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
[Auto]: When setting the IP address using any one of DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, select this
option.
[Manual]: When specifying the IP address to the printer directly, select this option.
6
Set the IP address.
If You Selected [Auto] in Step 5
If You Selected [Manual] in Step 5
If You Selected [Auto] in Step 5
1. Select [Protocol] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
2. Select [On] for the option to be used when setting the IP address.
[Use DHCP]: Obtains an IP address using DHCP. (The DHCP server needs to be running.)
[Use BOOTP]: Obtains an IP address using BOOTP. (The BOOTP daemon needs to be running.)
[Use RARP]: Obtains an IP address using RARP. (The RARP daemon needs to be running.)
NOTE
When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP
You can select only one from RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP. One of the following can be used: DHCP,
BOOTP, or RARP. When any of the settings is turned [On], the remaining two settings are automatically
turned [Off].
Because it takes approximately two minutes to check whether DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are available,
we recommend that you set the unused protocol(s) to [Off].
When using DHCP
㻠㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you cycle the power of the printer, you may not be able to print. This is because a different IP address from
the one that has been used is assigned.
When using DHCP, consult your network administrator and perform either of the following settings.
Specifying the DNS Dynamic Update function
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
Specifying the settings so that the same IP address is always assigned when the printer starts up
3. Set the IP address, the subnet mask, and the gateway address manually as needed.
When setting them manually, go back up the hierarchy by pressing [ ] ( : Back), and then perform the
procedure in "If You Selected [Manual] in Step 5."
Even if you are using any one of DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, specify the IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway address. If you cannot obtain information from the servers of DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP, the values
specified manually are used.
NOTE
When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP
You can select only one from RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP.
After the printer restarts, the values obtained from DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are displayed.
(If the values were specified previously, they overwrite the obtained ones.)
4. Proceed to Step 7.
If You Selected [Manual] in Step 5
1. Select [IP Address Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
2. Select [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Gateway Address] using [ ] and [ ], press [OK].
3. [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Gateway Address] are each set.
NOTE
How to enter values in [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Gateway Address].
1. Press [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to each field (an area separated by periods to enter
three-digit numbers) in which you want to enter respective values of the address.
(The numbers in the field blinks, allowing you to enter the value.)
2. Enter the value. (Pressing [ ] increases the value and [ ] decreases the value.)
3. After entering values in all the fields, press [OK] to confirm the setting.
4. Proceed to Step 7.
7
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
For details on a hard reset
See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)."
㻠㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08E
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message appears, press [OK].
You can configure the settings, regardless of whether the printer is online (with the [ ] ( : Online) indicator turned
on) or offline (with the [ ] ( : Online) indicator turned off).
2
Select [TCP/IP Settings] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [IPv4 Settings] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Enable [IPv4 Settings].
(1): Select [IPv4] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
(2): Select [On] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
5
Select how to configure the IP address.
(1): Select [IP Mode] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
(2): Select [Manual] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
6
Configure the IP address.
(1): Select [IP Address Settings] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
(2): Select [IP Address] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
(3): Configure [IP Address].
NOTE
How to enter values in [IP Address]
1. Move between the fields (four sets of up to three decimal numbers separated by periods) using [ ] or [ ]
when entering the IP address you want to configure. (The values in the selected field start flashing for you to
enter the address.)
2. Enter the values. (Press [ ] to increase the value and press [ ] to decrease the value.)
Setting the Printer to a Static IP Address
㻠㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3. When you have finished entering all the values, press [OK] for the setting to take effect.
If you are not sure what to enter in [IP Address]:
If you are not sure what values you should enter for the IP address, contact your network administrator or see
"Determining Which IP Address to Assign to the Printer" for more information.
7
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
The settings become effective after hard resetting or restarting the printer.
NOTE
About details of hard reset
See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)."
㻠㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08F
Follow the steps in the procedure below to assign the IP address to the printer.
1
Open the router setup screen.
For instructions on how to open the router setup screen, see the instruction manual that comes with the router you are
using or consult the manufacturer or your network administrator.
2
Determine which IP address to assign to the printer.
Your router is preconfigured to assign a specific range of IP addresses using DHCP. Check which range of IP addresses
your router assigns using DHCP and assign an IP address outside that range to the printer.
This prevents this printer from being assigned the same IP address already assigned to another device.
Example: Router setup screen
* This example shows the range of IP addresses the router assigns using DHCP is from 192.168.11.2 to 192.168.11.65.
You need to assign an IP address within a range from 192.168.11.66 to 192.168.11.254.
NOTE
IP address
An IP address is a unique address used in order to identify any device connected to a network. It consists of four sets of
numbers from 0 to 255 separated by three periods (.), as shown by the example, "192.168.11.1".
Determining Which IP Address to Assign to the Printer
㻠㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08H
NOTE
If your computer and the printer are connected via the router
You cannot set the IP address using the ARP/PING command.
1
Run Command Prompt.
NOTE
If you are using Windows
Run Command Prompt using the following procedure.
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@
If you are using Macintosh
Perform the following procedure.
1. Run Terminal.
6HOHFWWKHKDUGGLVN\RXXVHĺ>$SSOLFDWLRQV@ĺWKH>8WLOLWLHV@IROGHUDQGWKHQGRXEOHFOLFNWKH>7HUPLQDO@
icon.
2. Enter "su", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
3. "Password:" is displayed. Enter the root password, and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
If you are using UNIX
Display the console screen, and then log in as a super user.
2
Enter "arp -s <IP address> <MAC address>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
<IP address>: Enter the IP address to assign to the printer.
Specify the address with four numbers (from 0 to 255) separated with a period (.).
<MAC address>:
Enter the MAC address of the printer.
When entering the number, separate the number every two digits with a hyphen (-) (a colon (:)
for Macintosh/UNIX).
Input Example (Windows): "arp -s 192.168.0.215 00-1E-8F-46-80-2e"
Input Example (Macintosh/UNIX): "arp -s 192.168.0.215 00:1E:8F:46:80:2e"
NOTE
If you are using IBM-AIX
Enter "arp -s ether <the IP address> <the MAC address>."
3
Enter the following command, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
If you are using Windows: "ping <the IP address> -l 479"
Setting the IP Address Using the ARP/PING Commands
㻠㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you are using Macintosh: "ping -c 1 -s 479 <the IP address>"
If you are using Solaris 1.x/2.x: "ping -s <the IP address> 479"
If you are using IBM-AIX: "ping <the IP address> 479"
If you are using HP-UX: "ping <the IP address> 487"
If you are using Linux: "ping -s 479 <the IP address>"
<IP address>: Enter the same IP address as the one entered in Step 2.
Enter a lowercase "L" for "-l."
Input Example (Windows): "ping 192.168.0.215 -l 479"
ĺThe IP address is set for the printer.
The subnet mask and gateway address are set to [0.0.0.0].
4
Enter "exit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
ĺCommand Prompt closes.
㻠㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08J
For details on other procedures for starting and using NetSpot Device Installer, see the following.
Starting method: "Printer Driver Installation Guide"
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
Usage: Help of NetSpot Device Installer
Help is displayed by clicking [Help] in the [Help] menu.
IMPORTANT
If Windows Firewall is enabled
Before starting NetSpot Device Installer, configure Windows Firewall to unblock NetSpot Device Installer.
For details on the configuration procedure, see the Readme file of NetSpot Device Installer.
For operating systems not compatible with NetSpot Device Installer
Perform the settings from another computer on the network or by using the printer's control panel or the ARP/PING
command.
Setting the IP Address Using NetSpot Device Installer
㻠㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08K
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI.
In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network.
Before specifying the settings, see "Attention (Protocol Settings)."
NOTE
When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI
You can also specify the settings using the following software.
"FTP Client"
You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt.
"NetSpot Device Installer"
You can specify the settings using the Canon software, NetSpot Device Installer, in the supplied CD-ROM.
If you want to configure the settings such as the DNS server settings, use the Remote UI or FTP Client.
The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software
appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
Configuring the Protocol Settings
㻠㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
HTTP Settings
Setting SSL Keys and Certificates
Proxy Settings
Multicast Discovery Settings
SNTP Settings
Department ID Management PIN Configuration Settings
Setting IP v. 4
(1) Click [Edit...] in [IPv4 Settings].
(2) Set the IP address.
[Use IPv4] When the check box is selected, use IPv4.
[Select Protocol] Select the protocol used from [Off], [DHCP], [RARP] or [BOOTP].
When [Off] is selected using [Select Protocol], set the following items.
[IP Address] Enter the printer's IP address.
[Subnet Mask] Enter the subnet mask used by the TCP/IP network.
[Gateway Address] Enter the gateway address used by the TCP/IP network.
㻠㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(3) Set DNS.
[Primary DNS
Server Address] Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server.
[Secondary DNS
Server Address] Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
[Host Name] Enter the host name to be added to the DNS server. Up to 47 characters can be
entered.
[Domain Name]
Enter the name of the domain to which the printer belongs. Up to 47 characters can
be entered.
Entry example: "example.com"
[DNS Dynamic
Update]
Select the check box when using the DNS Dynamic Update function. When you are
not using the DNS Dynamic Update Function, clear the check box.
Using the DNS Dynamic Update function, by registering the [Host Name] and
[Domain Name] to the DNS server, the printer's IP address can be used
without being fixed.
(4) Set DHCP option settings.
㻠㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Acquire Host
Name]
When obtaining the host name using DHCP, select the [Acquire Host Name] check
box.
[DNS Dynamic
Update]
When updating the host name using DHCP, select the [DNS Dynamic Update] check
box.
(5) Click [OK].
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
WINS Settings
(1) Click [Edit...] in [WINS Configuration].
(2) Set WINS.
㻠㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When Using WINS Resolution
Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and set the following items.
[WINS Server
Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
When using the IP address settings specified by DHCP, if you obtain the
WINS server IP address from the DHCP server, the IP address obtained
from the DHCP server is overwritten.
[Scope ID]
Enter [Scope ID] as needed. You can enter up to 63 characters.
The scope ID is an identifier to determine the range available for printers
and computers. The scope ID is browsed regardless of the WINS resolution
settings.
When a scope ID is not specified for the computer in your network
environment, leave the [Scope ID] field blank.
Set the following items when registering printers on the WINS server.
[SMB Server Name]
Enter the name of the WINS server. You can enter up to 15 characters. (spaces
cannot be entered between the characters)
Set the server name that was set here using the SMB function.
[SMB Workgroup
Name]
Enter the workgroup name. You can enter up to 15 characters.(spaces cannot be
entered between the characters)
Set the workgroup name that was set here using the SMB function.
When not Using WINS Resolution
Clear the [WINS Resolution] check box.
(3) Click [OK].
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
ARP/PING Settings
㻠㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Select whether to use the ARP/PING function.
(1) Click [Edit...] in [ARP/PING Settings].
(2) Set ARP/PING.
[Use ARP/PING] When the check box is selected, you can change the IP address settings from the
client using the ARP/PING command.
(3) Click [OK].
㻠㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Use FTP Print] When the check box is selected, you can access the printer's FTP server using the
FTP client and print files.
[FTP Print User
Name]
Enter the user name for logging in to the FTP server. Up to 24 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.
You cannot set "root."
[Set/Change
Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password.
[Password] Enter the password for logging in to the FTP server. Up to 24 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.
[Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the entered [Password] again.
[FTP Settings] When the check box is selected, changing settings from the FTP client is allowed.
(3) Click [OK].
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
㻠㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
LPD Settings
(1) Click [Edit...] in [LPD Print Settings].
(2) Set LPD print.
[Use LPD Printing] When the check box is selected, the LPD print function is enabled.
[Print LPD Banner
Page]
When the check box is selected, whenever it prints using LPD applications, a banner
page is printed simultaneously.
Banner page printing is set for each job. If the [Print LPD Banner Page] check
box is selected, a banner page is printed simultaneously for jobs that are set
to print banners. Banner pages are not printed for jobs that are set not to
print banner pages.
If you are not printing pages, clear the [Print LPD Banner Page] check box. If
the [Print LPD Banner Page] check box is cleared, it will not always print
banner pages.
(3) Click [OK].
㻠㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Use RAW Printing] When the check box is selected, the RAW printing function is enabled.
[Use Bidirectional
Communication] When the check box is selected, bidirectional communication is performed.
(3) Click [OK].
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
IPP/IPPS Settings
(1) Click [Edit...] in [IPP Print Settings].
㻠㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2) Set IPP print.
To Use IPP/IPPS Printing
Select the [Use IPP] check box, and set the following items.
[Use SSL]
When the check box is selected, you can use IPPS (encryption of IPP
communication data using SSL).
You can only use IPPS when the SSL encrypted communication function is
enabled.
You cannot select the [Use SSL] check box if a key and certificate have
been created but the use key is not registered.
See "Setting Keys and Certificates" for more information about SSL
encrypted communication functions and key registration procedures.
[Use IPP
Authentication] When the check box is selected, use the IPP print user authentication function.
㻠㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When the [Use IPP Authentication] check box is selected, set the following items.
[User Name] Enter the user name used for the IPP print user authentication function. Up to 24
characters can be entered.
[Set/Change
Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password.
[Password] Enter the password used for the IPP print user authentication function. Up to 24
characters can be entered.
[Confirm] For confirmation, enter the same [Password] again.
IMPORTANT
When the [Use IPP] check box is selected
The HTTP setting [Use HTTP] turns [On] automatically.
"HTTP Settings"
When Not Using IPP/IPPS Printing
Clear the [Use IPP] check box.
(3) Click [OK].
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
WSD Settings
(1) Click [Edit...] in [WSD Print Settings].
㻠㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2) Set WSD printing.
[Use WSD Printing] Select the check box to use WSD printing.
[Use WSD
Browsing]
When the check box is selected, it obtains printer information using WSD reference.
If you select the [Use WSD Printing] check box, the [Use WSD Browsing]
check box will always be selected.
You can only clear the [Use WSD Browsing] check box when the [Use WSD
Printing] check box is cleared.
[Use Multicast
Discovery] Select the check box to use Multicast Discovery.
(3) Click [OK].
㻠㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Use HTTP] When the check box is selected, you can access the printer using HTTP.
IMPORTANT
When the [Use HTTP] check box is cleared
The settings on the functions using HTTP change automatically, as shown below.
[Use IPP Print] [Off]
[Remote UI]*[Off]
*Can only be set from the printer's control panel and the FTP client
If the [Use HTTP] check box is cleared, you will not be able to use IPP print or Remote UI, so consult with the
network administrator before you set it.
(3) Click [OK].
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
Setting SSL Keys and Certificates
㻠㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Check the key used for SSL.
See "Setting Keys and Certificates" for more information about SSL encrypted communication functions and key
registration and selection procedures.
Proxy Settings
(1) Click [Edit...] in [Proxy Settings].
(2) Set proxy functions.
When using proxy functions
Select the [Use Proxy] check box, and set the following items.
[HTTP Proxy Server
Address] Enter the address of the proxy server used by the proxy functions.
[HTTP Proxy Server
Port Number]
Enter the port number of the proxy server used by the proxy functions. You can set
it between [1] and [65535].
[Use Proxy within
Same Domain] When the check box is selected, use the proxy function within the same domain.
㻠㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When not using proxy functions
Clear the [Use Proxy] check box.
(3) Set proxy authentication functions.
When using proxy authentication functions
Select the [Use Proxy Authentication] check box, and set the following items.
[User Name] Enter the user name used for proxy authentication. Up to 24 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.
[Set/Change
Password]
Select the check box to use a password for proxy authentication. When you are not
using a password for proxy authentication, clear the check box.
[Password] When [Set/Change Password] is selected, enter the password used for proxy
authentication. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the entered [Password] again.
When not using proxy authentication functions
Clear the [Use Proxy Authentication] check box.
(4) Click [OK].
㻠㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Respond to
Discovery] Select the check box to allow it to respond to a multicast search request.
[Scope Name]
Enter the scope name used when a specified device is searched from utility software
such as NetSpot Device Installer using multicast. Up to 32 characters can be
entered.
(3) Click [OK].
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
SNTP Settings
Set whether to synchronize the printer time with the NTP server.
(1) Click [Edit...] in [SNTP Settings].
㻠㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2) Set SNTP.
When using the SNTP client function to obtain time information from the NTP server
Select the [Use SNTP] check box, and set the following items.
[NTP Server Name] If DNS is set, enter the server name of the NTP server in [NTP Server Name].
If DNS is not set, enter the IP address of the NTP server in [NTP Server Name].
[Polling Interval] Set the interval for the printer to poll the NTP server for time information. You can
set intervals of [1] to [48] (hours).
NOTE
NTP Server
It is a public time information server on the Internet.
When not Using the SNTP Client Function
Clear the [Use SNTP] check box.
(3) Click [OK].
㻠㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
Department ID Management PIN Configuration Settings
Specifies whether the department ID and password should be confirmed before printing using the XPS printer driver.
(1) Click [Edit...] in [Department ID Management PIN Confirmation Settings].
(2) Set the Department ID Management PIN Confirmation function.
㻠㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Use Department ID
Management PIN
Confirmation]
Select the check box to confirm the department ID and password when printing.
IMPORTANT
To use this function, you need to enable Department ID Management in advance.
"Specifying an ID for Each Department "
A key pair to use for encrypted SSL communication is required to confirm Department IDs and
passwords. Even if you enable [Department ID Management PIN Confirmation Settings], Department IDs
and passwords cannot be confirmed if the key pair is corrupted or invalid. In this case, erase the key pair
and see "Setting Keys and Certificates" to register a new key pair.
If there is no key pair, you cannot enable [Department ID Management PIN Confirmation Settings]. You
can use the preinstalled key pair, or generate an original key pair with the printer, to set as the default
key. For information on the default key, and instructions on how to generate an original key, see "Setting
Keys and Certificates."
(3) Click [OK].
㻠㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options.
6
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻠㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08L
When setting the IP address
NOTE
If you changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
Specify the port to be used again in the printer driver.
"Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing"
When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP
One of the following can be used: DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP. When any of the settings is turned [On], the remaining
two settings are automatically turned [Off].
Because it takes one to two minutes to check whether DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are available, we recommend
that you set the unused protocol(s) to [Off].
Each server or daemon (the DHCP server, BOOTP daemon, or RARP daemon) must be running on the network.
Even if you are using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, specify the settings for [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Gateway
Address] manually. If you cannot obtain information from the servers of DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP, the values
specified manually are used.
After the printer restarts, the values obtained from DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are displayed.
(If the values have been specified previously, they overwrite the obtained ones.)
When using DHCP
If you cycle the power of the printer, you may not be able to print. This is because a different IP address from the one
that has been used is assigned.
When using DHCP, consult your network administrator and perform either of the following settings.
Specifying the DNS Dynamic Update function
Specifying the settings so that the same IP address is always assigned when the printer starts up
When configuring the DNS Settings
IMPORTANT
DNS Dynamic Update
DNS Dynamic Update is a function that adds the IP address of the device and the names specified as the host name
and domain name to the DNS server automatically.
This function can be used in the environment in which a Dynamic DNS server is being used.
When using the DNS Dynamic Update function
You need to set the IP address, host name, and domain name of the DNS server.
When configuring the WINS Settings
IMPORTANT
WINS
WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) is a service that maps NetBIOS names (names of computers or printers) to IP
addresses. A WINS server is required to use WINS.
If [Scope ID] is specified
The printer cannot communicate with the computers that have a different scope ID.
When configuring the Multicast Discovery Settings
NOTE
Multicast discovery
This is a function that searches for certain devices using Service Location Protocol (SLP).
Attention (Protocol Settings)
㻠㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
By using the multicast discovery function, you can search for only the devices whose values in [Scope Name] are
verified, using the service location protocol (SLP) from utility software, such as NetSpot Device Installer.
When configuring the SNTP Settings
NOTE
When the check box for [Use SNTP] is selected
[Check NTP Server Connection] is displayed on the [TCP/IP Settings] page on the [Network]. When [Check NTP Server
Connection] is clicked, the printer communicates with the specified NTP server, and the result of the communication is
displayed in [NTP Server Connection Check Result].
[OK] is displayed if the printer communicated with the NTP server successfully, and [Error] is displayed if the printer
could not communicate with the NTP server due to any reason such as a setting mistake or communication error.
㻠㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08R
This section describes the procedure for setting IP v. 6.
Specify the settings for IP v. 6 using the Remote UI after specifying the settings for IP v. 4.
NOTE
About the IP v. 6 address
This printer can have up to seven IP v. 6 addresses of the following types. (Only one address can be registered
manually.) IP v. 6 communication allows you to use multiple IP v. 6 addresses simultaneously.
Type Registrable
Number Overview
Link-Local Address 1
A link local address is an IPv6 address that is generated automatically
using the specific prefix (information indicating to which network the
machine belongs) "fe80::" and an interface identifier generated from the
MAC address of the printer.
Because this address is valid only within the same prefix, it cannot
traverse the router. One link-local address is specified for this printer
whenever IP v. 6 is being used.
Manual Address 0 to 1
A manual address is a fixed address entered manually. By setting the IP
address manually, you can specify the prefix length and the default
router address.
Stateless Address 0 to 4
A stateless address is a temporary IPv6 address that is automatically
generated using the prefix included in the RA (Router Advertisement)
that is notified from the router and the printer's MAC address. If the
created IPv6 addresses do not overlap on the network, they may be
allocated as the printer's IP address.
Stateful Address 0 to 1 You can obtain a stateful address from the DHCP server using DHCP v.
6.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
Setting IP v. 6
㻠㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
4
Click [TCP/IP Settings].
㻠㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Click [Edit...] under [IPv6 Settings].
6
Select the [Use IPv6] check box.
㻠㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7
Specify the stateless address.
Check the [Use Stateless Address] check box when using a stateless address.
NOTE
Stateless Address Retention
After the [Use Stateless Address] check box is selected and the printer is restarted, the stateless address is displayed
automatically. This stateless address is discarded when the printer is turned OFF.
8
If you want to use a manual address, specify the following settings.
㻠㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you do not want to use a manual address, proceed to Step 9.
(1) Select the [Use Manual Address] check box.
(2) Enter [IP Address].
(3) Enter [Prefix Length].
(4) Enter [Default Router Address] as needed.
IMPORTANT
Addresses which cannot be entered in [IP Address] and [Default Router Address]
An address which starts with "ff" (multicast address)
An address which starts with "0:0:"
9
Specify DHCP v. 6.
When using the stateful address, select the [Use DHCPv6] check box.
㻠㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
10
If you want to use the DNS server, specify the following settings.
If you do not want to use the DNS server, proceed to Step 11.
You can specify the following [DNS Settings].
(1) Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server in [Primary DNS Server Address].
(2) Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server in [Secondary DNS Server Address].
(3) Set [Host Name] and [Domain Name].
Select the [Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names] check box to use the same host name and domain name as IPv4.
After the printer is restarted, the host name and domain name set by IPv4 are set automatically.
When using a host name and domain name that are different from IPv4, enter [Host Name] and [Domain
Name]. You can enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters.
Example of [Domain Name] entry: "example.com"
11
If you want to use DNS Dynamic Update, specify the following settings.
If you do not want to use the DNS server, proceed to Step 12.
㻠㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Select the [DNS Dynamic Update] check box.
Using the DNS Dynamic Update function, by registering the [Host Name] and [Domain Name] to the DNS
server, the printer's IP address can be used without being fixed.
(2) Set whether to register the IPv6 address to the DNS server during DNS dynamic updates.
If you select the [Register Manual Address] check box, a manual address is registered to the DNS server.
If you select the [Register Stateful Address] check box, a stateful address is registered to the DNS server.
If you select the [Register Stateless Address] check box, a stateless address is registered to the DNS server.
IMPORTANT
DNS Dynamic Update
DNS Dynamic Update is a function that adds the IP address of the device and the names specified as the host name
and domain name to the DNS server automatically.
This function can be used in the environment in which a Dynamic DNS server is being used.
When using the DNS Dynamic Update function
You need to set the IP address, host name, and domain name of the DNS server.
12
Click [OK].
㻠㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
13
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻠㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08S
After completing the protocol settings for the printer, configure each computer to be used for printing.
This section describes the procedure for when you are using Windows. If you are using Macintosh, see "Configuring a
Computer that Performs Printing" in "Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)."
Connecting to a TCP/IP Network
Install TCP/IP client software on all the computers to be used for printing to make them able to use a TCP/IP network. For
more details, see the instruction manual for the operating system.
Print Application Selection
This printer supports the following print applications when being used on a TCP/IP network.
LPD
RAW
IPP/IPPS
FTP
WSD
NOTE
Print application
A print application is software that receives print data sent via a network and outputs the data to the printer. A print
application is required to print to the printer on a network.
About the printer connection
The setting procedure for the printer connection varies depending on the print application. Perform the settings for the
printer connection after installing the printer driver.
For details on the features of print applications, see the following.
"Features of LPD"
"Features of RAW"
"Features of IPP/IPPS"
"Features of WSD"
For details on the procedure for configuring a print application, see the following.
"Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)"
"Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS)"
"Connecting the Printer (WSD)"
NOTE
When using FTP Client
You can print using FTP client software.
For details on the procedure for printing using FTP client software, see "Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client."
To manage the printer effectively
You can manage the printer effectively as follows by specifying Windows on the network as the print server.
The print server manages print data.
If you install an alternative printer driver previously, other computers can install the printer driver via the network.
For details on the procedure for configuring the print server, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
㻠㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08U
This is a print application that can be used on Windows, Mac OS X, UNIX, and Linux.
LPD is generally used for a TCP/IP network environment.
Advantages
LPD printing is the most common network printing method supported by Windows, Mac
OS X, UNIX, and Linux as standard.
You can also print a banner page.
Even if you should restart the printer while the printer is printing, the print data is
guaranteed because the print job is retransmitted (when a byte count is specified on
printing).
Disadvantage You cannot obtain the detailed information about print jobs.
Usage Example
When sharing the printer by multiple users (because it is easy to identify the owner of the
print data by using the banner page)
When there are a variety of computers (operating systems) in the same network
environment, and you want to print using only one print application
Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)"
Features of LPD
㻠㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08W
This is a print application that can be used on Windows.
By using this printer application, you can generally print faster than when using LPD.
Advantages
You can print relatively faster than when using other applications.
When printing in Windows, the print settings using RAW are easier than using other print
applications.
Disadvantage
You cannot obtain the detailed information about print jobs.
RAW is supported as standard by only Windows, not supported by Macintosh, UNIX, and
Linux.
Usage Example If you are using Windows and want to use the printer immediately after installing it
Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)"
Features of RAW
㻠㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08X
IPP is a print application that can be used on Windows etc. By using this print application, you can print not only to a
printer on your LAN, but also to a remote printer via the Internet.
IPPS is a print application that performs SSL encrypted communication when using IPP. IPPS can be used on Windows
when the SSL encrypted communication function is enabled.
Advantages You can print using the printer on the Internet.
You can obtain information about print jobs and the printer.
Disadvantage Printing takes relatively more time than other print applications do.
Usage Example When printing using a remote printer via the Internet
Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS)"
Features of IPP/IPPS
㻠㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-08Y
This is a print application that can be used on Windows Vista, 7, and Server 2008. By using WSD, you can search for the
printer automatically as well as obtain information about jobs and the printer, using the WSD protocol.
Advantages
You can search printers on a network automatically.
Installation of the printer driver is easy.
WSD can notify the computer of job completion and obtain the printer's configuration
information automatically.
Disadvantage Windows Vista, 7, and Server 2008 are only operating systems that support WSD.
Usage Example If you are using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008 and want to use the printer immediately
after installing it
Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (WSD)"
Features of WSD
㻠㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-090
Configure the protocol settings.
If You Are Using Windows
If You Are Using UNIX
If You Are Using Windows
When Installing the Printer Driver from the Beginning
1
Install the printer driver.
Following the procedure for automatically searching the printer on a network in "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install the
printer driver.
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
NOTE
When using LPD
When the printer driver is installed using the above method, RAW is specified as the print application to be used. If you
want to use LPD, install the printer driver using the above procedure, and then change a port.
When Changing a Port
1
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2
Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-
up menu.
3
Perform the following procedure.
(1) Display the [Ports] tab.
(2) Click [Add Port].
Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)
㻠㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Select the port type.
(1) Select [Standard TCP/IP Port].
(2) Click [New Port].
5
Click [Next].
6
Enter the IP address or name of the printer.
(1) Enter the IP address or name* of the printer in [Printer Name or IP Address].
*The DNS name to be registered on the DNS server (up to 78 characters)
(2) Click [Next].
㻠㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
IMPORTANT
If the printer cannot be detected
The following screen appears. Perform either of the following operations.
Follow the on-screen instructions and search again for the printer.
Specify the setting for [Device Type].
(1) Select [Standard], and then select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100].
(2) Click [Next].
NOTE
If you are not sure about the value to enter
The value to be entered varies depending on how the IP address of the printer was set.
For more details, see "Values for Setting a Port" or ask your network administrator.
7
Click [Finish].
8
㻠㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Click [Close].
9
Click [Apply].
If you want to use LPD, proceed to Step 10.
If you want to use RAW, proceed to Step 11.
10
If you want to use LPD, change the port configuration information.
When using LPD printing, set up the LPR protocol using the procedure below.
(1) Click [Configure Port].
(2) Select [LPR].
(3) Enter "lp" in [Queue Name].
(4) Click [OK].
㻠㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
11
Click [OK].
NOTE
When deleting an unnecessary port
Select the unnecessary port on the [Ports] tab, and then click [Delete Port].
If You Are Using UNIX
This section describes the preparation for printing using LPD. For details on the procedure for printing using FTP, see "FTP
Client."
IMPORTANT
About the setting procedure
The procedure described here is a setting example. Depending on the system environment, the setting procedure
may be different.
Specify the settings also when using a computer on which UNIX OS is installed as a stand-alone workstation along
the procedure described here.
1
Log in to the UNIX server as a root user.
IMPORTANT
If you do not have the root user permission on the UNIX server
Consult your network administrator.
2
Edit the "/etc/hosts" file to add the printer to the local network.
1. Open the "/etc/hosts" file using a text editor.
2. Add the following line.
Form: <The fixed IP address of the printer> (a tab) <the printer name> (a tab) # <comment>
Input Example: 192.168.0.215 LBP6780x #the printer to be added
㻠㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you specified [DNS Host Name] of the printer, specify the same character string as [DNS Host Name] in
<the printer name>.
For more details on [DNS Host Name], see "Configuring the Protocol Settings."
3. After saving the "/etc/hosts" file, exit the text editor.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to assign a fixed IP address to the printer.
When printing from UNIX OS, be sure to assign a fixed IP address to the printer. For details on the procedure for setting
the IP address, see "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)."
3
Set up the spooling system on the UNIX server.
Example of When Using Solaris 1.x
Example of When Using Solaris 2.x or Later
Example of When Using HP-UX
Example of When Using IBM-AIX
Example of When Using Solaris 1.x
1. Enter the following in the "/etc/printcap" file.
Form: :<Print queue name>|<comment>:\
:lp=<the device special file>:\
:sd=<the spool directory>:\
:if=<the log file directory>:\
:rm=<the IP address or name of the printer>
Input Example: :print_queue_name|comments:\
:lp=/var/spool/print_queue_name/.null:\
:sd=/var/spool/print_queue_name:\
:if=/var/spool/print_queue_name/log:\
:rm=printer_host_name
In the line of "rm", enter the same contents that you entered in <the printer name>.
2. Create the spool directory for the printer. Execute the following commands.
Form: mkdir -p <the spool directory>
chown daemon <the spool directory>
Input Example: mkdir -p /var/spool/print_queue_name
chown daemon /var/spool/print_queue_name
In <the spool directory>, enter the same character string that you added in the "/etc/printcap" file.
3. Create the log file for the printer. Execute the following commands.
Form: cp /dev/null <the log file directory>
Input Example: cp /dev/null /var/spool/print_queue_name/log
4. Proceed to Step 4.
Example of When Using Solaris 2.x or Later
1. Run "admintool."
The "admintool" utility is supplied with an operating system. For more details, see the manual for the
operating system.
㻠㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
2.
3.
4. Enter an arbitrary print queue name in [Printer Name], and then enter the IP address or name of
the printer in [Print Server].
5. Select [OK].
6. Proceed to Step 4.
Example of When Using HP-UX
1. Run "SAM."
The "SAM" utility is supplied with an operating system. For more details, see the manual for the operating
system.
2. Select [Printers and Plotters].
3. Select [LP Spooler] from the [Printers and Plotters] menu.
4. Select [Printers and Plotter] from the [LP Spooler] menu.
5. Select [Add Remote Printer/Plotter] from the [Action] menu.
6. Enter an arbitrary print queue name in [Printer Name], and then enter the IP address or name of
the printer in [Remote System Name].
7. Enter "lp" in [Remote Printer Name].
8. Select [Remote Printer is on a BSD System].
9. Select [OK].
10. Proceed to Step 4.
Example of When Using IBM-AIX
1. Run "SMIT."
The "SMIT" utility is supplied with an operating system. For more details, see the manual for the operating
system.
2.
3. Select [Standard processing].
4. Enter an arbitrary print queue name in [remote queue name] and the IP address or name of the
printer in [Hostname of Remote Server].
5. Enter "lp" in [name of the queue] on the remote server.
6. Enter "BSD" in [type of print spooler] on the remote server.
7. Proceed to Step 4.
4
Enter the following commands and check if you can print.
Form: lp -d <the print queue name> <the name of the file to be printed>
Input Example: lp -d print_queue_name report
㻠㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-091
Depending on the method for setting the IP address of the printer, the value to be entered in [Printer Name or IP Address]
on the following screen displayed in the process of port setting varies.
If you want to set the IP address to be assigned to the printer manually (If you know the IP address
to use)
Enter the IP address in [Printer Name or IP Address].
If you want to set the IP address using the DNS server, specify the DNS settings for the printer. Then, enter the printer
name (the DNS name registered on the DNS server) within up to 78 characters in [Printer Name or IP Address].
For example, enter the printer name as "AAA.BBB.com" if you specified the host name as "AAA" and the domain name
as "BBB.com." However, enter "AAA.CCC.com" if you can obtain the domain name (CCC.com) simultaneously when
you obtain the IP address from DHCP and so on.
If you want to set the IP address to be assigned to the printer using DHCP and so on
Specify the settings such as the DHCP settings so that the same IP address is always assigned to the printer when you
start the printer. For more details, see "If you want to set the IP address to be assigned to the printer manually" above.
If a different IP address is assigned to the printer each time the printer starts, specify the DNS settings for the printer
first. Then, enter the printer name (the DNS name registered on the DNS server) within up to 78 characters in [Printer
Name or IP Address].
For example, enter the printer name as "AAA.BBB.com" if you specified the host name as "AAA" and the domain name
as "BBB.com." However, enter "AAA.CCC.com" if you can obtain the domain name (CCC.com) simultaneously when
you obtain the IP address from DHCP and so on.
NOTE
About the DNS settings
See "Configuring the Protocol Settings."
Values for Setting a Port
㻠㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-092
If You Are Using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008
If You Are Using Windows XP or Server 2003
If You Are Using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008
IMPORTANT
When using IPPS printing
You need to obtain the public key for this printer and install it on Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008.
For details on the procedure for obtaining the public key, see "Obtaining the Public Key for This Printer When Using SSL
Encrypted Communication."
NOTE
About the screenshots
This procedure is described using screenshots from Windows 7.
1
Confirm the setting for [IP Address Filter].
Make sure that the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is not restricted to print.
"Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings"
IMPORTANT
If printing is restricted
You cannot install the printer driver.
If printing is restricted after the installation
If the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is restricted to perform printing in [Receive/Print
Range Setting], you cannot print from the computer.
2
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
3
Click [Add a printer].
4
Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS)
㻠㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
6
Perform the following procedure.
(1) Select [Select a shared printer by name].
(2) Enter "http://<the IP address or name of the printer>/ipp."
When you want to perform IPPS printing using SSL encrypted communication, enter "https://<the IP address
or name of the printer>/ipp."
(3) Click [Next].
IMPORTANT
About IPPS
IPPS can be used only when the SSL encrypted communication function is enabled.
㻠㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates."
7
Click [Have Disk], and then specify the folder that contains the printer driver from the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE
When you are using the IPP authentication function
If you are asked to enter the password, enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
For details on the settings for the IPP authentication function, see "Configuring the Protocol Settings."
8
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the printer driver.
If You Are Using Windows XP or Server 2003
1
Confirm the setting for [Receive/Print Range Setting].
Make sure that the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is not restricted to print.
"Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings"
NOTE
If printing is restricted
You cannot install the printer driver.
If printing is restricted after the installation
If the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is restricted to perform printing in [Receive/Print
Range Setting], you cannot print from the computer.
2
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
3
㻠㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Display [Add Printer Wizard].
Click [Add a printer].
Double-click [Add Printer].
4
Click [Next].
5
Select a printer type.
(1) Select [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer].
(2) Click [Next].
6
Select the printer to be connected.
Select [Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network].
㻠㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7
Enter [URL].
(1) Enter "http://<the IP address or name of the printer>/ipp."
When you want to perform IPPS printing using SSL encrypted communication, enter "https://<the IP address
or name of the printer>/ipp."
(2) Click [Next].
IMPORTANT
About IPPS
IPPS can be used only when the SSL encrypted communication function is enabled.
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates."
8
Click [Have Disk], and then specify the folder that contains the printer driver from the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE
When you are using the IPP authentication function
㻠㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-093
If you want to use IPPS printing, you need to obtain the public key for this printer using the following procedure and install
it on Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "https://<the IP address or name of the printer>/" in the address field, and then press the
[ENTER] key on your keyboard.
Input Example: "https://192.168.0.215/"
3
Click [Continue to this website (not recommended).] to display the Remote UI screen.
4
Double-click [Internet | Protected Mode] on the lower right of the Web browser.
5
Select [Trusted sites], and then click [Sites].
6
7
If the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] check box is selected, clear the
check box.
8
Click [OK] to redisplay the Remote UI screen.
9
Exit the Web browser once, and then restart it.
Obtaining the Public Key for This Printer When Using SSL Encrypted
Communication
㻠㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
10
Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to start the Remote UI, and then click [Continue to this website (not
recommended).].
11
Click [Certificate Error] on the right of the address entry field, and then select [View certificates].
12
Click [Install Certificate] in the displayed dialog box to run the Certificate Import Wizard.
13
Click [Next], select [Place all certificates in the following store], and then click [Browse].
14
Select [Trusted Root Certification Authorities], and then complete the Wizard following the
instructions on the screen.
15
If you cleared the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] check box in Step
7, select the check box.
㻠㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-094
NOTE
If the confirmation dialog box appears during the procedure
Enter the user name and password. For more details, see the manual etc. supplied with the operating system.
1
Confirm the setting for [Receive/Print Range Setting].
Make sure that the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is not restricted to print.
"Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings"
IMPORTANT
If printing is restricted
You cannot install the printer driver.
If printing is restricted after the installation
If the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is restricted to perform printing in [Receive/Print
Range Setting], you cannot print from the computer.
2
Install the printer driver.
Following the procedure for when you are using a WSD network environment in "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install
the printer driver.
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
Connecting the Printer (WSD)
㻠㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-096
IMPORTANT
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
After completing the NetWare network settings, configure each computer to be used for printing.
(1) Connecting to a NetWare Network
Install NetWare client software on all the computers that perform printing, and then log in to the NetWare server or to
the tree.
For details on the NetWare Network connection, see the instruction manual for NetWare or the operating systems.
(2) Connecting the Printer
Install the printer driver using the procedure for installing the printer driver for a local area connection or network
environment in "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
When you install the printer driver, select [Network printer] for the printer connection, and then select the print queue
created in "Configuring NetWare."
If a screen for selecting a port appears during the installation, select [Network], and then click [Settings].
From the list, select the print queue created in "Configuring NetWare."
Attention (NetWare Network Settings)
㻠㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-097
To perform printing using a NetWare network, you need to configure the print service such as the print server and queue
and the printer protocols.
IMPORTANT
About the print service settings
When specifying the print service settings using NetSpot Device Installer or NetWare Administrator, Novell Client (a
NetWare client from Novell, Inc.) needs to be installed as a client software on the computer on which NetWare
Administrator will run.
Types of the Print Service
Before configuring the print service, select the type of the print service referring to the following descriptions.
NOTE
About describing the print service in this manual
Usually, select the print service of NDS for NetWare 4.x or later and the print service in Bindery Mode for NetWare 3.x.
This manual does not describe the other settings.
About NDPS
You can also use NDPS as the print service on NetWare 5.x or later. When using NDPS, use Novell Printer Gateway
supplied with NetWare as the gateway. This manual does not describe the procedure for setting NDPS. For the setting
procedure, see the instruction manual of NetWare.
NDS (Novell Directory Services) and Bindery Mode
This printer supports both NDS and Bindery Mode. Select the appropriate mode for your network environment. If you
are using NetWare 3.x, you can use only Bindery Mode.
Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
This printer supports both the Queue server mode and Remote Printer mode.
Queue Server Mode
When using Queue Server Mode, you do not need any other hardware or software for the print server because
this printer is provided with all the functions of the print server.
NDS Queue Server Mode (NDS PServer) uses a NDS print server for printing. Bindery Queue Server Mode
(Bindery PServer) uses a Bindery print server for printing. Queue Server Mode requires one NetWare user license
per printer.
Remote Printer Mode
In Remote Printer Mode, this printer is controlled by a NetWare print server. Therefore, you need a NetWare print
server other than this printer. NDS Remote Printer Mode (NPrinter) uses a NDS print server for printing. Bindery
Remote Printer Mode (RPrinter) uses a Bindery print server for printing.
Configuring NetWare
If there is any operating system that supports NetSpot Device Installer on the network, configure the NetWare print server
using NetSpot Device Installer.
If there is no operating system that supports NetSpot Device Installer on the network, configure the NetWare print server
using NetWare Administrator or PCONSOLE.
Settings Using NetSpot Device Installer
For details on the procedures for installing or using NetSpot Device Installer, see the Readme file in the following folder in
Printer Driver Software CD-ROM.
Configuring NetWare
㻠㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
\NetSpot_Device_Installer\usa
Settings Using NetWare Administrator (When Using the Printer in NDS Queue Server Mode/NDS
Remote Printer Mode)
1
Log in to NetWare as "Admin" (or a user who has the equivalent permissions), and then run NetWare
Administrator.
1. Select [Print Services Quick Setup] from the [Tools] menu.
2. In [Print Server name], enter an arbitrary name. To use an existing print server, click the button on the right of [Print
Server name], and then select the print server from the list.
3. In [Name] for the printer, enter an arbitrary name.
4. When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, select [Other/Unknown] in [Type].
5. When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, select [Parallel] in [Type], and then click [Communication]. Set [Port]
to [LPT1] and [Connection type] to [Manual load].
6. In [Name] for the print queue, enter an arbitrary name.
7. In [Volume], enter the volume object (the object that indicates the physical volume on the network) that creates the
queue. You can select the volume object from a list by clicking the button on the right.
8. Specify the other settings, and then click [OK].
NOTE
About entering the print server name
Because the print server name is required for the protocol settings for the printer, note it down.
About Quick Setup
If you perform Quick Setup, the printer is allocated to the printer number "0."
When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, do not change the printer number from "0."
2
When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, start the print server.
When using the NetWare file server as the print server, enter "LOAD PSERVER.NLM" in the file server, and then press the
[ENTER] key on your keyboard.
ĺThe settings for NetWare print service are now completed.
NOTE
About Queue Server Mode
When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, you do not need to specify these settings.
3
Next, configure the NetWare protocol settings for the printer.
For details on the procedure for configuring the NetWare protocol, see "Configuring the Protocol Settings."
Settings Using PCONSOLE (When Using the Printer in Bindery Queue Server Mode/Bindery
Remote Printer Mode)
㻠㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
1
Log in to NetWare as the Supervisor, and then start PCONSOLE.
2
If you have not created a print server, create the print server.
1. Select [Print Server Information] from [Available Options], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
2. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard.
3. Enter the name of the print server to be created, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
4. Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard to go back to the [Available Options] list.
NOTE
About entering the print server name
Because the print server name is required for the protocol settings for the printer, note it down.
About using multiple NetWare servers
If you are using multiple NetWare servers and want to use this printer in Queue Server Mode, use the same print server
name for all the NetWare servers.
3
Create a queue, and then assign the print server to the queue.
1. From [Available Options] select [Print Queue Information], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
2. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard.
3. Enter the name of the queue to be created, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
4. Select the name of the created queue, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
5. Select [Queue Servers], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
6. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard.
7. Select the print server created in Step 2, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
8. Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard repeatedly to go back up to [Available Options].
4
Assign the printer to the print server.
1. Select [Print Server Information] from [Available Options], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
2. Select the print server created in Step 2, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
3. Select [Print Server Configuration], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
4. Select [Printer Configuration], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
5. From the [Configured Printers] list, select the printer number, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, select the printer number "0."
When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, you can select an arbitrary printer number.
5
Specify the name or type of the printer.
㻠㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
1. Enter an arbitrary printer name in [Name], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
2. When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, select [Defined] in [Type].
3. When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, select [Remote Parallel] in [Type], and then set [Port] to [LPT1].
4. Specify the settings for the other options, and then press the [ESC] key on your keyboard.
5. If the confirmation box appears, select [Yes], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
6. Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard to go back to the [Print Server Configuration] list.
6
Assign a queue to the printer.
1. Select [Queues Serviced by Printer], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
2. Select the printer name specified in Step 5, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
3. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard.
4. Select the queue created in Step 3, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
7
Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard until the [Exit PCONSOLE] window appears, and then select
[Yes] to exit PCONSOLE.
8
When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, start the print server.
1. When you are using a computer exclusively as the print server, enter "PSERVER.EXE" in the computer as the print
server name, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
2. When using the NetWare file server as the print server, enter "LOAD PSERVER.NLM <the print server name>" in the
file server, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
ĺThe settings for NetWare print service are now completed.
NOTE
About Queue Server Mode
When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, you do not need to specify these settings.
9
Next, configure the NetWare protocol settings for the printer.
For details on the procedure for configuring the NetWare protocol, see "Configuring the Protocol Settings."
㻠㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-098
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI.
In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network.
IMPORTANT
Before configuring the protocol settings
When configuring the protocol settings for the printer using the above software, the TCP/IP protocol must be able to
be used in your network environment.
Make sure that each setting option for TCP/IP is specified, the printer and computer are connected properly, and the
printer is ON.
NOTE
When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI
You can also specify the settings using the following software.
"FTP Client"
You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt.
The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software
appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
Configuring the Protocol Settings
㻠㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
4
Click [NetWare Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻠㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Select the [Use NetWare] check box.
NOTE
When the [Use NetWare] check box is cleared
The printer is not detected on the NetWare network.
7
Set [Frame Type].
Select the frame type that is used by the system environment you are using from [Auto Detect], [Ethernet II], [Ethernet
802.2], [Ethernet 802.3] or [Ethernet SNAP].
㻠㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When using Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (the print server of Bindery Mode)
1. Select [Bindery PServer] from [Print Service].
2. In [File Server Name], enter the file server name created in "Configuring NetWare."
3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare."
4. In [Print Server Password], enter the password for the print server.
5. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare."
6. Specify the settings for [Service Mode], [Printer Form], [Polling Interval], and [Buffer Size] as needed.
When using NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (the print server of NDS)
1. Select [NDS PServer] from [Print Service].
2. In [Tree Name] and [Context Name], enter the name of the tree to which the print server belongs and the context
name.
3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare."
4. In [Print Server Password], enter the password for the print server.
5. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare."
6. Specify the settings for [Service Mode], [Printer Form], [Polling Interval], and [Buffer Size] as needed.
When using RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (the print server of Bindery Mode)
1. Select [RPrinter] from [Print Service].
2. In [File Server Name], enter the file server name created in "Configuring NetWare."
3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare."
4. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare."
When using NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (the print server of NDS)
1. Select [NPrinter] from [Print Service].
2. In [Tree Name] and [Context Name], enter the name of the tree to which the print server belongs and the context
name.
3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare."
4. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare."
㻠㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Click [OK].
9
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻠㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09A
IMPORTANT
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
After completing the protocol settings for the printer, configure each computer to be used for printing.
About the protocol used in an SMB network
An SMB network supports only NetBIOS over TCP/IP, but not NetBEUI.
You need to install TCP/IP client software on all the computers to be used for printing to make them able to use a
TCP/IP network. For more details, see the instruction manual for the operating system.
Attention (SMB Network Settings)
㻠㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09C
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI.
In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network.
IMPORTANT
Before configuring the protocol settings
When configuring the protocol settings for the printer using the above software, the TCP/IP protocol must be able to
be used in your network environment.
Make sure that each setting option for TCP/IP is specified, the printer and computer are connected properly, and the
printer is ON.
About SMB printing
You can use SMB printing only when an SD card is installed.
NOTE
When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI
You can also specify the settings using the following software.
"FTP Client"
You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt.
The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software
appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify.
About the screenshots
This procedure is described using screenshots from Windows 7.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
Configuring the Protocol Settings
㻠㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
4
Click [SMB Settings].
㻠㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Click [Edit...].
6
Select the [Use SMB Server] check box.
㻠㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
When the [Use SMB Server] check box is cleared
The printer is not detected on the SMB network.
7
Specify the settings for SMB.
[Server Name]
Enter the computer name to which the printer belongs. Up to 15 characters can be entered.
Enter a name that does not overlap with the names used on the other computers or the
printers on the network.
[Workgroup Name]
Enter the name of the work group to which the printer belongs. Up to 15 characters can be
entered.
If there is no workgroup in your system environment, create a workgroup on Windows,
㻡㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
and then enter the workgroup name.
[Comments] If necessary, enter comments about the printer. You can enter up to 48 characters.
[Use LM Announce]
When announcing the existence of the printer to the LAN Manager, select the [Use LM
Announce] check box. When not making an announcement, clear [Use LM Announce].
When it is not necessary for the LAN Manager to reference the printer, you can clear
the [Use LM Announce] check box and reduce network traffic.
8
Specify the settings for SMB printing.
When using SMB printing
1. Select the [Use SMB Printing] check box.
2. Enter the name of this printer in [Printer Name]. Up to 13 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
When not using SMB printing
Clear the [Use SMB Printing] check box.
9
Click [OK].
㻡㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
12
Click [Edit...] in [WINS Configuration].
13
Set WINS.
When Using WINS Resolution
Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and set the following items.
㻡㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[WINS Server
Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
When using the IP address settings specified by DHCP, if you obtain the WINS server
IP address from the DHCP server, the IP address obtained from the DHCP server is
overwritten.
[Scope ID]
Enter [Scope ID] as needed. You can enter up to 63 characters.
The scope ID is an identifier to determine the range available for printers and
computers. The scope ID is browsed regardless of the WINS resolution settings.
When a scope ID is not specified for the computer in your network environment, leave
the [Scope ID] field blank.
Set the following items when registering printers on the WINS server.
[SMB Server Name] Enter the WINS server name set in Step 7.
[SMB Workgroup
Name] Enter the workgroup name set in Step 7.
When not Using WINS Resolution
Clear the [WINS Resolution] check box.
IMPORTANT
If [Scope ID] is specified
The printer cannot communicate with the computers that have a different scope ID.
14
Click [OK].
㻡㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
15
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻡㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09E
Configure all the computers to be used for printing so that they can be used on an SMB network.
Connecting to an SMB Network
1
Perform the following procedure.
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>1HWZRUNDQG,QWHUQHW&RQQHFWLRQV@ĺ>1HWZRUN&RQQHFWLRQV@
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>9LHZQHWZRUNVWDWXVDQGWDVNV@ĺ>0DQDJHQHWZRUN
connections].
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>9LHZQHWZRUNVWDWXVDQGWDVNV@ĺ>&KDQJHDGDSWHUVHWWLQJV@
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@ĺ>1HWZRUN&RQQHFWLRQV@ĺ>/RFDO$UHD&RQQHFWLRQ@
From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], double-click [Network and Sharing Center], and then click [Manage network
connections].
2
Display the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box.
Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon, and then select [Properties] from the pop-up menu.
Click [Properties].
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
㻡㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears
Click [Yes] or [Continue].
3
Make sure that the check boxes for the following options are selected.
[Client for Microsoft Networks]
[Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] (or [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)])
If the check boxes are not selected, select them.
4
Double-click [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] (or [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]).
㻡㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Click [Advanced] in the [General] tab.
6
Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
(1) Display the [WINS] tab.
(2) Select [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP].
(3) Click [OK].
7
Continue to click [OK] until all the dialog boxes close.
If a message that prompts you to restart the computer appears
Restart the computer.
Installing the Printer Driver
A printer driver is required for printing. Following "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install the printer driver.
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
㻡㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
If the screen that prompts you to select a port appears during the installation
Perform the following procedure.
1. Click [Add Port].
2. Select [Network], and then click [OK].
3. From the list, select [Workgroup Name], [Server Name], and [Printer Name] specified in "Configuring the Protocol
Settings" respectively.
㻡㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09F
The requisite tasks to use the printer in the AppleTalk network are as follows.
If you are using Mac OS X 10.6, see "Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)", and specify the settings for the
network.
Macintosh Network Settings
Configuring the Protocol Settings
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)
㻡㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09H
Configure the Macintosh network settings.
1
Select [System Preferences] from the Apple menu.
2
Click [Network].
3
Check the settings for the network port.
(1) Select [Network Port Configurations] from [Show].
(2) Make sure that the [Built-in Ethernet] check box is selected.
(If the check box is not selected, select it.)
Macintosh Network Settings
㻡㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Make sure AppleTalk is active.
(1) Select [Built-in Ethernet] from [Show].
(2) Click [AppleTalk].
(3) Make sure that the [Make AppleTalk Active] check box is selected.
(If the check box is not selected, select it.)
NOTE
If [Built-in Ethernet] does not appear in [Show]
Select [Network Port Configurations], and then select the [Built-in Ethernet] check box.
5
Close the [Network] dialog box, and then save the settings.
㻡㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09J
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI.
In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network.
IMPORTANT
Before configuring the protocol settings
When configuring the protocol settings for the printer using the above software, the TCP/IP protocol must be able to
be used in your network environment.
Make sure that each setting option for TCP/IP is specified, the printer and computer are connected properly, and the
printer is ON.
NOTE
When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI
You can also specify the settings using the following software.
"FTP Client (Macintosh)"
You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt.
The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software
appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify.
About the screenshots
This procedure is described using screenshots from Windows 7.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
Configuring the Protocol Settings
㻡㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
4
Click [AppleTalk Settings].
㻡㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Click [Edit...].
6
Select the [Use AppleTalk] check box.
㻡㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
When the [Use AppleTalk] check box is cleared
The printer is not detected on the AppleTalk network.
7
Specify the settings for AppleTalk.
1. Enter the name of the printer in [Service Name]. Up to 32 characters can be entered.
The name specified in this option is displayed on the printer list of Macintosh.
2. If any zone is set up on the network, enter the zone name in [Zone]. Up to 32 characters can be entered.
3. In [Print Mode], specify a printing process to be used. If you want to fix the printer to be used, select the check box
only for the printer.
[Open Both Spool and Direct]: Prints documents with a choice of "Spool" or "Direct" from the computer.
[Open Spool]: Prints documents at high speed.
㻡㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Open Direct]: Prints documents at high quality.
IMPORTANT
About [Phase]
[Phase] is fixed at [Phase 2], and you cannot specify the setting.
About [Service Name]
You cannot specify a name which includes "=", "@", "*", ":", or "~."
About [Zone]
You cannot specify a name which includes "=", "@", "*", ":", or "~." As for "*", only one of it can be used.
If multiple printers are in the same zone
Specify a specific name for each printer.
[Print Mode]
It is not possible to clear both [Open Spool] and [Open Direct] together.
8
Click [OK].
9
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻡㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻡㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09K
This section describes the procedure for when Terminal supplied with Mac OS X as standard is used.
IMPORTANT
If the [FTP Settings] check box is not selected in the [TCP/IP Settings] page in [Settings/Registration] - [Preferences] -
[Network], settings cannot be specified from the FTP client.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
1
Enter "ftp the IP address of the printer", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
Input Example: "ftp 192.168.0.215"
If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer
Print and confirm Network Status Print while referring to "Checking the Printer Settings", or consult your network
administrator.
2
Enter "root" as the user name, and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
3
Enter the administrator password, and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
The default password is "7654321".
4
Enter "cd config", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
5
Enter "get CONFIG <the file name>", and then press [return] on your keyboard.
Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters.
ĺThe config file is downloaded.
The characters entered for <the file name> become the name of the downloaded config file.
NOTE
If the config file cannot be found
Search for the config file using the file search function of your operating system.
(The download directory for the config file varies depending on the operating system or settings.)
6
FTP Client (Macintosh)
㻡㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Edit the downloaded config file in "TextEdit" or a similar text editor.
For details on descriptions of each option, see "Network Setting Items."
7
Enter "put <the file name> CONFIG", and then press [return] on your keyboard.
Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters.
ĺThe edited config file uploads.
In <the file name>, enter the name of the config file that was entered when the file was downloaded.
8
Enter "get reset", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
When the printer is restarted the settings will be enabled.
After checking that the printer has restarted, press the [c] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key, and return to the ftp
command prompt.
9
Enter "quit", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
10
Enter "exit", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard.
11
Select [Quit Terminal] from the [Terminal] menu.
㻡㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09L
After completing the protocol settings for the printer, configure each Macintosh to be used for printing.
Installing the Printer Driver
A printer driver is required for printing. Following "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install the printer driver.
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
IMPORTANT
The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh.
Download the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon Web site (http://www.canon.com/).
If you cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the Canon Web site, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Setting the Printer Destination
After installing the printer driver, set the printer destination. Following "Driver Guide", set the printer destination.
For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing
㻡㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09R
Software That Can Be Used for Managing the Printer
Remote UI
FTP Client
NetSpot Device Installer
Managing Print Jobs
Control Panel Setting
Setting Items
Checking the Number of the Printed Pages
Importing and Exporting Settings
Initializing the Settings
Checking the Printer Settings
Setting the Administrator Password
Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information
Sleep Mode
Auto Shutdown
Printing Silently
Specifying an ID for Each Department
Register/Update Software Function
Managing the Printer
㻡㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09S
You can manage the printer using the control panel and the following software.
Because the items you can manage differ respectively, use each software according to your environment or the item you
want to manage.
For details on the items you can manage using the control panel, see "Setting Items."
: Can be managed
: Cannot be managed
: Can be managed partly
Management Item Control Panel Remote UI FTP Client NetSpot Device Installer
Managing Print Jobs
Checking the
Number of the
Printed Pages
Checking the Printer
Settings
Setting the
Administrator
Password
Specifying the Device
Name or
Administrator
Information
Energy-saving Mode
Configuring the
Network Settings
(Sharing the Printer)
Security Settings
[Settings/Registration]
Menu
Specifying an ID for
Each Department
Software That Can Be Used for Managing the Printer
㻡㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09U
The Remote UI allows you to manage the printer using a Web browser.
<Features of the Remote UI>
No specific software is needed.
You can operate the Remote UI in a Web browser. You do not need specific software to operate the Remote UI.
You can manage the printer from a remote location.
By accessing and operating the printer from the Web browser via a network, you can manage the printer using a
computer in a remote location.
You can perform various operations, such as checking the current printer status or job logs and specifying various
network settings in the Remote UI.
Central management of all the printer settings with the administrator password.
Only the administrator can configure the settings or perform the operations related to the printer management by
setting the administrator password.
Before starting the Remote UI, see "Attention (Remote UI)."
Starting the Remote UI
Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page)
Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links
System Requirements of the Remote UI
Web Browser Internet Explorer 6 or later
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later
Operating System An operating system on which the above Web browsers can run
Display Resolution: 800 x 600 pixels or more
Display colors: 256 colors or more
Remote UI
㻡㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09W
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the printer>/" in the address field, and then press the [ENTER] key on
your keyboard.
Input Example: http://192.168.0.215/
If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter ["host name"."domain name"] instead of
the IP address.
Input Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/
If you want to use SSL encrypted communication, enter "https://<the IP address or name of the printer>/". If the
[Security Alert] dialog box or other dialog box appears, follow the directions in the message.
Input Example: https://192.168.0.215/
If the Remote UI top page is not displayed
Check the following points.
The Remote UI is enabled.
"Enabling the Remote UI"
The printer and computer are connected properly via a network.
The printer is turned ON.
The IP address or ["host name"."domain name"] is entered correctly.
3
Log in as Administrator or End-User.
Logging in as Administrator
By logging in as Administrator, you can perform all the operations and settings of the Remote UI.
Logging in as End-User
By logging in as End-User, you can check the device status, confirm the settings, and view the jobs.
Logging in as Administrator
(1) Select [Management Mode].
(2) Enter the password in [Password].
The default password is "7654321".
"Setting the Administrator Password"
(3) Click [Log In].
Starting the Remote UI
㻡㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Logging in as End-User
(1) Select [End-User Mode].
(2) Enter [User Name] as needed.
(3) Click [Log In].
NOTE
About [User Name]
If you want to log in by entering [User Name], permit job operations by end-users in [Management Settings] in the
[Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] - [Security] page.
"Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users"
Although it is possible to log in without entering any value for [User Name], logging in by entering the user name
enables to operate the jobs for which the user names correspond with each other.
If you click [Log In] with only spaces entered into [User Name], an error message appears.
The value to be entered for [User Name] is the user name you entered when logging in to the computer.
About department ID management
When the department ID management function is enabled, you can log in by entering the department ID and password.
㻡㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09X
NOTE
When using SSL encrypted communication
To use SSL encrypted communication, a key and its certificate need to have been created and the key needs to have
been registered as the default key.
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function and the procedure for registering a key, see "Setting Keys and
Certificates."
If the Remote UI does not start when SSL is enabled
There is a possibility that the file related to key management is broken. Perform the following procedure.
1. Press [ ] ( 6HWWLQJVRQWKHFRQWUROSDQHOVHOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>5HPRWH8,6HWWLQJV@ĺ>66/@DQG
then make sure that [SSL] is set to [Off].
2. Restart the printer.
3. Regenerate the key and certificate and specify the settings for SSL from the Remote UI.
"Setting Keys and Certificates"
4. Restart the printer.
When using a proxy server
If you cannot connect the computer to the printer via a proxy server when using a proxy server, add the IP address of
the printer to [Exceptions] (the addresses that do not use the proxy server) on the settings for the proxy server of the
Web browser.
The setting varies depending on the network environment. Consult your network administrator.
About Cookies
Configure your Web browser to enable cookies.
Setting priority
For details on the setting priority for when specifying the same item using a method other than the Remote UI as that
specified using the Remote UI, see "Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods)."
Starting the Remote UI
If the Remote UI is running on multiple computers at a time, the latest settings are valid.
If you want to log in as Administrator, we recommend that only one Remote UI should be running at a time.
You can change language displayed in the login screen from the Setup menu.
[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)
The following message may be displayed before the login screen appears depending on your environment.
"Processing… Wait a moment."
Attention (Remote UI)
㻡㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-09Y
This section describes the procedure for enabling the Remote UI using the printer's control panel.
NOTE
When enabling the Remote UI using software other than the Remote UI
You can also enable the Remote UI using the following software.
"FTP Client"
You can enable the Remote UI by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt.
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
When the message is displayed, press [OK].
2
Select [Remote UI Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [Remote UI] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Enabling the Remote UI
㻡㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A0
Remote UI Portal Page
The screen shown below, which is displayed when the Web browser is launched and you have logged in to the Remote UI,
is called the Portal Page.
(1) [Device Basic Information]
[Device Status]
The indicators and status messages show the current printer status. You can see the status of the printer from the
indicator colors, as shown below.
Indicator Color Printer Status Solution
(Gray): Offline (not accepting print data) Go back online and print.
(Green): Normal status (able to print)
(Yellow):
There is no printing trouble, but some
type of action is required (a warning
message is displayed) Follow the on-screen instructions
shown in [Error Information] below
and solve the problem.
(Red): Printing is not possible for some reason
(an error message is displayed)
[Error Information]
It displays error information generated by the printer.
(2) [Consumables Information]
[Paper Information]
It displays paper level, size and type for each of the paper sources.
[Remaining Toner]
It displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge.
Consumables Display Status Solution
16-100% Able to print -
9-16%
*
Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page)
㻡㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Toner Cartridge
1-9%
The toner cartridge
needs to be
replaced soon
Printing will continue or stop.
If printing has stopped, press [ ] (
: Online) on the printer control
panel and printing will continue.
Have a replacement toner cartridge
ready.
We recommend that you replace the
toner cartridge before doing a large
amount of printing.
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
0%
The toner cartridge
has reached the
end of its life
The printer stops printing, and you
cannot continue the job.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new
one.
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
<Insert
Cartridge>
The toner cartridge
is not installed Install the toner cartridge properly.
*Whether the printer continues or stops printing when the toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon
depends on the setting for [Warning Step] in the [Setup] menu.
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
(3) [Message Board]
It displays messages from the administrator.
"Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links"
(4) [Support Link]
It displays links to information concerning printer support.
"Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links"
(5) [Language]
You can change the screen display language from the drop-down list.
(6) [Mail to System Manager]
You can send e-mail to the system manager.
(7) Update Button
Refresh the portal page display to the latest status.
(8) [Status Monitor/Cancel]
You can check and change the status of jobs the printer is processing. You can also check device status.
"[Status Monitor/Cancel] Menu"
(9) [Settings/Registration]
You can set/change the various printer settings. The items that can be set/changed differ depending on whether
you log in as administrator or end user.
"[Settings/Registration] Menu"
(10) [Box]
When the optional SD card is installed, you can print, copy and send documents that are saved in the printer's
box.
(11) [Direct Print]
Using the printer, you can print PDF files, PS/EPS files, image files and XPS files that are saved to the computer
you are using as is, without opening them.
"Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print)"
(12) [Service Management Service]
It displays the SMS (Service Management Service) screen.
"MEAP "
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Menu
The following pages are in the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu.
Print: [Job Status] Page
Print: [Job History] Page
E-Mail RX: [Job History] Page
㻡㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Error Information] Page
[Device Features] Page
[Device Information] Page
[Check Counter] Page
Print: [Job Status] Page
You can check the status of jobs that are currently printing and manage them using cancel/resume.
(1) [Job No.]
The Job No. of the job is displayed. When you click the Job No., the job's details are displayed.
(2) [Document Name]
The name of the job is displayed. For e-mail printing jobs, the subject of the e-mail is displayed.
(3) [User Name]
The user name of the job is displayed. For e-mail printing jobs, the e-mail sender is displayed.
(4) [Status]
The status of the job is displayed.
(5) [Job Operation]
It runs the job operation. Click the button for the operation that you want to run.
"Managing Print Jobs"
[Cancel] It cancels the printing of the job that you clicked on and deletes the job.
If [Interrupt Print] is set to [On], you can perform the following operations.
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
[Interrupt] It pauses the job that is currently being output, and makes the new job the printing priority.
When the new job is finished printing, it resumes printing the paused job.
[Priority Print] The output order of the job is moved up by one.
[Pause]/[Resume]
When you click [Pause], it pauses the job output. The button for the paused job changes to
[Resume].
When you click [Resume], the paused job resumes. The button for the resumed job goes back
to [Pause].
NOTE
[Job Operation]
When logged on in End-User mode, it is possible to operate jobs with user names that match using [Management
Settings] of [Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] - [Security] only when job operation by end users is
㻡㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
permitted.
"Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users"
(6) [Dept. ID]
If department ID is set, the department ID for the job is displayed.
(7) [Date/Time]
The date and time the job was input is displayed.
(8) Update Button
It refreshes the [Job Status] page display to the latest status.
(9) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
Print: [Job History] Page
The Print Job/Direct Print, saved job, report printing and e-mail Job History are displayed.
NOTE
[Job History] Page Display
It is possible to display Job History only when displaying job history is permitted by [Display Job History] of
[Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] - [Security].
(1) Display Toggling
Select the job history to display. Only the selected type of job history is displayed in the list.
[Print Job/Direct Print]
[Stored Job]
[Report]
[E-Mail Print]
(2) Display Job History
The output job history list is displayed.
(3) Update Button
It refreshes the [Job History] page display to the latest status.
(4) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
E-Mail RX: [Job History] Page
It displays the received e-mail history.
㻡㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Display Job History
The received e-mail history list is displayed.
(2) Update Button
It refreshes the [Job History] page display to the latest status.
(3) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
[Error Information] Page
Information about errors occurring in the printer is displayed.
(1) [Error Information] (Number of Errors)
It displays whether or not errors have occurred, and if there are errors, the number of errors.
(2) [Error Information] (Information)
It displays status and solutions for the error information occurring in the printer.
The meanings of the displayed icons are shown below.
㻡㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(3) Update Button
It refreshes the [Error Information] page display to the latest status.
(4) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
[Device Features] Page
The printer equipment information and the functions that can be used in the current equipment status are displayed.
(1) [Basic Specifications]
The amount of RAM installed in the printer console, the installed options and the basic printing performance are
displayed.
(2) [Toner]
Information about the toner cartridges installed in the printer is displayed.
(3) [PDL]
The page description languages that can be used by the printer are displayed.
㻡㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(4) [Direct Print]
The file formats and document formats that can be used by Direct Print are displayed.
(5) Update Button
It refreshes the [Device Features] page display to the latest status.
(6) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
[Device Information] Page
The basic information about the printer and the system manager information are displayed.
(1) [Device Basic Information]
The basic information about the printer is displayed.
(2) [Version Information]
The printer controller version is displayed.
(3) [System Manager Information]
Information about the registered system manager is displayed.
(4) [Usage Information]
The number of pages printed is displayed.
(5) Update Button
It refreshes the [Device Information] page display to the latest status.
(6) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
[Check Counter] Page
The number of pages printed is displayed.
"Checking the Number of the Printed Pages"
㻡㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) [Main Counter]
The number of pages printed for each counter is displayed.
(2) Update Button
It refreshes the [Check Counter] page display to the latest status.
(3) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
[Settings/Registration] Menu
The following pages show the settings that can be checked using the [Settings/Registration] menu.
[Preferences]
[Control Menu] Page
[Paper Source Menu] Page
[Network] Page
[Layout Menu] Page
[Quality Menu] Page
[User Maintenance Menu] Page
[Output/Control]
[Utility Menu] Page
[Device Control] Page
[Management Settings]
[Department ID Management] Page
[Security] Page
[License/Other] Page
[Control Menu] Page
It displays the operation settings for energy-saving mode (Sleep Mode) and when errors occur.
For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)."
㻡㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) [Sleep Settings]
The settings related to sleep mode operation are displayed.
(2) [Timer Settings]
The settings related to timer operation are displayed.
(3) [Warning Step]
The settings related to warning display are displayed.
(4) [PDL Selection (Plug-n-Play)]
The currently selected page description language is displayed.
(5) [Date/Time Settings]
The settings related to date and time are displayed.
(6) [Panel Display/Notification Settings]
The settings related to control panel display are displayed.
(7) [Others]
Other operation settings not included in the above categories are displayed.
(8) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
㻡㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
Changing Settings
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
[Paper Source Menu] Page
It displays the settings for paper size, etc. when printing from the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer.
For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" or "[Select Feeder] Menu."
(1) [Paper Source]
The currently selected paper source is displayed.
(2) [Paper Size]
The paper size selected for each paper source is displayed.
(3) [Tray]
The operation settings related to the multi-purpose tray are displayed.
(4) [Auto Selection]
It displays whether to recognize the paper source for auto selection when [Auto] is set for [Paper Source] for each
paper source.
(5) [Paper Type]
The paper type selected for each paper source is displayed
(6) [2-Sided Settings]
The settings related to 2-sided printing are displayed.
(7) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
NOTE
Changing Settings
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
㻡㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Network] Page
It displays the printer's network settings, etc.
(1) [TCP/IP Settings]
It displays the TCP/IP settings.
How to change settings
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
(2) [NetWare Settings]
It displays the NetWare settings.
How to change settings
"Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) "
(3) [AppleTalk Settings]
It displays the AppleTalk settings.
How to change settings
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
(4) [SMB Settings]
It displays the SMB settings.
How to change settings
"Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) "
(5) [SNMP Settings]
It displays the SNMP settings.
How to change settings
"Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol"
(6) [Spooler]
It displays the spool function settings when the SD card is installed.
How to change settings
"Setting the Spooling Function "
㻡㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(7) [Startup Time Settings]
It displays the startup time settings.
How to change settings
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
(8) [Ethernet Driver Settings]
It displays the network interface settings.
How to change settings
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
(9) [IEEE802.1X Settings]
It displays IEEE802.1X security settings.
How to change settings
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
(10) [E-Mail Print Settings]
It displays the e-mail print settings.
How to change settings
"Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)"
(11) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
NOTE
Changing Settings
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
[Layout Menu] Page
It displays the settings relating to print appearance, such as adjustment of print position and setting gutter margins.
For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)."
(1) [Layout Menu]
The settings for number of pages and print appearance are displayed.
(2) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
NOTE
Changing Settings
㻡㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
[Quality Menu] Page
It displays the settings related to print quality, such as toner density adjustment.
For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)."
(1) [Basic Settings]
It displays the settings related to printing resolution and toner.
(2) [Adjust Toner Density]
Display the fine-tuned toner density.
(3) [Halftones]
It displays the settings related to halftone representation method when printing.
(4) [Others]
The settings related to other print quality are displayed.
(5) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
[User Maintenance Menu] Page
It displays the settings for printer adjustment from a specified paper source if a problem occurs, such as adjustment of print
position and recovery printing.
For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)."
㻡㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) [Adjust Print Position/Others]
It displays the print position adjustment settings for each paper source. It also displays the settings for operation
and maintenance if a problem occurs.
(2) [Import/Export]
It displays the settings for saving the printer settings on the computer you are using (Export) or the settings for
reading the printer settings from the computer (Import).
(3) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
NOTE
Changing Settings
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
[Utility Menu] Page
You can print each type of management report. Select the item to output, and then click [Execute].
For details on the settings, see "[Utility Menu] Menu."
The following management reports can be output.
Status Print
㻡㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Network Status Print
E-Mail RX History List
Printing Position Adjustment Print
Stored Job List *
PCL Font List
PS Configuration Page
PS Font List
Print History List (Print Job/Direct Print)
Print History List (Stored Job) *
Print History List (Report)
Print History List (E-Mail Print)
A4 Cleaning
LTR Cleaning
Counter Report
Page Count List
Print MEAP System Information
* Only when the optional SD card is installed
[Device Control] Page
It controls the printer. Select the item to run, and then click [Execute].
For details on the settings, see "[Reset] Menu" or "Basic Printer Operations."
[Department ID Management] Page
If department ID management is set, it displays the number of pages printed by each registered department.
For details on the settings, see "Specifying an ID for Each Department ."
㻡㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) [Department ID Page Total]
It displays the number of pages printed by each department.
(2) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
NOTE
Changing the settings
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
[Security] Page
It displays printer information and security settings.
(1) [Management Settings]
It displays general information about the printer.
How to change settings
"Setting the Administrator Password"
"Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information"
"Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs"
㻡㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
"Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users"
"Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function)"
"Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print"
(2) [Remote UI Settings]
It displays whether the Remote UI is set to use the SSL encrypted communication function.
How to change settings
"Changing the Remote UI Settings"
(3) [Key and Certificate Settings]
It displays information on registered keys and certificates.
How to change settings
"Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI"
(4) [CA Certificate Settings]
It displays information on registered keys and certificates.
How to change settings
"Displaying the [CA Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI"
(5) [IPSec Settings]
It displays the IPSec security policy list.
How to change settings
"Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function "
(6) [Display Job History]
It displays whether it is set to allow job history to be displayed.
How to change settings
"Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display"
(7) [IP Address Filter]
It displays information restricting users who can print and change settings.
How to change settings
"Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings"
(8) [MAC Address Filter]
It displays information restricting users who have access.
How to change settings
"Restricting the Users Who Can Access"
(9) [Back to Page Top]
It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page.
NOTE
Changing the settings
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
[License/Other] Page
It displays the pages that the settings for message boards or support links, or registering or updating software are
performed.
㻡㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) [Message Board/Support Link]
It displays messages from the administrator and links to support pages.
How to change settings
"Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links"
(2) [Register/Update Software]
It displays the pages that registering or updating software is performed.
How to change settings
"Register/Update Software Function "
NOTE
Changing the settings
You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode.
㻡㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A1
You can post messages from the administrator on a message board on the portal page of the Remote UI. Also, you can
set links to information about printer support in the portal page support link, and make it accessible from the Remote UI
when necessary.
When you are logged in system manager mode, you can change the messages on the message board and change the link
destination of support links.
Displaying a Support Page
1
From [Support Link] on the portal page, click the link destination on the support page.
Changing Message Board Comments or Support Link Destinations
1
Select [Message Board/Support Link].
From the [Settings/Registration] menu, select [Message Board/Support Link] in [License/Other] under [Management
Settings].
Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links
㻡㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Message] Enter messages from the administrator.
[URL]
The supported URL protocols are as follows.
http://
https://
If you omit the supported URL protocol in entering the URL address, it is interpolated
automatically.
㻡㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A2
In FTP Client, you can specify the network settings, security settings, and so on by accessing the FTP server of the printer
using Command Prompt.
<Features of FTP Client>
No specific software is needed.
You can operate the FTP Client using the Command Prompt supplied with Windows. You do not need specific
software to operate the FTP Client.
You can specify the network settings at a time.
Because the setting items are listed in a file, you can specify multiple items all at once.
To manage the printer using FTP Client, perform the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
If the [FTP Settings] check box is not selected in the [TCP/IP Settings] page in [Settings/Registration] - [Preferences] -
[Network], settings cannot be specified from the FTP client.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
NOTE
For Macintosh users
For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "FTP Client (Macintosh)."
1
Run Command Prompt.
NOTE
If you are using Windows
Run Command Prompt using the following procedure.
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@
If you are using UNIX
Display the console screen.
2
Enter "ftp <the IP address of the printer>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
Input Example: "ftp 192.168.0.215"
If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer
Print and confirm Network Status Print while referring to "Checking the Printer Settings", or consult your network
administrator.
3
Enter "root" as the user name, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
4
FTP Client
㻡㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Enter the administrator password, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
The default password is "7654321".
5
Enter "cd config", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
6
Enter "get CONFIG <the file name>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters.
ĺThe config file is downloaded.
The characters entered for <the file name> become the name of the downloaded file.
If you cannot find the config file
Search for the config file using the file search function of your operating system.
(The download directory for the config file varies depending on the operating system or settings.)
7
Edit the downloaded config file in Notepad or a similar text editor.
For details on descriptions of each option, see "Network Setting Items."
8
Enter "put <the file name> CONFIG", and then press [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters.
ĺThe edited config file uploads.
In <the file name>, enter the name of the config file that was entered when the file was downloaded.
9
Enter "get reset", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
ĺWhen the printer is restarted the settings will be enabled.
After checking that the printer has restarted, press the [c] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key, and return to the ftp
command prompt.
10
Enter "quit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
11
Enter "exit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
㻡㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
ĺCommand Prompt closes.
㻡㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A3
NetSpot Device Installer is the Canon software included in the supplied CD-ROM.
<Features of NetSpot Device Installer>
You do not need to install NetSpot Device Installer.
You can start NetSpot Device Installer directly from the CD-ROM without installing it.
You can also install NetSpot Device Installer on a computer.
You can check the various printer statuses.
You can view the list of statuses of the Canon devices on a network easily.
Also, you can change the default network settings or basic protocol settings.
For details on other procedures for starting and using NetSpot Device Installer, see the following.
Starting method: "Printer Driver Installation Guide"
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
Usage: Help of NetSpot Device Installer
Help is displayed by clicking [Help] in the [Help] menu.
IMPORTANT
If Windows Firewall is enabled
Before starting NetSpot Device Installer, configure Windows Firewall to unblock NetSpot Device Installer.
For details on the configuration procedure, see the Readme file of NetSpot Device Installer.
About operating systems that NetSpot Device Installer supports
For details on the latest NetSpot Device Installer, see the Canon Web site (http://www.canon.com/).
NetSpot Device Installer
㻡㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A4
You can check/delete the job currently being printed or check job histories using the Remote UI.
You can also delete the job currently being printed using a method other than the Remote UI.
"Canceling a Job"
Before managing print jobs, see "Attention (Job Manager)."
Checking/Deleting the Job Currently Being Printed
1
Start the Remote UI.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
From the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu, select [Job Status] to display the job currently being printed.
3
If you want to delete the job, perform the following procedure.
Using job operation, click [Cancel] on the job you want to delete.
Managing Print Jobs
㻡㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Print Job/Direct Print]: The printed job history is displayed from the computer.
[Stored Job]: The printing history of jobs stored in BOX is displayed.
[Report]: The utility print printing history is displayed.
[E-Mail Print]: The history of jobs received by e-mail and printed is displayed.
㻡㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A5
IMPORTANT
Deleting the print logs
The print logs are deleted by turning the printer OFF or performing a hard reset.
NOTE
About [Document Name]
A job file name of up to 32 characters can be displayed. If the file name has more than 32 characters, the characters
after the limited number are not displayed.
Also, depending on the application, the application name may be added to the beginning of the file name.
About the job histories
The maximum numbers of the print logs that you can check are as follows. When the number of the jobs exceeds
the maximum, the job histories are deleted starting from the oldest one.
[Print Job/Direct Print]: 400 (2,000 when SD card is installed)
[Stored Job]: 2,000 (only when SD card is installed)
[Report]: 16 (128 when SD card is installed)
[E-Mail Print]: 16 (128 when SD card is installed)
If the jog log display is not specified in [Display Job History] in the [Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] -
[Security] page, you cannot display the job histories.
"Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display"
Attention (Job Manager)
㻡㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A6
This section describes the menu operation for this printer.
Procedure for the Menu Operation
The menu consists of three hierarchies: "Option", "Item", and "Setting Value." Select the target options in each hierarchy.
As an example of the setting procedure, this section describes the procedure for setting [Drawer 1 Size] in the [Paper
Source] to [B5]. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Before specifying the setting, see "Attention (Control Panel Setting)."
Operation Procedure Key Operation
1Place the printer offline.
Press [ ] ( : Online).
When the printer is online, the [Setup] menu can be displayed, however, the
[User Maintenance] options cannot be specified.
2
Display the [Setup] menu. Press [ ] ( : Settings).
The [Setup] menu is displayed.
3
Select the option.
When the [Paper Source]
options are selected
Press [ ] or [ ].
The target option is displayed.
4
Display the item. Press [OK].
The selected item is displayed.
5
Select the item.
When [Drawer 1 Size] is
selected
Press [ ] or [ ].
The target item is displayed.
Select the item. Press [OK].
Control Panel Setting
㻡㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6The selected setting value is displayed.
7
Select the setting value.
When [B5] is selected
Press [ ] or [ ].
The target setting value is displayed.
8
Determine the selected
setting value.
Press [OK].
The target setting value is specified.
The setting completion screen is displayed for 3 seconds. You can change the
display time for the screen using [Set. Comp. Notify] in the [Setup] menu.
9Go out of the setting
menu. Press [ ] ( : Online).
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation
You can enter each menu when the printer is in the following status.
: You can enter the menu
: You cannot enter the menu
When the printer is ready to print *1
When an error is occurring *2
When the printer is online When the printer is offline
[Setup] Menu *3
[Select Feeder]
Menu
[Reset] Menu *4
[Job] Menu
[Utility Menu] Menu
Application menu
*1 The printer is ready to print when the (Ready) indicator is on.
*2 An error is occurring in the printer when the (Message) indicator is on.
*3 The [User Maintenance] options cannot be specified.
*4 You cannot perform [Form Feed].
㻡㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A7
NOTE
If you want to go back up the previous hierarchy or cancel a selected item
To go back up the previous hierarchy or cancel a selected item, press [ ] ( : Back) or [ ].
Pressing [ ] ( : Online) on the screen during the menu operation cancels a selected item and places the
printer online or offline.
When the printer can be placed offline
The printer can switch back to the offline state when it is ready to print (when the (Ready) indicator is on).
About setting values
Depending on the item, some settings become effective after restarting the printer.
Setting priority
For details on the setting priority for when specifying the same item using a method other than the control panel as that
specified using the control panel, see "Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods)."
About items displayed in the display
Some items are added and displayed only when an optional accessory is installed, and you can select such items.
About the exclusive [Setup] menu
When the exclusive [Setup] menu is selected in the "Option" hierarchy, see the following about each option.
PCL: "[Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options)"
UFR II: "[Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options)"
Imaging: "[Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options)"
XPS: "[Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) "
PS: "[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)"
PDF: "[Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options)"
MEAP: "[Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options) "
About [Initialize Menu]
[Initialize Menu] does not have a lower hierarchy than "Option."
For details on the procedure for the initialization, see "Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel."
Attention (Control Panel Setting)
㻡㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A8
[Setup] Menu
[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options)
[Setup] Menu ([Check Counter] Options)
[Utility Menu] Menu
[Job] Menu
[Reset] Menu
[Select Feeder] Menu
Setting Items
㻡㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0A9
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
After changing the setting items with "*1", cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the
settings effective.
The setting items or setting values with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Sleep Mode] [High (Deep Sleep)], [Mid (Printer Sleep)]
Set the sleep mode.
"Sleep Mode"
[Sleep Even if Error] [Off], [On]
[Auto Sleep Time] [5 minutes], [10 minutes], [15 minutes],
[30 minutes], [60 minutes]
[Timer Settings]
[Wake Up Timer] [Off], [On] Set sleep modes (printer sleep mode and deep
sleep mode) to cancel automatically.
"Sleep Mode"
[Wake Up Time] 00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59
[Auto Reset Time]
[Off], [10 seconds], [20 seconds], [30
seconds], [40 seconds], [50 seconds], [1
minute], [2 minutes], [3 minutes], [4
minutes], [5 minutes], [6 minutes], [7
minutes], [8 minutes], [9 minutes]
Specifies whether one of the following
transitions is to take place when no key
operation has been performed in a particular
screen.
A transition to the MEAP authentication
screen
A transition to the ready status screen
and the screen for using MEAP
applications
A transition from offline status to online
status
When no key operation has been
performed during a job processing
session, this function is also executed
depending on the current screen or
current position in a menu.
"Online and Offline"
[Sleep Mode
Timer] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the sleep timer function is
used to put the printer into a sleep mode
(printer sleep mode or deep sleep mode) when
the printer is not used for a certain time.
"Sleep Mode"
[Sleep Mode
Time] 00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59
[Warning Step]
[Toner Cart.
Warning] [Continue Printing], [Stop Printing]
Specifies whether the printer should continue
or stop printing when <Toner cartridge will
soon reach end of lifetime.> appears.
[Auto Continue] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should
automatically use the function that, when an
error is occurring, releases the printer from the
error temporarily (Error Skip) and continues the
job.
[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)
㻡㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Panel Language]
>ýHãWLQD@>'DQVN@>'HXWVFK@[English],
[Español], [Français], [Italiano], [Magyar],
[Nederlands], [Norsk], [Polski], [Português],
>Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ@>6XRPL@>6YHQVND@>7UNoH@>中
文(体)], [ ]
Specifies the language to be displayed in the
display.
This setting allows you to change
language displayed in the Remote UI
login screen.
[Alarm] [Off], [On] Specifies an alarm sound for when an error
occurs.
[Show Warnings]
[Toner Cart.
Warning] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should display
<16 Tnr cart. will soon reach end of lifetime.>
when the toner cartridge needs to be replaced
soon.
[Drawer Empty] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should blink the
Paper Source indicator for the paper drawer
that ran out of paper.
[E-Mail Trans.
Error] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should display an
error message when a communication error
occurs in the e-mail printing.
[Date/Time Settings]
[Date] 01/01 2001 to 31/12 2030 Specify date or time when the clock is not
keeping correct date or time.
"Turning the Power On and Specifying a
Language"
[Time (24 hour)] 00:00:00 to 23:59:59
[Daylight Savings]*1
[DST Settings] [Off], [On] Specifies whether to set the daylight saving
time.
[Start
Date/Time]/[End
Date/Time]
[Month], [Week], [Day], [Time (24 hour)] Specifies the time duration of the daylight
saving time.
[Time Zone]*1 GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 Specifies the time zone according to the region
where the printer is being used.
[SD Card]*1*2 [Off], [On]
Specify whether to use SD cards. When the
optional SD card is installed, you will be able
to use the following functions.
Interrupt print
Changing the order of print data (Priority
print)
Pausing/Resuming print data processing
(Pausing/Resuming printing)
Saving print data on the SD card (boxes)
(Stored job print)
Spooler
SMB print
Importing and Exporting Settings
Stored Job List
Print History List (Stored Job)
Secured print
[Interrupt Print]*1*2 [Off], [On]
Set whether to allow the job printing to be
interrupted.
"Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt
Printing) "
Set the amount of time before secured print
㻡㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Sec. Print Del.
Time]*2
[1 hour], [2 hours], [3 hours], [6 hours], [12
hours], [24 hours]
jobs are automatically deleted.
Secured print data is saved on the SD card,
and it will not be deleted unless after printed.
However, they will be deleted automatically
when the amount of time specified with this
item has elapsed.
As with secured print data, encrypted
secured print data will be deleted
automatically when the amount of time
specified with this item has elapsed.
Even before the amount of time
specified with this item elapses,
secured print data will be deleted
automatically once the printer is turned
off or a hard or soft reset is performed.
[Secure Job Log]*1*2 [Off], [On]
If the printer is turned off during printing, the
print log of the job being printed may not be
saved or the total number of printed pages
(page counter) may not be counted.
If [On] is specified for this item, the print log of
the job being printed is saved, and the total
number of printed pages (page counter) is
counted even when you turn the printer OFF.
If [On] is specified for this item, printing
speed drops.
[Select PDL
(PnP)]*1
[UFR II], [UFR II XPS], [PCL5e], [PCL6],
[PS3], [XPS (Direct)]
If you want to connect the printer
and computer with a USB cable
The printer driver for this printer may be
installed automatically when the USB cable
is connected.
You can select the type of the printer driver
("UFR II", "UFR II XPS", "PCL5e", "PCL6",
"PS3", or "XPS (Direct)") to be installed in
this item at the time.
If you want to connect the printer
and computer with a LAN cable
If you are using Windows Vista, you can
detect the printer automatically using the
WSD (Web Service on Devices) protocol.
You can select the type of the printer driver
("UFR II", "UFR II XPS", "PCL5e", "PCL6",
"PS3", or "XPS (Direct)") to be installed on
the automatically detected printer in this
item.
[Mng. Settings]
[Settings Key Lock] [Off], [On]
When you set to [On], [ ] (
:Settings) is locked and you cannot
operate the Setup menu.
When you set to [Off], [Settings Key Lock]
is not locked.
You can unlock the locked Settings key
only from the Remote UI.
[Adjust Screen]
㻡㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Contrast] -3 Dark to 0 to +3 Light If the display is not clear, adjust the contrast or
brightness to the desired level.
[Backlight
Brightness] [Off], [Level 1], [Level 2], [Level 3]
[Animated
Instruction] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should display an
animated picture in the display when a paper
jam occurs or when a toner cartridge is
replaced.
[Show Toner
Gauge] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should display
the icon that indicates the toner remaining.
[Set. Comp. Notify] [Off], [1 second], [2 seconds], [3 seconds]
Specifies the display time of messages that are
displayed when the setting completes. If [Off]
is specified, no setting completion message is
displayed.
[Scrolling Speed] [Slow], [Normal], [Fast] Set the scrolling speed for the message
display on the control panel.
㻡㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AA
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
About the icons
:
The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item.
:
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating systems which do not use the printer
driver, the settings are enabled for this item.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Paper Source] [Auto], [Drawer 1], [Drawer 2]*, [Drawer 3]*,
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
Select the default paper source that is
used when printing.
After a paper source is selected, the
corresponding Paper Source indicator
comes on.
[MP Tray Paper
Size]
[A6], [ A5], [ A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL],
[EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [ Custom Size], [
Custom Size R], [Env. ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch],
[Env. No.10], [Env. DL], [Index Card], [STMT],
[FLSC], [16K]
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in
the multi-purpose tray.
"Registering the Paper Size"
[MP Tray Priority] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should
detect the paper source in order starting
with the multi-purpose tray when [Paper
Source] is set to [Auto].
[Drawer 1
Size]/[Drawer 2
Size]*/[Drawer 3
Size]*
[A6], [ A5], [ A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL],
[EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [ Custom Size], [
Custom Size R], [STMT], [FLSC], [16K]
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in
the paper drawer.
"Registering the Paper Size"
[Standard Paper
Size] [A6], [A5], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL], [EXEC], [Env.
ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch], [Env. No.10], [Env. DL],
[Index Card], [STMT], [FLSC], [16K]
If you cannot specify the paper size or if
you print from DOS, UNIX, or other
operating system, specify the paper size
in this item.
"Loading Paper in the Paper
Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose
Tray"
[Diff. Paper Tray] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether to use the multi-
purpose tray when the paper settings for
the selected paper source are not the
same as the paper settings in the
received data.
[Auto Selection]
[Multi-Purpose Tray]: [Off], [On]
[Drawer 1]: [Off], [On]
[Drawer 2]*: [Off], [On]
[Drawer 3]*: [Off], [On]
Specifies the paper source to be
automatically selected when [Paper
Source] is set to [Auto].
If [On] is specified, the printer selects the
paper source as the one to be
automatically selected.
[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)
㻡㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Default Paper
Type] [Plain], [Plain L], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2],
[Transparency], [Envelope], [Labels]
If you cannot specify the paper type or if
you print from DOS, UNIX, or other
operating system, specify the paper type
in this item.
"Usable Paper"
[2-Sided Printing] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should print
on one side or both sides of the paper.
㻡㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AC
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
This item is displayed only when all the following conditions are met.
[Network] in [Interface Selection] is set to [On].
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the settings
effective.
The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[TCP/IP Settings] Specifies the TCP/IP setting for the print server equipped with this
printer.
[IPv4 Settings]
[IPv4]: [Off], [On] When using IPv4, set it to [On].
[IP Mode]: [Auto],
[Manual]
Select the method for setting the IP address.
When setting the IP address using any one of DHCP, BOOTP,
or RARP, select [Auto].
When specifying the IP address to the printer directly, select
[Manual].
[Protocol]*:
[Use DHCP]:
[Off], [On]
[Use BOOTP]:
[Off], [On]
[Use RARP]:
[Off], [On]
If you set [IP Mode] to [Auto], select which protocol you want to use.
Set each of [Use DHCP], [Use BOOTP], and [Use RARP] to [On]
(use) or [Off] (do not use).
[IP Address Settings]:
[IP Address]:
0.0.0.0
[Subnet Mask]:
0.0.0.0
[Gateway
Address]: 0.0.0.0
Specify [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Gateway Address].
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for entering
addresses" below the table.
[DNS]:
[Primary
Address]: 0.0.0.0
[Secondary
Address]: 0.0.0.0
Specify [Primary Address] and [Secondary Address] for DNS.
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for
entering addresses" below the table.
Specify the settings for [Host Name], [Domain Name], and [DNS
Dynamic Update] from the Remote UI.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[DHCP Option]:
[Acquire Host
Name]: [Off],
[On]
[DNS Dynamic
Update]: [Off],
[On]
Set DHCP options when [IP Mode] is set to [Manual] and [Use
DHCP] is set to [On].
When obtaining the host name using DHCP, set [Acquire Host
Name] to [On].
When updating the host name using DHCP, set [DNS Dynamic
Update] to [On].
[IPv6 Settings] [IPv6]: [Off], [On]
If you want to use IP v. 6, specify [On].
*Specify the setting for IP v. 6 from the Remote UI.
"Setting IP v. 6"
[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)
㻡㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[WINS Resolution] [Off], [On]
If you want to use WINS Resolution, specify [On].
*Specify the following settings from the Remote UI.
[WINS Server Address]
[Scope ID]
[SMB Server Name]
[SMB Workgroup Name]
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[ARP/PING] [Off], [On] When it is set to [On], you can change the IP address settings from
the client using ARP/PING commands.
[FTP]
[FTP Print]: [Off],
[On]
[FTP Settings]: [Off],
[On]
When it is set to [On], you can access the printer's FTP server
using the FTP client and print the files.
If you want to perform the settings using FTP Client, set [FTP
Settings] to [On].
*Specify the settings for [FTP Print User Name] and [Password]
from the Remote UI.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[LPD Print] [Off], [On]
If you want to use LPD Print, specify [On].
*Specify the setting for [Print LPD Banner Page] from the
Remote UI.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[RAW Print] [Off], [On]
If you want to use RAW Print, specify [On].
*Specify the setting for [Use Bidirectional Communication] from
the Remote UI.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[IPP Print] [Off], [On]
If you want to use IPP Print, specify [On].
*Specify the settings for [IPP Authentication], [User Name], and
[Password] from the Remote UI.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[WSD]
[WSD Print]: [Off],
[On]
[WSD Browsing]*:
[Off], [On]
[Multicast Discovery]:
[Off], [On]
If you want to use WSD Print, set [WSD Print] to [On], and then
specify the following settings.
If you want to obtain printer information using WSD, set [WSD
Browsing] to [On]. If you set [WSD Print] to [On], [WSD
Browsing] is not displayed. ([WSD Browsing] is fixed at [On].)
If you want to set the printer to respond to requests from
multicast discovery, set [Multicast Discovery] to [On].
[HTTP] [Off], [On]
When it is set to [On], you will be able to access the printer
using HTTP.
When this is set to [Off], the message appears, disallowing you
to use the Remote UI or perform IPP printing.
[Proxy]: [Off], [On] If you want to use the proxy function, specify [On].
[Server Address]*: - Enter the proxy server address to be used for the proxy function.
[Port Number]*: 1 to
80 to 65535
Enter the port number of the proxy server to be used for the proxy
function. You can specify between [1] and [65535].
[Same Domain]*: [Use
Proxy], [Do Not Use
Proxy]
If you want to use the proxy function also for the same domain,
specify [Use Proxy].
㻡㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Proxy Settings]
[Proxy
Authentication]*:
[Off], [On]
If you want to use the proxy authentication function, specify [On].
[User Name]*: - Enter the user name to be used for the proxy authentication. Up to
24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[Password]*: - Enter the password to be used for the proxy authentication. Up to 24
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[SNTP] [Off], [On]
When obtaining time using the SNTP Client function, specify [On].
*Specify the settings for [NTP Server Name] and [Polling
Interval] from the Remote UI.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[Discovery
Response] [Off], [On]
If you want to set the printer so that it responds to searches that used
the multicast discovery function, specify [On].
*Specify the setting for [Scope Name] from the Remote UI.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[IPSec] [Off], [On] When using the IPSec function, set it to [On].
"Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function "
[NetWare Settings]
[NetWare]: [Off], [On]
[Frame Type]*:[Auto
Detect], [Ethernet
II], [Ethernet 802.2],
[Ethernet 802.3],
[Ethernet SNAP]
[Print Service]*:
[Bindery PServer],
[RPrinter], [NDS
PServer], [NPrinter]
Configures the NetWare network settings.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[AppleTalk] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should use AppleTalk.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
[SMB]*
[SMB Server]: [Off],
[On]
[SMB Print]*:[Off],
[On]
Specifies whether the printer should use
SMB.
"Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) "
[SNMP Settings]
Specify the settings related to SNMP protocol.
"Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings
Using the SNMP Protocol"
[SNMP v. 1 Settings] Specify the settings related to SNMP v. 1 protocol.
[SNMP v. 1] [Off], [On] Specify whether to use the SNMP v. 1 protocol.
[Dctd.
Community Set.]
[Dctd. Community]:
[Off], [Read/Write],
[Read Only]
[Dctd. Community] specifies whether to permit accessing to the
Management Information Base (MIB) that SNMP manages using the
name of dedicated community for Canon equipment.
To use Canon utility software, it may be necessary to select
[Read/Write].
[SNMP v. 3
Settings]
[SNMP v. 3]: [Off],
[On]
[User Settings 1] to
[User Settings 5]*:
[Auth. Password]
Specify the settings related to SNMP v. 3 protocol.
㻡㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Encryption
Password]
[Rjct Packet in
Sleep] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether to discard the SNMP packets received while in
sleep mode.
If you set this item to [On], you may be unable to access the
printer from Canon software (iW Series) or applications using
the SNMP protocol.
[Spooler]*[Off], [On] When using the spooling function, set it to [On].
"Setting the Spooling Function "
[Network Delay
Time] 0 to 300 seconds
Specifies the time interval from when the printer is turned ON to
when the protocol starts.
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
[Remote UI
Settings]
[Remote UI]: [Off],
[On]
[SSL]*:[Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should use the Remote UI.
Also, whether to use SSL for communication by the Remote UI is
specified.
"Selecting Keys and Certificates"
[Ethernet Driver]
[Auto Detect]: [Off],
[On]
[Communication
Mode]*:[Half
Duplex], [Full
Duplex]
[Ethernet Type]*:[10
Base-T], [100 Base-
TX], [1000 Base-T]
Configures the Ethernet driver.
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
[IEEE802.1X] [Off], [On] When using the IEEE802.1X function, set it to [On].
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
[Address Filter] [Off], [On]
When using the address filter function, set it to [On].
"Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer
Settings"
"Restricting the Users Who Can Access"
[MAC Address] (Display only) Displays the MAC address of the printer.
[E-Mail Print Set.]
[POP3 RX Interval]: 0
to 90 (minutes)
[POP3 RX]: [Off],
[On]
[SMTP RX]: [Off],
[On]
Set e-mail print.
When [POP3 RX Interval] is changed from 0 minute, POP3
reception immediately after the setting has been changed is
performed at a specified interval plus approximately five
seconds. From the second time onwards, POP3 reception is
performed at a specified interval.
"Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail
Print)"
[Init. Network Set.]
By the initialization in this item, you can reset the network settings to
the default settings.
"Initializing the Network Settings"
Method for entering addresses
1. Move the cursor to each field (an area separated by periods to enter three-digit numbers) in which you want to enter
the address, by pressing [ ] or [ ]. (The number in the field blinks, allowing you to enter a value.)
2. Enter the numbers. ([ ] increases the value and [ ] decreases the value.)
3. After entering values in all the fields, press [OK] to confirm the settings.
㻡㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AE
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
About the icon
: The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item.
Setting Item Setting
Value Setting
[Copies] 1 to 9999 Specifies the number of copies to be printed.
The printer prints the specified number of copies.
[Offset Y]/[Offset X]
-50.0 to
0.0 to
+50.0
(mm)
Adjusts the printing position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction
(X) by the specified value.
"Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs"
[Binding Location] [Long
Edge],
[Short
Edge]
Specifies which edge of the paper, the long edge or short edge, is to be bound.
When performing 2-sided printing, the printer adjusts the binding location
automatically according to the paper surface.
If [Long Edge] is specified, the binding location is created on the long edge
of the paper.
If [Short Edge] is specified, the binding location is created on the short edge
of the paper.
[Gutter] -50.0 to
0.0 to
+50.0
(mm)
Specifies the gutter width for printing with the binding location created. A gutter is
created with the image shifted by the specified value.
You can shift the image in the "+" direction with a positive value and in the "-"
direction with a negative value.
[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)
㻡㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Alternative Method] [Off],
[On]
If this item is set to [On] and if the last page for the 2-sided printing is 1-sided
printing, 1-sided printing is applied to the last page. (Printing can be performed
faster than normal 2-sided printing.)
However, when performing 2-sided printing on punched paper or previously
printed paper, the orientation or printing surface of the last page may differ from
other pages. In this case, specify [Off].
If [On] is specified, 1-sided printing is also performed in the following
cases.
The page on the back side of the sheet (even-numbered page) is
blank.
The page on the back side of the sheet (even-numbered page)
cannot be printed (for example due to page size not permitting 2-
sided printing).
㻡㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AF
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
About the icons
: The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Resolution] [600 dpi], [1200
dpi]
Specify the print resolution for processing print data.
[600 dpi] is suited for printing ordinary documents and
spreadsheets at fast speeds.
[1200 dpi] provides a high level of resolution to reproduce fine
details such as text and layout or drawing borders faithfully and
clearly.
It is especially suited for printing data containing small font sizes
and thin lines.
[Image Refinement]*[Off], [On]
Set whether to use the smoothing process to print the jagged edges of
text and graphics.
When this setting is set to [On], the smoothing process is
performed.
When this setting is set to [Off], no smoothing process is
performed.
The effect of the smoothing process varies depending on the
gradation patterns of text, graphics, and images (such as
drawings, tables, and graphs).
When [Resolution] is set to [1200 dpi], this setting is not
displayed.
[Toner Save] [Off], [On] [Toner Save] is used for test printing. When you use [Toner Save], you
can save toner when you print.
[Density]*-8 Light to 0 to +8
Dark
Adjust the print density when printing. The larger the setting value, the
greater the print density.
When [Toner Save] is set to [On], this setting is unselectable.
[Density (Fine Adj)]*
[High]: -8 Light to
0 to +8 Dark
[Mid]: -8 Light to 0
to +8 Dark
[Low]: -8 Light to 0
to +8 Dark
Fine-tune the toner density for printing.
When [Toner Save] is set to [On], this setting is unselectable.
[Text]:
[Resolution],
[Gradation], [Color
Tone], [High
Resolution]
[Graphics]:
Specify the halftone display method when printing.
[Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the edges of
text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data
containing text and fine lines.
[Gradation] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth
gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or
[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)
㻡㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Halftones] [Resolution],
[Gradation], [Color
Tone], [High
Resolution]
[Image]:
[Resolution],
[Gradation], [Color
Tone], [High
Resolution]
graphs that use gradation.
[Color Tone] allows you to print with a sharp gradation and well-
balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best suited
for printing photo images.
[High Resolution] allows you to print at a higher resolution than
[Resolution] or [Gradation], but texture stability is slightly inferior. It
is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines and data
such as CAD data that is printed with sharp edges.
[Reduce Quality]
[Continue
Printing], [Stop
Printing]
Specifies whether the printer should continue printing with the image
quality of the data being lowered automatically or stop printing displaying
the following error message when the memory required for the process
runs out.
If [Continue Printing] is specified, the printer prints with the image
quality level being lowered automatically without displaying a
message.
If [Stop Printing] is specified, the printer stops printing, displaying a
message. In this case, the printer resumes printing with the image
quality of the data being lowered by pressing [ ] ( : Online).
㻡㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AH
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
After changing the setting items with "*1", cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the
settings effective.
The setting items or setting values with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Interface
Selection]*1
[USB]:
[Off],
[On]
[Network]:
[Off],
[On]
[USB
Storage
Device]:
[MEAP
Driver]:
[Off],
[On]
Specifies the settings for the interfaces used for communication with the
computer and so on.
You can specify [On] or [Off] for each interface.
[Timeout]
[Timeout]:
[Off],
[On]
[Timeout
Time]*2: 5
to 15 to
300
seconds
Specifies the function to finish a job automatically.
[Connection
Recog.]*1 [Off], [On]
When you print using the standard network, you may not obtain proper
printout results. (Unreadable characters are printed, overlay printing fails,
etc.) In this case, specify [Off] for this item.
[Extended RX
Buffer]*1 [Off], [On]
If this item is set to [On], the memory capacity of the printer's receive buffer
that receives the data is increased. You can speed up the time the
computer exits when you send a large amount of data or complicated data
from the computer.
[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)
㻡㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AJ
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Adj. Start Position]
[Offset Y
(MP
Tray)]: -
5.0 to 0.0
to +5.0
(mm)
[Offset X
(MP
Tray)]: -
5.0 to 0.0
to +5.0
(mm)
[Offset Y
(Drawer
1)]: -5.0 to
0.0 to
+5.0 (mm)
[Offset X
(Drawer
1)]: -5.0 to
0.0 to
+5.0 (mm)
[Offset Y
(Drawer
2)]*: -5.0
to 0.0 to
+5.0 (mm)
[Offset X
(Drawer
2)]*: -5.0
to 0.0 to
+5.0 (mm)
[Offset Y
(Drawer
3)]*: -0.20
to 0.00 to
+0.20 (in.)
[Offset X
(Drawer
3)]*: -0.20
to 0.00 to
+0.20 (in.)
[Offset Y
(2-Sided)]:
-5.0 to
0.0 to
+5.0 (mm)
[Offset X
Specifies the printing position of the paper in the specified paper source.
Adjusts the position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction
(X) by the specified value.
The setting values are indicated in millimeters (mm), and you can adjust the
position using [ ] and [ ].
If you do not adjust the printing position, specify [0.0] for this item.
Adjust the printing position for 2-sided printing as follows.
Adjust the printing position of the first page using [Offset Y (2-Sided)]
and [Offset X (2-Sided)].
The printing position of the second page depends on the settings for
each paper source.
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after
adjusting the printing position, the part will be missing in the print
result.
"Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source"
[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)
㻡㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2-Sided)]:
-5.0 to
0.0 to
+5.0 (mm)
[Recovery Printing] [Off], [On] Specifies whether to print the partially printed page when the printer stops
printing due to a paper jam or an error occurring.
[Check Paper Size] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should stop printing, displaying the message
<Check paper size.> or continue printing when [MP Tray Paper Size],
[Drawer 1 Size], [Drawer 2 Size], [Drawer 3 Size] is set to [Mixed Sizes].
[Substitute Size] [Off], [On]
When the paper of the target size is not loaded in the printer, the printer
prints on paper of the following sizes.
Size of the Paper to Be Printed Printer Driver Setting
Letter ĺA4
A4 ĺLetter
[Special Print Mode
A]
[Off], [Mode
1], [Mode 2],
[Mode 3],
[Mode 4]
Depending on the paper type or the operating environment, vertical streaks
may appear on the printed paper. In this case, change the setting for this
option. Improving effectiveness for vertical streaks increases in the following
order.
[Off] (Effectiveness: low)
Ļ
[Mode 1]
Ļ
[Mode 2]
Ļ
[Mode 3]
Ļ
[Mode 4] (Effectiveness: high)
Even if you do not change the setting due to change in paper type or
operating environment, this may also avoid vertical streaks appearing on the
printed paper. As improving effectiveness increases, print density decreases.
This may also make outlines appear to be blurred or slightly jagged.
[SD Card Maintenance]*
[Format] -Delete the contents of the SD card.
[Special Print Mode]
[Curl Correction]
[Multi-Purpose
Tray]: [Off],
[On]
[Drawer 1]:
[Off], [On]
[Drawer 2]*:
[Off], [On]
[Drawer 3]*:
[Off], [On]
When printed paper curls, set this item to [On].
When setting this item to [On], make sure to set the output slot to
the output tray.
[Plain L Speed
Prior.] [Off], [On] Specifies whether to reduce the waiting time until start of printing when the
paper type is set to [Plain L].
[Special Print Adj.
C] [Off], [On]
Depending on the paper type or the operating environment, vertical streaks
may appear on the printed paper. In this case, selecting [On] may solve the
problem.
If the printer produces sound during printing, selecting [On] may also reduce
the noise.
㻡㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
* Due to changes in the paper type or operating environment,
selecting [Off] may also prevent vertical streaks from appearing on
the printed paper.
* Selecting [On] decreases the printing speed.
[Special Print Adj.
D] [Off], [On] Depending on the paper type or the operating environment, residual images
appear in unprinted areas. If this happens, set this item to [On].
[Update Firmware]
[USB] -This option is to be executed only when the firmware of the printer needs to
be updated.
[Network] -
[Paper Feed
Method]
[Multi-
Purpose
Tray]:
[Speed
Priority],
[Print Side
Priority]
[Drawer 1]
:[Speed
Priority],
[Print Side
Priority]
[Drawer
2]*:
[Speed
Priority],
[Print Side
Priority]
[Drawer
3]*:
[Speed
Priority],
[Print Side
Priority]
Specifies on which side of the loaded paper the printer should print.
Perform printing after selecting the paper drawer or tray to feed paper.
Select the paper source.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
The setting of this item determines which side of paper is printed on. Load
the paper in proper orientation.
"Paper Loading Orientation"
If [Speed Priority] is specified, the printing sides of the paper for 1-
sided printing and 2-sided printing do not match.
If you specify [Print Side Priority], the printer matches the printing sides
of the paper for 1-sided printing and 2-sided printing. Therefore, when
you print previously printed paper, you do not need to reload the paper
each time you switch between the settings.
If you specify [Print Side Priority], the print speed drops.
[Show Job List] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether to display the job list when [ ] ( : Job
Status/Cancel) is pressed.
If [On] is specified, the printer displays the job list.
If [Off] is specified, the printer does not display the job list.
[IMPORT/EXPORT] [EXPORT],
[IMPORT]
You can save and read printer settings.
"Importing and Exporting Settings"
㻡㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AK
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Auto Mode
Selection]
[Auto
Selection],
[PCL], [PS],
[PDF], [XPS]
Specifies the mode in which this printer operates when you print without
using the printer driver for this printer.
If the print mode is not appropriate, such a printing problem as unreadable
characters being printed may occur. Specify this item according to the job
to be printed.
[Auto Select]
[PCL]: [Off],
[On]
[PS]: [Off],
[On]
[PDF]: [Off],
[On]
[XPS]: [Off],
[On]
Specifies the print mode to be automatically switched if [Auto Mode
Selection] is set to [Auto Selection].
If [On] is specified, the mode is to be automatically switched to.
When this item is set so that no mode is switched automatically
and [Auto Mode Selection] is set to [Auto Selection], the printer
operates in the mode set with [Mode Priority].
[Mode Priority]
[None], [PCL],
[PS], [PDF],
[XPS]
You can specify [Mode Priority] to be switched to by priority for when
[Auto Mode Selection] is set to [Auto Selection] and this printer cannot
identify the control command of the data.
If you specify [None], the printer does not specify the mode priority. If this
printer cannot identify the control command of the data, it determines the
mode automatically.
[Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options)
㻡㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AL
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
Setting Item Setting
Value Setting
[Paper Save] [Off],
[On]
Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to no
data existing in the page data sent from an application.
[Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options)
㻡㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AR
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Paper Save] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page
that can be created due to no data existing between
two Form Feed codes sent from an application.
[Orientation] [Portrait], [Landscape] Enables you to set the paper orientation.
[Font Number] 0 to 104
Enables you to set the default font for this printer
function using the corresponding font numbers. Valid
font numbers are from 0 to 104.
[Point Size]*4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 point
If the number selected in [Font Number] is that of a
proportionally spaced scalable font, this option
appears in the [PCL] options. It enables you to specify
a point size for the default font. The point size can be
adjusted in increments of 0.25 pts.
[Pitch]*0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 cpi
If the number selected in [Font Number] is that of a
fixed pitch scalable font, Pitch appears in the [PCL]
options. It enables you to specify the pitch for the
default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments
of 0.01 cpi (characters per inch).
[Form Lines] 5 to 64 to 128 lines
Enables you to specify the number of lines to be
printed on a page. You can specify from 5 to 128
lines.
[Character Code]
[PC8], [ROMAN8], [ROMAN9],
[ISOL1], [ISOL2], [ISOL5], [ISOL6],
[ISOL9], [PC775], [PC8DN], [PC850],
[PC852], [PC858], [PC8TK],
[PC1004], [WINL1], [WINL2],
[WINL5], [WINBALT], [DESKTOP],
[PSTEXT], [LEGAL], [ISO4], [ISO6],
[ISO11], [ISO15], [ISO17], [ISO21],
[ISO60], [ISO69], [WIN 30],
[MCTEXT], [PC864], [ARABIC8],
[WINARB], [PC866], [ISOCYR],
[WINCYR], [PC851], [GREEK8],
[ISOGRK], [PC8GRK], [WINGRK],
[PC862], [HEBREW7], [HEBREW8],
[ISOHEB]
Enables you to select the symbol set most suited to
the needs of the host computer.
[Custom Size] [Do Not Set], [Set] Enables you to specify a custom paper size. If [Set] is
selected, you can enter a custom size.
[Unit of
Measurement]*[Millimeters], [Inches] Enables you to specify the unit of measurement you
would like to use to specify your custom paper size.
[X Dimension]*76.2 to 215.9 mm (3.00 to 8.50
in.)
Enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom
paper. The X dimension can be adjusted between
76.2 mm and 215.9 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.
*127.0 to 355.6 mm (5.00 to 14.00 Enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom
[Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options)
㻡㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Y Dimension] in.)paper. The Y dimension can be adjusted between
127.0 mm and 355.6 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Append CR to LF] [Yes], [No]
Enables you to specify whether to append a carriage
return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.
[Enlarge A4 Prt
Width] [Off], [On] Determines whether to expand the printable area of
A4 paper to that of Letter size in width.
[BarDIMM]*[Enable], [Disable] You can enable or disable the Bar Code Printing
function of the printer.
[FreeScape]*[Off], [~], ["], [#], [$], [/], [\], [?], [{],
[}], [|]
You can specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to
be used for bar code commands when the host
computer does not support the standard Escape
Code.
㻡㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AS
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
After changing the setting items with "*1", cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the
settings effective.
The setting items or setting values with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Image Orientation]
[Auto],
[Vertical],
[Horizontal]
Specifies whether the printer should print an image in portrait (vertical)
orientation or in landscape (horizontal) orientation.
[Zoom] [Off], [Auto] Specifies whether the printer should print with scaling outputs according to
the printable area.
[Print Position] [Auto], [Center],
[Top Left] Specifies the printing position for an image.
[Print Guarantee]*1*2 [Off], [On]
Set the processing method for received TIFF data.
When it is set to [Off], the processing time is shortened by processing
received TIFF data sequentially.
When it is set to [On], it is possible to prevent errors from occurring,
since all the TIFF data is received before processing begins.
However, the printing speed will drop.
After specifying, perform a hard reset or restart the printer to
enable the settings.
[Show Warnings] [Off], [Print],
[Panel]
Specifies the display setting for the error message in case of an error
occurring.
[Print E-Mail Text] [Off], [On] Set e-mail print.
"Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail
Print)"
[Limit E-Mail Print]*2 [Off], [On]
[Enlarge Print Area] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should print a document with its printable
area expanded.
When [On] is specified, part of the print image may be missing
near the margins of the paper.
[Halftones]
[Resolution],
[Gradation],
[High Resolution]
Specify the halftone display method when printing.
When it is set to [Resolution], you can perform printing that combines
smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics
or graphs that use gradation.
When it is set to [Gradation], you can print with a sharp gradation
and well-balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best
suited for printing photo images.
When it is set to [High Resolution], you can print in fine detail so that
the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing
data containing text and fine lines.
[Grayscale [sRGB],
[NTSC],
Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing.
When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value using the
sRGB standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value using the
[Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options)
㻡㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Conversion] [Uniform RGB] NTSC standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value of the
Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value.
㻡㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AU
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Halftones]
[Text]: [Resolution],
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
[Graphics]:
[Resolution],[Gradation],
[High Resolution]
[Image]: [Resolution] ,
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
You can select the halftone display method from
[Resolution], [Gradation] and [High Resolution].
[Resolution] allows you to perform printing that combines
smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing
graphics or graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation] allows you to print with a sharp gradation and
well-balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is
best suited for printing photo images.
[High Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that
the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for
printing data containing text and fine lines.
[Grayscale
Conversion]
[Text]: [sRGB], [NTSC],
[Uniform RGB]
[Graphics]: [sRGB],
[NTSC], [Uniform RGB]
[Image]: [sRGB], [NTSC],
[Uniform RGB]
Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for
printing.
When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value
using the sRGB standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value
using the NTSC standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value
of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale
value.
[Compressed Img
Mode]*
[Image Priority],
[Output Priority]
Choose how the printer behaves in case the printer is running
low on memory when printing an XPS file.
When [Image Priority] is selected, printing is performed with
the image quality given a higher priority. If the printer is
running low on memory, printing is cancelled.
When [Output Priority] is selected, this may degrade the
image quality, but printing can still be performed.
When [SD Card] is set to [On], the printer always runs in
[Output Priority] mode.
[Compressed Img
Outpt] [Output], [Display Error]
If output is given a higher priority, this may gradually degrade
the image quality over time, depending on the type of print data.
If this happens, continue printing by lowering the image quality or
display an error message to decide whether to cancel printing.
When [Output] is selected, printing continues.
When [Display Error] is selected, an error message
appears, and printing is cancelled.
This setting is effective when [Compressed Img Mode] is
set to [Output Priority], or when [SD Card] is set to [On].
[Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options)
㻡㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AW
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Fit to Page] [Off], [On]
Set it to enlarge or reduce to fit the effective print area of the
specified paper.
This setting fixes the aspect ratio and scales the page size
of the PDF file.
[Enlarged Print
Area] [Off], [On]
Set whether to expand the effective print area to the edges of the
paper without leaving margins around the edges of the paper.
When it is set to [On], images on the edges of the paper
may be partially cut off.
[N on 1]
[Off], [2 on 1], [4 on
1], [6 on 1], [8 on 1], [9
on 1], [16 on 1]
You can print multiple pages of the PDF file data arranged on one
page. When multiple pages are printed, they are arranged from the
top left.
[Comment Print] [Off], [Auto] Specify whether to print the comments inside the PDF file that are
specified for printing.
[Halftones]
[Text]: [Resolution],
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
[Graphics]:
[Resolution],
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
[Image]:
[Resolution],
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
You can select the halftone display method from
[Resolution], [Gradation] and [High Resolution].
[Resolution] allows you to perform printing that combines
smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing
graphics or graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation] allows you to print with a sharp gradation and well-
balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best
suited for printing photo images.
[High Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the
edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing
data containing text and fine lines.
[Grayscale
Conversion]
[sRGB], [NTSC],
[Uniform RGB]
Select the method for converting color print data to
grayscale for printing.
When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value
using the sRGB standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value
using the NTSC standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value of
the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value.
[Dot Gain
Adjustment]
[-10%], [-5%],
[Standard],
[+5%], [+10%]
You can adjust dotted areas to change darkness and lightness of
painted areas. A higher number specifies a darker printed area.
[Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options)
㻡㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AX
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Job Timeout] 0 to 3600 seconds
If the time specified in this item has elapsed since a job process was
started, the printer automatically finishes the job and receives the next
job.
If you do not want to specify the timeout, specify "0 seconds."
[Print PS Errors] [Off], [On] Specifies whether an error page should be printed when a PostScript
error is occurring.
[Halftones]
[Text]:
[Resolution],
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
[Graphics]:
[Resolution],
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
[Image]:
[Resolution],
[Gradation], [High
Resolution]
You can select the halftone display method from
[Resolution], [Gradation] and [High Resolution].
[Resolution] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth
gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or
graphs that use gradation.
[Gradation] allows you to print with a sharp gradation and well-
balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best suited
for printing photo images.
[High Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the
edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing
data containing text and fine lines.
[Grayscale
Conversion]
[sRGB], [NTSC],
[Uniform RGB]
Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for
printing.
When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value using
the sRGB standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value using
the NTSC standard color conversion method.
When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value of the
Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value.
[Dot Gain
Adjustment]
[-10%], [-5%],
[Standard],
[+5%], [+10%]
You can adjust dotted areas to change darkness and lightness of
painted areas. A higher number specifies a darker printed area.
[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)
㻡㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0AY
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
Setting Item Setting
Value Setting
[Select Def. Screen]
[Print
Screen],
[MEAP]
Set the initial screen of the control panel that is displayed after the printer
starts up.
When it is set to [Print Screen], the printer's print standby screen is
displayed.
When it is set to [MEAP], the MEAP menu screen is displayed.
After the printer starts, you can toggle the menu screens by pressing
[ ] ( : Application) on the control panel.
[Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options)
㻡㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C1
NOTE
About samples
For Configuration Page, Network Status Print, and Printing Position Adjustment Print, see the following.
"The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode"
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Check Counter] [113: Total (Black/S)]
Check the number of pages printed.
[113: Total (Black/S)]: Number of single-sided pages printed in
black and white
"Checking the Number of the Printed Pages"
[Configuration Page] -
Prints the capacity of the built-in memory (RAM) or the contents
specified in the common [Setup] menu. You can select this item
regardless of the setting for the print mode.
[Network Status
Print] -Prints the version number and the settings of the print server
equipped with this printer.
[IPSec Policy List] - Print the IPSec policy that is registered in the printer.
[PCL Utility] [Font List] A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode is printed.
[PS Utility] [Configuration Page],
[Font List]
[Configuration Page]
Prints the content specified in the [PS] options.
[Font List]
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PS mode is printed.
[Cleaning] [A4], [LTR] The printer cleans the fixing roller by printing a cleaning paper.
"Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer"
[E-Mail Print Utility] [Received E-Mails],
[Received E-mail List]
Manage e-mail printing.
"Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail
Print)"
[Printing Pos. Print] -
The printing position adjusted in [Adj. Start Position] is printed. Check
the printout results to confirm the setting for [Adj. Start Position].
"Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source"
[Page Count List] - If department ID management is set, print an aggregate report of the
number of pages printed by each department.
[Counter Report] -
Prints an aggregate report of the number of pages printed for each
counter.
"Specifying an ID for Each Department "
[Print MEAP Sys.
Info] -Prints information about applications installed on MEAP and parts of
the system applications.
[Serial Number] (Display only) Displays the serial number of the printer.
[Consumables]
[Paper Information],
[Toner Cart. Model],
[Remaining Toner]
[Paper Information]
Displays information about the loaded paper such as size, type,
and remaining amount for each paper source.
[Toner Cart. Model]
Displays the model numbers of the toner cartridges.
[Remaining Toner]
Displays the amount of toner remaining in the cartridge. You
can use this item to estimate when the toner cartridge will need
to be replaced.
[Utility Menu] Menu
㻡㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C2
NOTE
Table description
The items and setting values marked with "*1" may or may not be displayed depending on the availability of the
optional accessories or the content of the setting.
The items and setting values marked with "*2" are only displayed when the check box for [Display Job History] is
selected on the Remote UI.
"Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display"
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Encrypted Print]*1 User Name,
Job Name, [PIN] Print secure jobs stored on the SD card or encrypted secure
jobs.
"Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing
(Secured Print) "
[Secured Print]*1 User Name,
Job Name, [PIN]
[Stored Job List]*1 -Print the list of jobs stored on the SD card.
[Stored Job Print]*1 [Box No.N] (N=0 to 99), [PIN],
Job Name
Prints jobs stored on the SD card.
"Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer
(Stored Job Print) "
[Job Print Log List]*2 -
Prints the job logs printed from the computer.
File names, print dates, and other information are printed on
the job log list.
[Stored Job Print
Log]*1*2 - Print the history of jobs printed from BOX.
[Report Print Log]*2 -
Prints the logs of the printed Configuration Page and
Network Status Print.
Print dates and others are printed in the report print log.
[E-Mail Print Log]*2 - Print the history of jobs received by e-mail and printed.
[Job] Menu
㻡㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C3
Setting Item Setting
Value Setting
[Soft Reset] ([Hard
Reset]) -
Resets the printer when a problem is occurring or you want to cancel printing.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
[Form Feed] -
When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the
data may remain in the printer memory, and the job may not be completed properly.
As long as the printer remains in this state, you cannot print the next job because
the printer cannot receive the next data. In this case, force the printer to output the
print data using the procedure for this item.
"Outputting Data (Forced Output)"
[Shut Down] -
Shuts down the functions of the printer.
If you are using WSD printing, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is
turned OFF.
After executing a shutdown, the printer cannot receive data, and panel operation
becomes invalid.
Cycle the power of the printer if you want to print the data again.
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
[Reset] Menu
㻡㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C4
NOTE
Table description
Bold values in the table indicate the default settings.
The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional
accessories and other settings.
About the icons
:
The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item.
:
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating systems which do not use the printer
driver, the settings are enabled for this item.
Setting Item Setting Value Setting
[Paper Source] [Auto], [Drawer 1], [Drawer 2]*, [Drawer 3]*,
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
Selects the paper drawer or tray from
which the printer feeds paper. After a
paper source is selected, the
corresponding Paper Source indicator
comes on.
[MP Tray Paper
Size]
[A6], [ A5], [ A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL],
[EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [ Custom Size], [
Custom Size R], [Env. ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch],
[Env. No.10], [Env. DL], [Index Card], [STMT],
[FLSC], [16K]
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in
the multi-purpose tray.
"Registering the Paper Size"
[MP Tray Priority] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether the printer should
detect the paper source in order starting
with the multi-purpose tray when [Paper
Source] is set to [Auto].
[Drawer 1
Size]/[Drawer 2
Size]*/[Drawer 3
Size]*
[A6], [ A5], [ A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL],
[EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [ Custom Size], [
Custom Size R], [STMT], [FLSC], [16K]
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in
the paper drawer.
"Registering the Paper Size"
[Standard Paper
Size] [A6], [A5], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL], [EXEC], [Env.
ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch], [Env. No.10], [Env. DL],
[Index Card], [STMT], [16K]
If you cannot specify the paper size or if
you print from DOS, UNIX, or other
operating system, specify the paper size
in this item.
"Loading Paper in the Paper
Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose
Tray"
[Diff. Paper Tray] [Off], [On]
Specifies whether to use the multi-
purpose tray when the paper settings for
the selected paper source are not the
same as the paper settings in the
received data.
[Auto Selection]
[Multi-Purpose Tray]: [Off], [On]
[Drawer 1]: [Off], [On]
[Drawer 2]*: [Off], [On]
[Drawer 3]*: [Off], [On]
Specifies the paper source to be
automatically selected when [Paper
Source] is set to [Auto].
If [On] is specified, the printer selects the
paper source as the one to be
automatically selected.
[Select Feeder] Menu
㻡㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Default Paper
Type] [Plain], [Plain L], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2],
[Transparency], [Envelope], [Labels]
If you cannot specify the paper type or if
you print from DOS, UNIX, or other
operating system, specify the paper type
in this item.
"Usable Paper"
[2-Sided Printing] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should print
on one side or both sides of the paper.
㻡㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C5
If you want to check the number of the printed pages, use either of the following methods.
"Checking the Counter Using the Printer's Control Panel "
"Checking the Counter Using a Web Browser (Remote UI) "
Checking the Counter Using the Printer's Control Panel
You can check the number of the printed pages using the control panel.
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
2
Select [Check Counter] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select the counters to check using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Check the number of the printed pages.
Checking the Counter Using a Web Browser (Remote UI)
You can check the number of the printed pages using the Remote UI.
Checking the Number of the Printed Pages
㻡㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C6
You can save (export) printer settings that are set in the printer's control panel or Remote UI to USB memory devices or
SD cards. In addition, you can read (import) saved printer settings any time.
This section describes the method for importing and exporting settings using the printer's control panel.
Importing and exporting can also be performed using the Remote UI.
"Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page)"
IMPORTANT
USB memory device connecting location
You can use either or both of the top-side and rear-side USB ports. When the both ports have a USB memory device
connected to them, priority is given to the top-side port.
About USB memory support
Only the file format FAT32 is supported.
USB memory drives cannot be read by this printer if:
these drives are partitioned
these drives contain encrypted data
Printers that can be imported
You can import the settings only to the same model from which you export the settings.
NOTE
When saving/reading settings using USB memory devices and SD cards
Connect a USB memory device or an SD card to the printer's USB port or SD card slot. The saving location/writing
source priority is shown below.
"USB memory" > "SD card"
Saving Printer Settings (Export)
Save printer settings to USB memory devices or SD cards.
1
Insert the USB memory device or the SD card into the printer.
2
Press [ ] ( : Online).
The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel.
3
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
4
Select [User Maintenance] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
Importing and Exporting Settings
㻢㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Select [IMPORT/EXPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
6
Select [EXPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
7
When [Yes] is selected using [ ], and [OK] is pressed, the printer's settings are saved to the targeted
saving location.
ĺWhen the saving has finished, <Done.> is displayed.
Reading Printer Settings (Import)
Read printer settings that have been saved to USB memory devices or SD cards.
1
Insert the USB memory device or the SD card into the printer.
2
Press [ ] ( : Online).
㻢㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel.
3
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
4
Select [User Maintenance] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5
Select [IMPORT/EXPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
6
Select [IMPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
7
When [Yes] is selected using [ ], and [OK] is pressed, the printer's settings are read from the
targeted writing source.
ĺWhen the reading has finished, <Done.> is displayed.
8
㻢㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C7
If you want to initialize the [Setup] menu using the control panel
You can restore the printer's common setup menus and dedicated setup menus to their default settings.
"Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel"
If you want to initialize the network settings
You can restore the network settings for the printer to the default settings.
"Initializing the Network Settings"
NOTE
Initializing using NetSpot Device Installer
You can also initialize the network settings using NetSpot Device Installer.
For details on the procedure for initializing the network settings using NetSpot Device Installer, see Help.
Help is displayed by clicking [Help] in the [Help] menu.
Initializing the Settings
㻢㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C8
Initialization of the [Setup] menu resets the settings specified in the common [Setup] menu and exclusive [Setup] menu to
the default settings.
Initialize the settings by selecting [Initialize Menu] in the hierarchy of "Options" in the [Setup] menu. Start the key operation
from Step 1.
IMPORTANT
Setting items which are not initialized
The following setting items are not initialized.
[Network] Options
[Adj. Start Position] ([User Maintenance] Options)
If <Initialize failed.> is displayed
If the message <Initialize failed.> appears when the initialization of the [Setup] menu is executed, the [Setup] menu is
not initialized.
Make sure that the (Job) indicator is off, and then perform [Initialize Menu] again.
Do not turn the printer OFF during the initialization.
The printer memory may be damaged.
About some setting items
Some setting items do not become effective unless you cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset after
initializing the [Setup] menu.
NOTE
Canceling the initialization
If you press [ ] ( : Online) during the operation, the operation is canceled. However, you cannot cancel the
operation when <Initializing...> is displayed even if you press [ ] ( : Online).
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
2
Select [Initialize Menu] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK].
ĺWhile the initialization is being performed, <Initializing...> is displayed.
<Init. complete.> is displayed after the initialization is completed.
Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel
㻢㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻢㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0C9
You can check the printer status, network settings, and so on by printing Configuration Page or Network Status Print.
Configuration Page or Network Status Print is designed to be printed on A4 paper. Be sure to use A4 paper.
You can also check the network settings and so on using the following software.
"Remote UI"
"FTP Client"
"NetSpot Device Installer"
1
Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer.
"Paper Loading and Output"
2
Make sure that the printer is online (the (Online) indicator is on).
If the (Online) indicator is off, press [ ] ( : Online).
3
Press [ ] ( : Utility).
4
Select [Configuration Page] or [Network Status Print] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].
[Configuration Page]
Prints the list of currently available functions for the printer and setting values of the menus, and so on.
[Network Status Print]
Prints the TCP/IP settings including the IP address and information including security settings.
5
Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK] to print Status Print.
Checking the Printer Settings
㻢㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻢㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CA
Only the administrator (user who knows the password) can configure the settings or perform the operations related to the
printer management by setting the administrator password.
Also, the administrator password can be changed anytime.
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI.
In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network.
NOTE
When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI
You can also specify the settings using the following software.
"FTP Client"
You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Select [Security] under [Management Settings] in the [Settings/Registration] menu.
3
Click [Management Settings].
Setting the Administrator Password
㻢㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Edit...] under [Management Settings].
5
Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password].
㻢㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Set a new administrator password.
(1) Select the [Set/Change Password] check box.
(2) Enter the administrator password.
(3) Click [OK].
[Set/Change Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password.
[Password] Enter a new desired password.
[Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the password entered in [Password] again.
㻢㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CC
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI.
In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network.
NOTE
When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI
You can also specify the settings using the following software.
"FTP Client"
You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt.
"NetSpot Device Installer"
You can specify the settings using the Canon software, NetSpot Device Installer, in the supplied CD-ROM.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Select [Security] under [Management Settings] in the [Settings/Registration] menu.
3
Click [Management Settings].
Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information
㻢㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Edit...] under [Management Settings].
5
Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password].
㻢㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Specify the device name or administrator information.
(1) Specify the settings for each option as needed.
(2) Click [OK].
[System Manager] Enter the name of the system manager.
[Contact
Information] Enter the system manager's contact information.
[E-Mail Address] Enter the system manager's email address.
[System Manager Enter the system manager's comments.
㻢㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Comment]
[Device Name] Enter the name of the printer.
[Location] Enter the location of the printer.
㻢㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CE
You can specify the settings for sleep mode using the following procedures.
"Setting the Printer to Sleep Mode"
"Types of Sleep Mode"
"Releasing Sleep Mode"
IMPORTANT
Power consumption when the power is OFF
Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is inserted in the AC power outlet.
To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
Setting the Printer to Sleep Mode
There are the following four methods for setting the printer to Sleep Mode.
Setting the printer to
Sleep Mode
automatically when
it is not operating
Specify the time interval until the printer enters Sleep Mode in [Auto Sleep Time].
You can specify the time interval between [5 minutes] and [60 minutes]. The default is [5
minutes].
We recommend that you use this option in the default setting.
Setting the printer to
Sleep Mode using
the printer's control
panel
Press [ ] (Energy Saver) on the printer's control panel.
Setting the printer to
Sleep Mode from a
network computer
6HOHFW>6OHHS@IURP>6HWWLQJV5HJLVWUDWLRQ@RQWKH5HPRWH8,ĺ>2XWSXW&RQWURO@ĺ>'HYLFH
Control], and then click [Execute].
Setting the printer to
Sleep Mode on the
designated time
every day
Set the [Sleep Mode Timer] under [Timer Settings] to [On], and then set the time when it
automatically goes in the Sleep Mode in [Sleep Mode Time].
If the above operations or settings are performed, and the entering conditions described in "Types of Sleep Mode" are
fulfilled, the printer enters Sleep Mode.
Types of Sleep Mode
There are the following two types of Sleep Mode, and they vary in the entering conditions.
Types of Sleep
Mode
Settings for [Sleep Mode] Which the
Printer Can Enter
Entering Conditions
[Mid (Printer
Sleep)]
[High (Deep
Sleep)]
Sleep Mode 1
(Printer Sleep
mode)
Power saving
Panel operation has not been performed.
No data has been sent from the
computer.
The printer is not starting up.
A shutdown is not being performed.
[Sleep Even if Error] is set to [On].
There is no job on the print queue.
A service call is not occurring.
A paper jam is not occurring.
No cover is open.
The toner cartridge is installed.
Sleep Mode
㻢㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
effect: Small A toner cartridge has not reached the end
of its life.
The printer is not cooling down. (The
cooling fan stops.)
The printer takes up to about 5 minutes
to fully cool down.
It is not accessing USB memory.
Sleep Mode 2
(Deep Sleep mode)
Power saving
effect: Large
The conditions to enter Sleep Mode 1 are
fulfilled.
NOTE
To check which Sleep Mode the printer has entered
You can check Sleep Mode using indicators on the control panel.
Sleep Mode 1
The (Ready) indicator and Main Power indicator come on.
However, the following indicator may come on.
(Message) Indicator
Comes on if the printer enters Sleep Mode when it is offline.
Sleep Mode 2
The Ready indicator goes off and the Main Power indicator comes on.
To configure the printer so that it does not enter Sleep Mode when an error occurs
Set [Sleep Even if Error] to [Off].
When using a utility software related to network
When you are using some type of utility software related to network and you set Sleep Mode to [High (Deep Sleep)],
communications may fail. When using such type of utility software, please release Sleep Mode.
Releasing Sleep Mode
The following are the methods to release Sleep Mode.
Releasing Sleep
Mode using the
printer's control
panel
Press the key on the printer's control panel.
If the printer has entered Sleep Mode 2, you can release the mode when [ ] (Energy Saver)
is pressed.
Releasing Sleep
Mode on the
designated time
every day
Set the [Wake Up Timer] under [Timer Settings] to [On], and set the time when it automatically
cancels the Sleep Mode in [Wake Up Time].
Releasing Sleep
Mode from a
computer
Send data to the printer.
Perform the following in the Remote UI.
Perform the operations in the [Output/Control] menu under [Settings/Registration]
Display and set the [User Maintenance Menu] page in the [Preferences] menu under
[Settings/Registration]
NOTE
Sleep Mode is released also in the following cases.
When an error is occurring
Sleep Mode 1 is released also when an error is occurring. However, Sleep Mode 1 may not be released depending
on the error type.
When connecting a network cable
The printer enters Sleep Mode 1 from Sleep Mode 2.
When the printer is connected to a network or receives the unicast packet
㻢㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Sleep Mode 2 is released.
When devices on a network are searched from application software or utility software
Sleep Mode 2 is released.
㻢㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CF
You can specify the settings for auto shutdown using the following procedure.
This setting is made using the Remote UI.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Control Menu] from the [Preferences] menu.
Auto Shutdown
㻢㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Edit...].
5
Specify the settings for auto shutdown.
(1) Select the [Use Auto Shutdown Timer] check box.
The default setting is that it is enabled.
(2) Specify the time to shut down in [Auto Shutdown Time].
㻢㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
About the setting for the time to execute auto shutdown
When [Auto Shutdown Time] is changed during sleep mode, the specified time to execute auto shutdown becomes
effective in the following cases.
When the printer is recovered from sleep
When the power of the printer is cycled
You can specify [Auto Shutdown Time] for auto shutdown with 1 hour increments between [After 1 hour] and [After 8
hours].
If you specify the setting for this option shorter than the default setting, this may shorten the life of the toner
cartridges (the default setting is "4" hours).
If the printer is not turned OFF immediately
Depending on the process in the printer, it may take up to 10 minutes to turn the printer OFF.
6
Set the auto shutdown weekly function as needed.
(1) Select the [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer] check box.
(2) Specify the day and time when to execute auto shutdown.
All the default settings are that it is disabled.
㻢㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7
Click [OK].
㻢㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CH
If you find the printing noise to be too loud, you can reduce the operation noise by using Silent Mode. Use Silent Mode if
you want to reduce the operating noise of the printer such as when printing at night.
Using Silent Mode decreases the print speed.
"Performing Printing Always with Silent Mode "
This section describes the setting procedure for Silent Mode so that printing is performed always with Silent Mode.
"Performing Printing with Silent Mode during a Designated Time "
This section describes the setting procedure for Silent Mode so that printing is performed with Silent Mode during a
designated time.
Printing Silently
㻢㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CJ
1
Press [ ] ( : Online).
The (Online) indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel.
2
Press [ ] ( : Settings).
3
Select [User Maintenance] using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
4
Select [Special Print Adj. C] using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
5
Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
Performing Printing Always with Silent Mode
㻢㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CK
1
Display the printer driver screen.
"Printing"
2
Display the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.
(1) Display the [Finishing] tab.
(2) Click [Advanced Settings].
3
Specify Silent Mode.
(1) Select [Special Print Adjustment C].
(2) Select [On].
(3) Click [OK] to return to the [Finishing] tab.
4
Click [OK].
Performing Printing with Silent Mode during a Designated Time
㻢㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CL
Checking the Number of [Printed Pages] by Department and Registering/Changing the
Department ID Management Settings
You can manage the number of [Printed Pages]* on a departmental basis by specifying IDs for each department and
entering an ID when printing.
[Settings/Registration] - [Department ID Management] in the Remote UI allows you to check the number of printed pages
and make settings for department ID management.
*[Printed Pages] indicates the number of printed surfaces. If you perform 2-sided printing on a sheet of paper, the
number of the printed surfaces is two.
IMPORTANT
Register more than one Department IDs before enabling Department ID Management, which will have no effect with no
Department ID registered.
(1) [Register New Department...]
(Displayed only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.)
The [Register New Department] page allows you to register department IDs.
Set the following items and then click [OK].
[Department ID] Enter the department ID using a number with up to seven digits.
[Set PIN]
Select this check box when setting the password for [PIN].
If nothing is entered for [PIN] with this check box selected, the state is such that
no password is specified.
[PIN] Enter the password using a number with up to seven digits.
[Confirm] For confirmation, enter the same password that you entered for [PIN].
(2) [Dept. ID]
(Clickable only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.)
Clicking the department ID allows you to use the [Edit Department] page to change the password and clear the
count by department.
Set the following items and then click [OK].
[Department ID] The selected department ID is displayed.
Select this check box when setting/changing the password for [PIN].
Specifying an ID for Each Department
㻢㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Set/Change PIN] If nothing is entered for [PIN] with this check box selected, the state is such that
no password is specified.
[PIN] Enter the password using a number with up to seven digits.
[Confirm] For confirmation, enter the same password that you entered for [PIN].
[Clear Count] (Not displayed depending on the settings.)
Clear [Printed Pages] ([Total Print]) for this Department ID.
[Total Print] Displays the number of printed surfaces.
(3) [Settings...]
(Displayed only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.)
The [Department ID Management Settings] page allows you to enable/disable the department ID management
function and specify whether to print jobs with unknown IDs.
Set the following items and then click [OK].
[Enable Department
ID Management]
If the check box for this option is selected, you need to enter a department ID and
password when printing. You also need to enter a department ID and password
when you perform direct printing or manipulate boxes from the Remote UI. Jobs
which failed to be authenticated are deleted.
[Accept Print Jobs
With Unknown IDs]
If the check box for this option is selected, you can print jobs with unknown IDs. If
the check box for this option is not selected, you cannot perform printing even
from the Remote UI that you have logged on in system manager mode. Jobs with
unknown IDs indicate the following kinds of jobs.
Jobs printed by a printer driver which does not support the department ID
management
Jobs directly printed using a method other than the Remote UI
(4) [Printed Pages]
Displays the number of printed surfaces.
(5) Delete the Selected Department
(Displayed only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.)
If you click [Delete] to the right of the Dept. ID to be deleted, the selected Dept. ID is deleted.
(6) [Clear All Counts]
(Not displayed depending on the settings.)
Clears [Printed Pages] of all the departments.
㻢㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CR
Available Functions
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery)
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual)
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software
Updating the Firmware
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
Register/Update Software Function
㻢㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CS
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
Using the Register/Update Software function, you can install the System Options/MEAP Applications to the printer. You can
use this function from both the touch panel display and the computer (Remote UI).
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by accessing the delivery server from this printer.
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by using the license file/license key that you obtained from the
License Management System.
Updating the Firmware
Using the Register/Update Software function, you can update the firmware of the printer to the most recent version. You
can use this function from the computer (Remote UI).
Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can update the firmware by accessing the delivery server from this printer.
Available Functions
㻢㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CU
The procedures to install the system options or MEAP applications on the printer differ, depending on whether the printer is
connected or not to an outside network. Select the procedure that matches your conditions using the references below.
Installing by Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network
Install from the Remote UI.
NOTE
Communication test
To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a communication test
before installation.
"Testing Communication Using the Remote UI"
Installing by Not Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network
Installing System Options
Install using one of the following procedures.
NOTE
If you install multiple system options
We recommend that you install from the Remote UI.
Procedure Necessary Steps Reference Page
Using the Remote
UI to install
1. Obtain the license file from the License
Management System "Obtaining the License File"
2. Install the license file using the Remote
UI "Installing the System Options Using
the Remote UI"
Installing MEAP Applications
Use the following procedure to install.
Procedure Necessary Steps Reference Page
Using the Remote
UI to install
1. Obtain the license file from the License
Management System "Obtaining the License File"
2. Install the license file and application file
using the Remote UI "Installing the MEAP Applications
Using the Remote UI"
3. Start the MEAP applications from SMS "Starting the MEAP Applications"
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
㻢㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CW
If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can install the system options and MEAP applications from the
Remote UI by linking with the delivery server.
NOTE
Preparing a license access number certificate
Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
3
Click [Delivered Installation].
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery)
㻢㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Once the license access number is confirmed after contacting the delivery server, information for the system options/MEAP
applications you can install are displayed.
5
Status after Installation:
㻢㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Start: Starts the installed MEAP applications.
Stop: Stops the installed MEAP applications.
IMPORTANT
If [Stop] is selected when installing MEAP applications
You need to start the application before using the MEAP application.
"Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications"
If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, click [Accept].
6
Check the Installation Result page.
When the installation of the system options is completed, the message <Restart the device.> appears. Restart the printer to
enable the function.
To return to the Delivered Installation screen, click [To Delivered Installation].
NOTE
The manual for system options/MEAP applications
You can download the manual for the installed system options/MEAP applications by accessing the URL for the manual
download site displayed on the Installation Result screen.
"Downloading the Manuals and Related Software"
㻢㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CX
This section describes how to install the system options and MEAP applications without connecting the printer to an outside
network.
Obtaining the License File
Obtain the license file.
License file: Obtain the license file when installing the system options/MEAP applications using the Remote UI.
NOTE
Preparing a license access number certificate
Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
License access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application
If the license access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application you are using, the license file is
issued by the distributor of the MEAP application. You do not need to obtain the license file explained in this section. For
more information, see the manual for each MEAP application.
1
Check the management number you need to obtain the license file.
To obtain the license file, the following management number is required.
License Access Number: Check the license access number certificate.
Device Serial Number: You can check from the control panel.
"[Utility Menu] Menu"
2
Access http://www.canon.com/lms/license/.
3
Follow the instructions on the screen and obtain the license file.
Next, install the system options or the MEAP applications.
Installing the System Options Using the Remote UI
You can install the system options to the printer using the Remote UI.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
(Manual)
㻢㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Register/Update Software].
3
Click [Manual Installation].
4
㻢㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
File extensions:
License File: A file with the [lic] extension.
5
Installing the MEAP Applications Using the Remote UI
You can install the MEAP applications to the printer using the Remote UI.
NOTE
The number of MEAP applications that can be installed
You can install up to eight applications.
Memory area that can be used
The maximum amount of memory allocated to install MEAP applications is 32MB.
For details on MEAP applications
There may be other system requirements for installation, depending on the MEAP applications. For instructions on
settings, see the manual provided with the MEAP application.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
㻢㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Click [Manual Installation].
4
File extensions:
㻢㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
License File: A file with the [lic] extension.
Application File: A file with the [jar] extension.
IMPORTANT
When you install MEAP applications
You cannot install license files only.
When installing the MEAP application, make sure you specify the license file. You cannot install the MEAP
application without specifying the license file.
5
Depending on the MEAP application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Confirm the information
GLVSOD\HGRQWKHVFUHHQĺFOLFN>2.@
If you are installing a new MEAP application, the following information is displayed on the screen.
Application Information
License Information
The following information is displayed when you overwrite a MEAP application.
Current Application Information
Application Information after Overwrite
Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait.> is displayed again. After the installation, click [To Manual
Installation] to display the Manual Installation screen.
IMPORTANT
To use MEAP applications
To use the installed MEAP application, you must start the MEAP application.
"Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications"
Starting the MEAP Applications
This section describes how to start the installed MEAP application from the SMS screen.
NOTE
㻢㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0CY
You can download the manuals for the installed system options/MEAP applications and their related software from the
following URL.
http://canon.com/fau/downloads
NOTE
Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
If you installed from the Remote UI, you can jump to the above URL from the link displayed on the Installation
Result screen. If you do so, the license access number is entered automatically.
1
Start the Web browser on your computer.
2
Enter the URL in [Address].
3
After entering the license access number, follow the instructions on the screen to download the
manuals and related software.
If software is downloaded, refer to the manual of that software to install.
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software
㻢㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E0
Update from the Remote UI.
NOTE
Communication test
To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a communication test
before installation.
"Testing Communication Using the Remote UI"
Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can update to a most recent firmware by linking with the delivery
server.
IMPORTANT
Estimated time required to apply firmware
The time required to apply the downloaded firmware is approximately 20 minutes. This operation may take more time
depending on the system configuration and network environment of your printer.
Checking the New Firmware/Specifying the Delivery Settings
You can check the new firmware that is applicable with the printer and specify the delivery settings.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
Updating the Firmware
㻢㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Click [Delivered Update].
4
Click [Confirm New Firmware].
Contact the delivery server for information on whether an applicable new firmware is available or not.
5
If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, press [I Accept].
㻢㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Details of each item are shown below.
Firmware:
Current Version: Displays the version of the current firmware.
Applicable Firmware: Displays the new firmware that is applicable with the printer.
Release Note: If the new firmware has a release note, that information is displayed.
Delivery Settings:
Delivery Schedule: Click "Deliver now" or " Deliver at specified date and time."
You can specify a date/time up to 30 days later for delivery schedule.
[Deliver now]: Downloads the firmware after the delivery setting is specified.
[Deliver at specified date and
time]:
Select the date/time (year, month, date, and time) to download the firmware from the
drop-down list.
Timing to Apply: Click [Auto] or [Manual].
[Auto]: The firmware is automatically applied after the download of the firmware is completed.
[Manual]: Only downloads the firmware. To apply the downloaded firmware, set from [Apply Firmware].
Deliver Update: Click [On] or [Off].
[On]: Downloads only the difference between the current firmware and the new firmware.
[Off]: Downloads the new firmware entirely.
E-Mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the administrator. You can receive e-mails regarding the update status that
is sent from the delivery server.
You can enter up to 64 characters for the e-mail address (excluding "(," ")," "<," ">," ",," ";," ":," "”," and "\").
Comments: Enter the comment that will automatically be added to the e-mail. If the model name is entered, you can
identify which device status the e-mail is about.
You can enter up to 128 characters in Comment.
NOTE
㻢㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Delivery Schedule and Timing to Apply
When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Auto]
The firmware is applied after the new firmware is downloaded from the delivery server. When the application is
completed, the printer automatically restarts.
When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Manual]
The new firmware is downloaded.
When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver at specified date and time]
The scheduled delivery is set to the specified date/time.
Applying the Downloaded Firmware
You can apply the downloaded firmware to the printer.
NOTE
If the Timing to Apply in Delivery Settings is set to [Auto], this step is not necessary.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
3
Click [Delivered Update].
㻢㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Apply Firmware].
5
㻢㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The new firmware is applied to the printer. When the application is completed, the printer automatically restarts.
Deleting the Downloaded Firmware
You can delete the downloaded firmware.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
㻢㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Click [Delivered Update].
4
Click [Delete Firmware].
5
㻢㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The firmware is deleted.
Deleting the Scheduled Delivery
You can delete the scheduled delivery of the firmware.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
㻢㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Click [Delivered Update].
4
Click [Delete Scheduled Delivery].
5
㻢㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The scheduled delivery is deleted.
㻢㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E1
You can display the installation logs and test communication using the Remote UI.
Displaying the Installation/Update Log Using the Remote UI
You can check the installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the firmware.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
3
Click [Display Logs /Communication Test].
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
㻢㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
The installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the firmware are displayed.
Testing Communication Using the Remote UI
You can check whether the printer can properly communicate with the delivery server.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
[Register/Update Software].
㻢㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click [Yes].
Contents for the test are downloaded from the delivery server.
When the communication test is completed, the communication test result screen is displayed.
NOTE
If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result
If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result screen, check that the network cable is connected and that the
network settings are correct. If the problem is not resolved, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
㻢㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E2
Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings
Restricting the Users Who Can Access
Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs
Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users
Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function)
Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print
Setting Keys and Certificates
Setting CA Certificates
Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function
Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function
Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display
NOTE
Software to be used for the security settings
You can specify the settings using the following software.
Remote UI
You can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the
network.
FTP Client
You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using
Command Prompt.
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. To specify the settings using FTP
Client, see "FTP Client."
Security Settings
㻢㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E3
You can restrict the users who can print or perform the printer settings with IP addresses by using a Web browser (Remote
UI).
Restriction Using the IP v. 4 Address
Restriction Using the IP v. 6 Address
Always use the Remote UI to specify the IP address. The control panel allows you only to switch the address filter setting
between On and Off.
[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)
Restriction Using the IP v. 4 Address
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu.
Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings
㻢㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [IP Address Filter].
5
Click [Edit...] under [IPv4 Address: TX Filter] or [IPv4 Address: RX Filter].
㻢㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[IPv4 Address: TX
Filter] It limits the sending of data from the printer.
[IPv4 Address: RX
Filter] It limits the sending of data to the printer.
6
Select the [Use Filter] check box, and then [Default Policy].
㻢㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you select [Reject], you will only be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses]
field.
If you select [Allow], you will not be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses]
field.
If you clear the [Use Filter] check box, you will be able to transmit and print from all users (clients).
7
Set the IP address.
(1) Enter the IP address for which you want to reject or permit to print.
Enter the IPv4 address, which is a decimal value, by adding "." (periods) as delimiters.
(2) Click [Add].
You can set up to 16 IP addresses (16 sets of IP addresses for when you have specified with [Register
Address]).
You can also enter IP addresses as follows.
Input example of
the IP addresses Method for entering IP addresses
192.168.0.1-
192.168.0.10
If you want to enter the IP addresses of consecutive numbers, place "-" (hyphen) between the
address of the smallest number and that of the largest number.
192.168.0.0/16 In order to specify the subnet range (prefix length), enter a "/" (slash) after the normal IP
address symbol, and then enter another prefix length (maximum 32).
NOTE
When "0" is entered in [Prefix Length]
㻢㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
All the IP addresses become the target for rejection or permission.
When "32" is entered in [Prefix Length]
The IP address of the printer becomes the target for rejection or permission.
When deleting a set IP address
(1) Select an IP address you want to delete.
(2) Click [Delete].
8
Click [OK].
9
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻢㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [IP Address Filter].
5
Click [Edit...] under [IPv6 Address: TX Filter] or [IPv6 Address: RX Filter].
[IPv6 Address: TX
Filter] It limits the sending of data from the printer.
[IPv6 Address: RX
Filter] It limits the sending of data to the printer.
㻢㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Select the [Use Filter] check box, and then select [Default Policy].
If you select [Reject], you will only be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses]
field.
If you select [Allow], you will not be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses]
field.
If you clear the [Use Filter] check box, you will be able to transmit and print from all users (clients).
7
Set the IP address.
(1) Enter the IP address for which you want to reject or permit to print.
Enter the IPv6 address, which is a hexadecimal value, by adding ":" (colons) as delimiters.
(2) Click [Add].
You can set up to 16 IP addresses (16 sets of IP addresses for when you have specified with [Register
Address]).
㻢㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
You can also enter IP addresses as follows.
Input example of
the IP addresses Method for entering IP addresses
fe80::0000/64 In order to specify the subnet range (prefix length), enter a "/" (slash) after the normal IP
address symbol, and then enter another prefix length (maximum 128).
NOTE
When "0" is entered in [Prefix Length]
All the IP addresses become the target for rejection or permission.
When "128" is entered in [Prefix Length]
The IP address of the printer becomes the target for rejection or permission.
When deleting a set IP address
(1) Select an IP address you want to delete.
(2) Click [Delete].
㻢㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Click [OK].
9
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻢㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E4
You can restrict the users who can access with MAC addresses using a Web browser (Remote UI).
Always use the Remote UI to specify the MAC address. The control panel allows you only to switch the address filter
setting between On and Off.
[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu.
Restricting the Users Who Can Access
㻢㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [MAC Address Filter].
5
Click [Edit...] under [TX Filter] or [RX Filter].
㻢㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[TX Filter] It limits the sending of data from the printer.
[RX Filter] It limits the sending of data to the printer.
6
Select the [Use Filter] check box, and then select [Default Policy].
If you select [Reject], you will not be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses]
field.
If you select [Allow], you will only be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses]
field.
If you clear the [Use Filter] check box, you will be able to transmit and print from all users (clients).
7
㻢㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Set the MAC address.
(1) Enter the MAC address of a device of which you want to permit to access.
Enter the address without placing a hyphen (-) between characters, like AABBCCDDEEFF.
(2) Click [Add].
You can set up to 50 addresses.
NOTE
When deleting a set MAC address
(1) Select a MAC address you want to delete.
(2) Click [Delete].
㻢㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Click [OK].
9
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
㻢㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻢㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E5
You can use the Web browser (Remote UI) to set restrictions for print jobs.
IMPORTANT
When restrictions for print jobs are set, the effect will be as follows.
Type of job Restriction
Printer Driver Will be stored in a box.
Direct Print
Image File Will not be displayed in the menu.*
PS/PDF Will be stored in a box.
XPS Will be stored in a box.
USB Direct Print Cannot be output.
Utility Menu There are no restrictions.
*The settings will be enabled after a hard reset or after the printer is restarted.
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu.
Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs
㻢㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Management Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻢㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password].
7
Set restrictions for print jobs.
(1) Select the [Restrict Printer Jobs] check box.
(2) Click [OK].
㻢㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻢㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E6
You can specify the job operation permission for end-users using a Web browser (Remote UI).
If the job operation by end-users is permitted, the job operation by the name entered when logging on (the user name)
becomes enabled when you are using the Remote UI in End-User Mode.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu.
Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users
㻢㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Management Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻢㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password].
7
Specify the job operation permission for end-users.
(1) Select the [Allow End-User's Job Operation] check box.
If the check box is cleared, End-User cannot operate any jobs.
(2) Click [OK].
㻢㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻢㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E7
You can set the key lock function using a Web browser (Remote UI).
When using the key lock function, you can lock the keys on the control panel, prohibiting the change of the printer settings
by a user other than the administrators.
IMPORTANT
If pressing a locked key
The printer beeps and the message <Key locked.> is displayed on the display.
Precautions when setting the key lock function
Set the key lock function while the keys are not being operated.
If the key lock function is set while the keys are being operated, the key lock function is enabled after the key operation.
1
Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] in the [Management Settings] menu.
Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function)
㻢㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Management Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻢㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻢㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0E8
You can use the Web browser (Remote UI) to set restrictions for USB Direct Print.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu.
Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print
㻢㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Management Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻢㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password].
7
Set restrictions for USB Direct Print.
(1) Clear the [USB Direct Print] check box.
If the check box is selected, the USB Direct Print function is enabled.
If the [Automatically Display USB Direct Print Screen] check box is selected, the USB Direct Print screen is
automatically displayed when the USB memory device is inserted.
(2) Click [OK].
㻢㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻢㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EA
When using SSL encrypted communication, IEEE802.1X authentication or IPSec encrypted communication, authentication
settings are necessary for the user to check the public key for encryption, the private key for decryption and key
information.
See the following according to your system environment and the options that you want to specify.
When creating and using a key and its certificate with this printer
Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI
Newly Creating a Key and Its Certificate
Newly create a key pair (the public key and private key) and its certificate.
Checking a Certificate
Confirm the contents of the certificate of a created key.
Deleting a Key and Its Certificate
Delete a created key and its certificate.
When using a key/certificate file created by a device other than this printer
Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI
Installing a Key/Certificate File on the Printer
Install a key/certificate file created by a device other than this printer on this printer.
Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer
Register a key pair (the public key and private key) and its certificate in a key/certificate file installed on this printer
so that you can use them in the printer.
Checking a Certificate
Confirm the contents of the certificate of a created key.
Deleting a Key and Its Certificate
Delete a created key and its certificate.
IMPORTANT
The number of key and certificate which you can create, register, or install
You can create and register up to eight "keys and certificates" (the total includes the one that is installed). Also, only one
key and certificate file can be installed. If you cannot create, register or install them, delete unnecessary keys and
certificates.
About a Key/Certificate File which can be installed on this printer
The key generation algorithm is "RSA". You can only install files with the extensions ".P12" or ".PFX".
The file format which you can register is a PKCS#12 file in DER (binary encoding) format.
Setting Keys and Certificates
㻢㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Key and Certificate Settings].
㻢㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EE
1
Click [Generate Key...].
2
Enter the name of the key to be newly created.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Newly Creating a Key and Its Certificate
㻢㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Select [Signature Algorithm].
Select from [SHA1], [SHA256], [SHA384], or [SHA512].
㻢㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Select [Key Algorithm].
Select from [512 bit], [1024 bit], [2048 bit], or [4096 bit].
When you select [SHA384] or [SHA512] in [Signature Algorithm], you can create a key only when selecting other than
[512 bit].
NOTE
Key Generation Algorithm
The generation algorithm when the printer generates a key is RSA.
About the key length
Although using the longer key makes it more difficult to decode data, the processing speed on encryption and decryption
is slower.
Select the key length according to the needs of security for data communication.
5
Specify the effective date and expiration date of the self-sign server certificate.
You can enter date between 1/1/2000 (1 Day 1 Month 2000 Year) and 31/12/2037 (31 Day 12 Month 2037 Year).
㻢㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Specify the country/region name for the self-sign server certificate.
Enter the Internet country code with 2 or less characters.
㻢㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
7
Specify the required information for the self-sign server certificate.
[State]: Enter the name of the state. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[City]: Enter the name of the city. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[Organization]: Enter the name of the organization. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[Organization Unit]: Enter the organization unit such as a section name. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.
[Common Name]: Enter the IP address or FQDN (in the style of "xyz.company.com") of this printer. Up to 41
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
IMPORTANT
To issue the self-sign server certificate
Specify the setting for at least one of the options among [Country/Region], [State], [City], [Organization], [Organization
Unit], and [Common Name].
When all the fields are blank, the self-sign server certificate is not issued.
If you are using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008
If you want to use IPPS printing, be sure to enter the IP address of this printer in [Common Name].
8
Click [OK].
ĺThe key and certificate creation starts.
㻢㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻢㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EF
1
Click [Register Key and Certificate...].
2
Click [Install...].
3
Specify the directory of a key/certificate file.
Installing a Key/Certificate File on the Printer
㻢㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Click [Browse...] to select the key/certificate file or enter the directory for the saved key/certificate file.
NOTE
About the name of the key/certificate file
Except for the extension up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be specified in [File Path] for the file name.
Specify the file name so that its length is 20 characters or less.
4
Click [Start Installation].
ĺThe installation of the key/certificate file starts.
To specify the key pair (the public key and private key) and its certificate in a key/certificate file installed on this printer so
that you can use them in the printer, see "Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer " and register the key pair (the
public key and private key) and its certificate in the printer after installing the key/certificate file.
㻢㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EH
1
Click [Register Key and Certificate...].
2
Click [Register...].
3
Enter the name of the key to be registered.
Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer
㻢㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
4
Enter the password specified for the private key.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
5
Click [OK].
ĺThe key and certificate registration starts.
㻣㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻣㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EJ
1
Click the icon of the certificate to be confirmed.
[ ] is displayed only when a certificate has been issued for the created key.
2
If you want to verify the certificate, click [Certificate Verification].
ĺThe verification result is displayed.
NOTE
If "An error has occurred during verification." is displayed in the verification result screen, this key pair cannot be used.
Checking a Certificate
㻣㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EK
1
Click [Delete] for the key and its certificate that you want to erase.
NOTE
About [Delete]
[Delete] is displayed only when the key is not specified as the default key.
2
Click [OK].
ĺThe selected key and its certificate are deleted.
Deleting a Key and Its Certificate
㻣㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EL
Set CA certificates needed by the server in order to use SSL server communication.
See the following sections.
"Displaying the [CA Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI"
"Installing CA Certificate Files on the Printer"
"Registering CA Certificates in the Printer"
"Checking CA Certificates"
"Deleting CA Certificates"
IMPORTANT
Number of CA Certificates that can be Registered/Installed
Registered: 8
Installed: 2
If you cannot register or install one, delete unnecessary keys and certificates.
Setting CA Certificates
㻣㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [CA Certificate Settings].
㻣㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0ES
1
Click [Register CA Certificate...].
2
Click [Install...].
3
Specify the location of the CA certificate file.
Installing CA Certificate Files on the Printer
㻣㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Either select the CA certificate file by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where CA certificate file is stored.
4
Click [Start Installation].
ĺThe CA file installation starts.
To enable the printer to use the CA certificate installed on the printer, after the CA certificate installation is complete, refer
to "Registering CA Certificates in the Printer" and register the CA certificate in the printer.
㻣㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EU
1
Click [Register CA Certificate...].
2
Click [Register].
ĺThe CA file registration begins.
Registering CA Certificates in the Printer
㻣㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EW
1
Click the icon of the CA certificate to be confirmed.
2
If you want to verify the certificate, click [Certificate Verification].
ĺThe verification result is displayed.
NOTE
If "An error has occurred during verification." is displayed in the verification result screen, this CA certificate cannot be
used.
Checking CA Certificates
㻣㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EX
1
Click [Delete].
2
Click [OK].
ĺThe CA certificate is deleted.
Deleting CA Certificates
㻣㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0EY
Specify settings in order to use the SSL encryption communication function with this printer.
See the following sections.
"Selecting Keys and Certificates"
"Changing the Remote UI Settings"
NOTE
SSL encrypted communication function
This is a function that enables exchange of encrypted data between this printer and a computer when performing IPP
printing in which data is printed via a network or when using the Remote UI in which you manage the printer with the
Web browser.
Using the SSL encrypted communication function achieves safer printing environments by preventing theft and
falsification of data.
To perform SSL encrypted communication
A key pair (the public key for encryption and private key for decryption) is required.
Registering the key pair in this printer and opening the public key to the users allows you to perform the following.
The users can encrypt data to send to the printer.
Only this printer can decrypt the encrypted data with the private key.
In this printer, a certificate is also created when a key pair is created. The users can check information about the key
with the certificate.
Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function
㻣㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F0
Select keys and certificates used by SSL encrypted communication functions.
NOTE
When Selecting Keys and Certificates
A key and certificate need to be generated for encrypted SSL traffic. For more information, see "Setting Keys and
Certificates."
About [Default Key Settings]
[Default Key Settings] is only displayed when the key is not specified as use key.
To prevent keys in use from being changed, [Default Key Settings] is not displayed in the following cases.
[Use SSL] under [Remote UI Settings] is set to ON.
[SSL] under [TCP/IP Settings] is set to On for IPP printing.
If you want to set the key as use key, first disable the above settings and then set the key as use key.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu.
Selecting Keys and Certificates
㻣㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [TCP/IP Settings].
5
Click [Key and Certificate...] under [SSL Settings].
㻣㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Select the key to use, and then click [Default Key Settings].
㻣㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F1
Specify whether the SSL encrypted communication function should be used for the Remote UI.
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu.
Changing the Remote UI Settings
㻣㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Remote UI Settings].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻣㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Change the Remote UI settings.
(1) Select the [Use SSL] check box.
If you clear the check box, the remote UI cannot use SSL encrypted communication.
(2) Click [OK].
IMPORTANT
If you cannot set [Use SSL]
When a key is not selected for SSL, [Use SSL] cannot be checked.
Setting Keys and Certificates
Selecting Keys and Certificates
7
㻣㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻣㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F2
Specify the settings for using IPSec encryption with the printer.
See the following sections, depending on the items you wish to set.
Registering/Editing Security Policies
In order to use the IPSec encryption communication function, it is necessary to set a security policy in advance.
"Displaying the [IPSec Settings] Page on the Remote UI"
"Adding a New Security Policy"
"Editing Security Policies "
Enabling and Disabling IPSec Encryption Communication Function Settings
"Displaying the [IPSec Settings] Page on the Remote UI"
"Enabling IPSec Encryption Communication"
NOTE
IPSec Encryption Communication
IPSec is a protocol that maintains security by protecting IP packets transmitted over the IP network from threats such as
theft, falsification, spoofing. Its advantage is that it can be used to add a security function to the basic Internet Protocol
(IP) without being dependent on software or network configuration.
Communication Mode
Of the IPSec communication modes, the printer supports only the transport mode. Certificates and encryption can only be
applied to the data parts of IP packets.
IMPORTANT
Packets that are not applied by IPSec encrypted communication
The following packets are not applied by IPSec encrypted communication.
IKE (IPv4/IPv6)
UDP port number: 500
Loopback address
IPv4 address: 127.0.0.1
IPv6 address: ::1
Multicast address
IPv4 address: 244.0.0.0 /4
IPv6 address: FF00:: /8
Broadcast address
IPv4 address: 255.255.255.255
Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function
㻣㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [IPSec Settings].
㻣㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F4
NOTE
Number of security policies that can be registered
You can register up to 10.
If you cannot register one, delete unnecessary security policies.
1
Click [IPSec Policy List...] on the [IPSec Settings] page.
2
Click [Register IPSec Policy...].
Adding a New Security Policy
㻣㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Enter the name of the new security policy to be registered.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
4
Select the [Enable Policy] check box.
If the check box is cleared, the security policy cannot be used.
㻣㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Set [Local Address Settings] and [Remote Address Settings].
The packets setting the security policy are specified as follows.
Transmission Packets Applying the Security Policy
[Local Address]
RX Packets with "destination IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified
here
TX Packets with "departure IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified
here
RX Packets with "departure IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified
㻣㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Remote Address] here
TX Packets with "destination IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified
here
When [IPv4 Manual Settings]/[IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected
Enter the IP address in the [Addresses to Set Manually] field.
You can enter the IP address in the following way.
IP Address Entry
Example IP Address Entry Method
192.168.0.1-
192.168.0.10
fe80::1000-
fe80::2000
If you want to enter the IP addresses of consecutive numbers, place "-" (hyphen) between the
address of the smallest number and that of the largest number.
192.168.0.0/16
fe80::0000/64
In order to specify the subnet range (prefix length), enter a "/" (slash) after the normal IP
address symbol, and then enter another prefix length (maximum 32 for IPv4 and maximum 128
for IPv6).
6
Set [Port Settings].
The packets setting the security policy are specified as follows.
Transmission Packets Applying the Security Policy
[Local Port] RX Packets with "destination ports" that match IP addresses specified here
TX Packets with "departure ports" that match IP addresses specified here
[Remote Port] RX Packets with "departure ports" that match IP addresses specified here
TX Packets with "destination ports" that match IP addresses specified here
If you want to select all ports
Select [All Ports].
If you want to select a single port
㻣㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Select [Single Port].
(2) Enter the port number (1 to 65535).
7
Set [IKE Mode] and [AUTH Method] under [IKE Settings].
(1) Select [Main] or [Aggressive] under [IKE Mode].
(2) Select [AUTH Method].
If you want to specify [Pre-Shared Key Method]
a. Select [Pre-Shared Key Method].
b. Click [Shared Key Settings...].
c. Enter the name of the shared key (up to 24 characters), and then click [OK].
If you want to specify [Digital Signature Method]
a. Select [Digital Signature Method].
b. Click [Key and Certificate...].
c. Select the key to use, and then click [Default Key Settings].
NOTE
[AUTH Method] Settings
In order to set [Pre-Shared Key Method], the SSL encrypted communication function must be enabled.
"Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function"
We recommend that network settings be performed by the network administrator.
"Setting Keys and Certificates"
8
Set [Authentication/Encryption Algorithm] under [IKE Settings].
㻣㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When setting automatically
Select the [Auto] check box.
When setting manually
Set the following items.
[Authentication] Select the authentication algorithm from [SHA1], [MD5] or [SHA1 and MD5].
[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm from [3DES-CBC], [AES-CBC] or [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC].
[DH Group] Select the Diffie-Hellman group from [Group 1 (768)], [Group 2 (1024)] or [Group 14 (2048)].
9
Set the PFS for [IPSec Network Settings] and [Validity].
(1) When using PFS, select the [Use PFS] check box.
(2) Set [Validity].
When specifying by time
㻣㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
a. Select the [Specify by Time] check box.
b. Enter the time (1 to 65535 minutes).
When specifying by size
a. Select the [Specify by Size] check box.
b. Enter the size (1 to 65535 MB).
NOTE
About PFS
If PFS is used, the key generation process becomes complex. Even assuming one key is deciphered, it does not mean
that later keys will be deciphered easily.
10
Set [Authentication/Encryption Algorithm] under [IPSec Network Settings].
When setting automatically
Select [Auto].
When setting authentication using ESP protocol
(1) Select [ESP].
(2) Select the authentication algorithm from [SHA1], [MD5], [SHA1 and MD5] or [NULL] under [ESP Authentication].
(3) Select the encryption algorithm from [3DES-CBC], [AES-CBC], [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC] or [NULL] under [ESP
Encryption].
When setting authentication using AH protocol
(1) Select [AH].
(2) Select the authentication algorithm from [SHA1], [MD5] or [SHA1 and MD5] under [AH Authentication].
11
Click [OK].
㻣㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
12
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻣㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F5
1
Click [IPSec Policy List...] on the [IPSec Settings] page.
2
Perform the necessary operations on the [IPSec Policy List] page.
When editing security policies
(1) Click the policy name displayed in the [Policy Name] field.
(2) See "Adding a New Security Policy", and edit the content.
Editing Security Policies
㻣㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When deleting security policies
(1) Click [Delete] on the security policy you wish to delete.
(2) Click [OK].
When changing the priority of security policies
The higher up the list the security policy is, the higher its priority.
Click [Raise Priority] or [Lower Priority] for the security policy whose priority you wish to change, and change the priority.
3
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻣㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F6
1
Click [Edit...] on the [IPSec Settings] page.
2
Select the [Use IPSec] check box.
In order to allow receipt of non-policy packets, select the [Allow Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.
3
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
Enabling IPSec Encryption Communication
㻣㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
ĺAfter performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective.
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻣㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F7
You can specify the setting for Job Log Display using a Web browser (Remote UI).
1
Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Settings/Registration].
3
Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu.
Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display
㻣㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Display Job History].
5
Click [Edit...].
㻣㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Specify whether the printer should display the job logs.
If the [Display Job History] check box is selected, you can display the job logs*.
If the [Display Job History] check box is cleared, the job logs* are not displayed.
*The [Job History] page in the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu
7
Select whether to permit management software to obtain job logs.
㻣㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If the [Allow Obtain Job History from Management Software] check box is selected, you can obtain the job logs from
management software.
If the [Allow Obtain Job History from Management Software] check box is cleared, job logs cannot be obtained from
management software.
NOTE
If the [Display Job History] check box is selected
The [Allow Obtain Job History from Management Software] check box is selected automatically.
8
Click [OK].
9
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
㻣㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
ĺ$IWHUSHUIRUPLQJDKDUGUHVHWRUUHVWDUWLQJWKHSULQWHUWKHVHWWLQJVDUHHIIHFWLYH
NOTE
To perform a hard reset
You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure.
1. Click [Settings/Registration].
2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu.
3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
㻣㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0F9
SMS (Service Management Service) is software that accesses the printer over the network from an existing Web browser,
and can install and manage MEAP applications (called "applications" in this document). Since the software (Web server) for
using SMS is embedded in the printer, there is no need for any software other than a Web browser.
If a printer on the network is connected to a computer, it can use SMS. You can perform the following operations using
SMS.
You can check application information from computers on the network
You can access the printer via the network and display the status and information of installed applications.
After SMS launches and you log in by entering your password in the [Log In] page, the following top page is displayed.
(1) [MEAP Application Management]
It can display the status of applications that are installed in the printer.
"MEAP Application Settings"
(2) [Install MEAP Application]
Install the MEAP application.
Available Functions
㻣㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
"Installing MEAP Applications"
(3) [System Management]
MEAP system administrator settings are used for setting system application settings, displaying information and
changing passwords, etc.
"System Settings"
You can install and uninstall applications
You can install and uninstall applications that support this printer from the computer.
"Installing MEAP Applications"
"Uninstalling MEAP Applications"
You can update installed applications and license files
If the license for the installed applications has expired, you can reinstall and update it.
"Adding License Files"
㻣㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FA
Log in is required to use SMS.
Before Launching SMS (Preparation)
Launching SMS (Log in)
Closing SMS (Logging Out)
NOTE
Web Browser Settings
The following settings are required.
JavaScript must be enabled
The use of session cookies must be enabled
When a proxy server is used, using the proxy server settings of your Web browser, add the IP address of the printer
to the [Exceptions] (addresses that do not use a proxy) list.
Since settings differ depending on the network environment, consult with your network administrator.
Launching SMS
Multiple users cannot log in to SMS at the same time.
Automatic SMS Logout
While SMS is in use, if it is not accessed for approximately five minutes or more it times out and the user is
automatically logged out. If that happens, log in again from the [Login] page.
Do not use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button
If you use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button, SMS may not operate properly.
SMS System Environment
SMS operation is guaranteed in the following system environments.
Web Browsers Internet Explorer 6 Service Pack 1, or later
Safari 1.3.2 or later
Operating system
Windows XP Professional SP3
Windows Vista SP2
Windows 7
Mac OS X 10.4.9 or later
Launching and Closing SMS
㻣㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FC
Set the following before launching SMS.
Step
1Set [Network]. "Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer)"
Step
2
Check the printer's IP
address. "Checking the Printer Settings"
Step
3
Set it so that the printer
can be accessed from
the Web browser.
"Setting Up HTTP Communication"
Before Launching SMS (Preparation)
㻣㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FE
In order to use MEAP functions from the Web browser, HTTP communication must be enabled.
Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the settings. (The default settings are [On].)
1
Press [ ] ( : Settings), select [Network] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
After the message is displayed, press [OK].
2
Select [TCP/IP Settings] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3
Select [HTTP] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4
Select [On] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
[On] It uses HTTP.
[Off] It does not use HTTP.
5
Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
The settings are enabled after a hard reset or after the printer is restarted.
Setting Up HTTP Communication
㻣㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FF
The following two methods are used for launching SMS.
Launching SMS directly from the Web browser
Launching SMS from a Remote UI
Before launching SMS, see "Attention (Launching SMS (Log in))."
Launching SMS directly from the Web browser
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "https://<Printer's IP address>:8443/sms/" in the address bar, and then press [ENTER] from the
Enter key on the keyboard.
Entry Example: https://192.168.0.215:8443/sms/
If the printer's host name is registered in the DNS server, you can enter [host name.domain name] instead of the IP
address.
Input Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com:8443/sms/
If SMS does not launch
Check the following.
HTTP communication is enabled.
"Setting Up HTTP Communication"
The computer and printer are connected properly over the network.
The printer is turned ON.
The IP address or [host name.domain name] are entered correctly.
Launching SMS (Log in)
㻣㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
Device Serial Number
The printer's device serial number is displayed on the upper left of the screen. (The device serial number is required to
obtain the license file from the license management system.)
3
Enter the password, and then click [Login].
The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive).
If you cannot log in
If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-enter your
password.
Enter the correct password, and then click [Login].
If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not be able to log in
even if you enter the correct password.
A switch license file is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize Password] in the
screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch License File, and then click
[Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Launching SMS from a Remote UI
1
Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode.
"Starting the Remote UI"
2
Click [Service Management Service] on the portal page.
㻣㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
3
Enter the password, and then click [Login].
The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive).
If you cannot log in
If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-enter your
password.
Enter the correct password, and then click [Login].
If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not be able to log in
even if you enter the correct password.
A switch license file is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize Password] in the
screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch License File, and then click
[Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
㻣㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FH
IMPORTANT
SMS Password
To prevent unauthorized access, We recommend that the administrator change the password before SMS use is
begun. See "Changing the SMS Password" when changing passwords.
This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the administrator.
Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to use SMS. If
this happens, contact your local dealer.
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in))
㻣㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FJ
Click [Log Out from SMS] to close SMS.
If you close the Web browser without clicking [Log Out from SMS], SMS becomes temporarily unusable.
Closing SMS (Logging Out)
㻣㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FK
MEAP applications are set from the [MEAP Application Management] and the [Install MEAP Application] menus.
Items shown in the [MEAP Application Management] menu
[Application
Name] The name of the application is displayed.
[Installed on] The date on which the application was installed is displayed.
The status of the application is displayed.
[Installed]:
The application has been installed, but not started.
Or, the printer was turned OFF after the application stopped, and after the printer was
restarted the application was not yet started.
MEAP Application Settings
㻣㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Status]
[Started]:
The application is running.
[Stopped]:
The application is stopped.
[Starting]:
The application is starting up.
[Stopping]:
The application is closing down.
[License]
The license status of the application is displayed.
[Installed]:
A valid license file has been installed.
[Not Installed]:
The license file has been disabled.
[Over Limit]:
The license file that is installed has an expiration date, and multiple types of counters have
been set. One or more of the counter values has exceeded the upper limits of the counter.
[Invalid]:
The installed license file has passed its expiration date.
Or, the current counter value has exceeded the upper limit of the license file.
* When upper limits have been set for multiple types of counters, the license will become
invalid at the point in time when any counter exceeds its upper limit.
[Unnecessary]:
The application does not require a license file for startup.
[Resource
Information]
The resources being used by the applications are displayed.
[Storage]:
The amount of storage being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB).
[Memory]:
The amount of memory being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB).
[Threads]:
The number of threads.
[Sockets]:
The number of sockets.
[File Descriptors]:
The number of file descriptors.
NOTE
Timing of [Resource Information] Updates
[Resource Information] is updated at the following times.
Item Timing of Updates
[Storage] When the application is installed or uninstalled
[Memory]
[Threads]
[Sockets]
[File Descriptors]
When the application starts or stops
[Install MEAP Application] Menu Settings
Install the MEAP application.
[Install]:
Specify the application file and license file to be installed, and then click [Install] to
start the installation.
㻣㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Install MEAP
Application/License] [Application File Path]:
Specify the application file to be installed.
[License File Path]:
Specify the license file.
See the following section for settings that use the [MEAP Application Management] and [Install MEAP Application] menus.
Installing MEAP Applications
Uninstalling MEAP Applications
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications
MEAP Application License Settings
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications
㻣㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FL
Before starting the following operation, see "Attention (Installing MEAP Applications)."
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [Install MEAP Application].
3
Set [Application File Path] and [License File Path].
Either select the file by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the file is stored.
Installing MEAP Applications
㻣㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Application File
Path] Specify a file with a "jar" extension.
[License File Path] Specify a file with a "lic" extension.
4
Click [Install].
5
Confirm the information on the install confirmation page, and then click [Yes].
When the [License Agreement] appears, confirm the information, and then click [I Accept].
ĺThe installation begins.
<Information Displayed on the Install Confirmation Page>
If you are installing a new application
[Application
Information] Information about the application
[License
Information] The expiration date of the application
If you are updating an application
[Application
Information]
[Current Application Information] Information about the current application
[Application Information after Overwrite] Application information after overwrite
[License
Information]
[Expires after] The expiration date of the targeted application
[Current Counter Usage Limit] Current counter information
[Counter Usage Limit after Overwrite] Counter information after overwrite
If the install is cancelled
㻣㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If the shutdown process for the printer starts while an application is being installed, an error message may be displayed
on the [Install] page for SMS, and the installation cancelled. If this happens, install the application again after restarting
the printer by turning the main power switch OFF and then back ON again.
6
After the install is completed, click [To MEAP Application Management].
NOTE
When using the installed application
Start the application.
"Starting MEAP Applications"
㻣㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FR
IMPORTANT
Installing Applications
There may be other specific requirements for installation, depending on the application. For more information, see
the instruction manual provided with the application.
You can install up to eight applications.
You cannot install license files only. Specify both the application file and the license file.
To only add a license file for an application that is already installed, see "Adding License Files."
Obtaining License Files
In order to install an application, a valid license file is required.
If you have a license access number in your application package, obtain a valid license file from License
Management System (http://www.canon.com/lms/license/).
In order to obtain a license file, a license access number and a device serial number (the number displayed
on the upper left of the SMS screen) are required.
If you do not have a license access number in your application package, it will be provided by the dealer where you
purchased the application. For more information, see the instruction manual provided with the application.
Storage Area
The application can use a maximum storage area of 160 MB. You can confirm the storage space used by the application
"Storage", under resource information displayed on the [MEAP Application Management] page.
When you are updating an application
Stop the application before installing the new version.
"Stopping MEAP Applications"
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications)
㻣㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FS
IMPORTANT
If the license status is not "Not Installed"
Uninstall the application after disabling and deleting the license files.
"Disabling License Files"
"Deleting Disabled License Files"
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall.
Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted.
4
Click [Yes].
ĺThe uninstall begins.
Uninstalling MEAP Applications
㻣㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
IMPORTANT
If <A package exported from this application cannot be used.> is displayed
and you uninstall the application that displayed this message, you may not be able to use other applications.
㻣㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FW
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click [Start] for the application to start.
If the application does not start
Check the following.
The required license file has been installed
There is sufficient [Memory], [Threads], [Sockets] and [File Descriptors] under [Resource Information]
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
Starting MEAP Applications
㻣㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
㻣㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0FY
Check the details of installed applications.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click the application to check the details.
ĺ[Application/License Information] is displayed on the screen.
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications
㻣㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H0
You can add, disable and delete license files for installed applications.
Adding License Files
Disabling License Files
Downloading Disabled License Files
Deleting Disabled License Files
IMPORTANT
Disabling Licenses
You cannot disable a license file if the application is still running.
"Stopping MEAP Applications"
When a disabled license file is generated, the status of that license file becomes <Not Installed> and the application
becomes unusable.
Downloading and Deleting Licenses
You can only download or delete disabled license files.
Some license files need to be downloaded after they have been disabled.
Once you have deleted the disabled license file, you cannot download it from the printer again. We recommend
downloading and backing it up before deleting it.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall disabled or downloaded license files in the same printer.
MEAP Application License Settings
㻣㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H1
You can install license files for applications that are already installed.
You can also increase counter values and extend terms of validity by adding license files.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click the name of the application to which a license file will be added.
Adding License Files
㻣㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [License Management].
5
Specify the license file.
㻣㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(1) Click [Browse], and then select the license file to be added.
(2) Click [Install].
6
Confirm the information on the install confirmation page, and then click [Yes].
ĺThe license file is installed.
If you are adding a license file to an [Over Limit] or [Invalid] application
you may need to restart the application.
"Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications"
㻣㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H2
After you disable a license file, you can download and save it to a computer or delete it.
IMPORTANT
Disabling Licenses
You cannot disable a license file if the application is still running.
"Stopping MEAP Applications"
When a disabled license file is generated, the status of that license file becomes <Not Installed> and the application
becomes unusable.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall disabled license files in the same printer.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click the name of the application for which to disable to license file.
Disabling License Files
㻣㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [License Management].
5
Click [Disable].
㻣㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Click [Yes].
ĺThe license file is disabled.
㻣㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H3
Download and back up disabled license files to the computer.
IMPORTANT
Downloading Licenses
You can only download disabled license files.
Some license files need to be downloaded after they have been disabled.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall downloaded and disabled license files in the same printer.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click the name of the application for which to download to license file.
Downloading Disabled License Files
㻣㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [License Management].
5
Click [Download].
㻣㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a file storage directory.
ĺThe license file is saved.
㻣㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H4
To uninstall an application, you must first delete the license file.
IMPORTANT
Deleting Licenses
You can only delete disabled license files.
Once you have deleted the disabled license file, you cannot download it again. We recommend downloading and
backing it up before deleting it.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click the name of the application to which to delete a license file.
Deleting Disabled License Files
㻣㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [License Management].
5
Click [Delete].
㻣㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Click [Yes].
ĺThe license file is deleted.
㻣㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H5
When processing jobs from applications that do not require operation from the printer, you must first set the authentication
information.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Management].
3
Click the name of the application for which to set authentication information.
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications
㻣㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Authentication Information Settings].
5
Enter the authentication information.
㻣㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you use department ID management
Enter the department ID and password in the fields marked [Department ID] and [PIN].
If you do not use department ID management
Enter an arbitrary ID and password in the fields marked [Department ID] and [PIN].
6
Click [Update].
ĺAuthentication information is set.
IMPORTANT
When cancelling authentication information
Click [Delete].
㻣㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H6
The [System Management] menu contains the following items.
[Panel Display
Order Settings]
It sets the order MEAP applets are displayed on the operation panel.
"Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order"
[Enhanced
System
Application
Management]
It displays enhanced system application status and performs settings. You can also set log in
service settings.
"Setting Enhanced System Applications"
[System
Application
Management]
It displays system application status and performs start/stop operations.
[System
Information]
It displays versions and system application information, etc.
"Checking System Information"
[MEAP
Application
Information]
It displays the details about MEAP applications.
"Checking Application Information"
[Check License] It checks the content of the license file before it is installed.
"Checking License Files"
[Change
Password]
It changes the SMS log in password.
"Changing the SMS Password"
[MEAP
Application
Setting
Information
Management]
It deletes the details about MEAP applications.
"Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information"
[MEAP
Application Log
Management]
It downloads and deletes log data obtained by MEAP applications.
"Managing MEAP Application Log Data"
System Settings
㻣㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H7
The applet display order changes when you press [ ] ( : Application) on the control panel.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [Panel Display Order Settings].
3
Select the check boxes for the applets whose display order you wish to change.
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order
㻣㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
The display order changes.
(1) Move the applets up and down by clicking [Up] and [Down].
(2) Click [Update].
㻣㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻣㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0H9
They perform the operations of the enhanced system applications that enhance the system applications (the basic
applications that make up the MEAP system).
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications
Starting Enhanced System Applications
Stopping Enhanced System Applications
Installing Enhanced System Applications
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications
Setting Enhanced System Applications
㻣㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HC
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3
Click [Start] for Other System Applications, and then start the application.
When the [License Agreement] appears, confirm the information, and then click [I Accept].
Starting Enhanced System Applications
㻣㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HF
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3
Set [Enhanced System Application File Path] and [License File Path].
Either select the file by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the file is stored.
Installing Enhanced System Applications
㻣㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Enhanced System
Application File
Path]
Specify a file with a "jar" extension.
[License File Path] Specify a file with a "lic" extension.
IMPORTANT
When specifying a file
Specify both the application file and the license file.
4
Click [Install].
㻣㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Confirm the information on the install confirmation page, and then click [Yes].
When the [License Agreement] appears, confirm the information, and then click [I Accept].
ĺThe installation begins.
㻣㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HH
NOTE
Deleting License Files
There is no need to delete license files before uninstalling enhanced system applications.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3
Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall.
Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted.
4
Click [Yes].
ĺThe uninstall begins.
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications
㻣㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HK
You can check the version information of platforms such as Java virtual machine and version information, date of
installation and status of system applications.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [System Information].
Click [Display Details] to check detailed information.
Checking System Information
㻣㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻤㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HL
You can check the information about installed or uninstalled applications (except for system applications).
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Information].
3
Information about applications is displayed.
(1) Select [Installed] or [Uninstalled].
(2) Click [Switch].
[Installed] Information about installed applications (except for system applications) is displayed.
[Uninstalled] Information about uninstalled applications (except for system applications) is displayed.
Checking Application Information
㻤㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HR
You can check the content of the license file before it is installed.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [Check License].
3
Either select the file by clicking [Browse], or enter the location where the file is stored.
4
Click [Check].
ĺThe content of the license file is displayed.
Checking License Files
㻤㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HS
IMPORTANT
SMS Password
To prevent unauthorized access, we recommend that the administrator change the password before SMS use is
begun.
This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the administrator.
Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to use SMS. If
this happens, contact your local dealer.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [Change Password].
3
Set the password.
(1) Set the password.
(2) Click [Change].
Enter between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9) for the password.
[Old Password] Enter the password that is currently used.
[New Password] Enter the new password.
Changing the SMS Password
㻤㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
[Confirm] Enter the same password again in [New Password].
㻤㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0HU
Deletes the application data.
1
Start SMS (Service Management Service).
"Launching SMS (Log in)"
2
Click [MEAP Application Setting Information Management].
3
Select the check box for the application whose setting information you wish to delete, and then click
[Delete].
Click [Select All] to select all of the applications.
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information
㻤㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Yes].
ĺThe setting information of the application is deleted.
㻤㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a file storage directory.
ĺThe log file is saved.
㻤㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
4
Click [Yes].
ĺThe log data is deleted.
㻤㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J0
This section describes how to handle error messages that are displayed when logging in to or operating SMS.
The error messages are divided into separate pages. Click the following links and perform the necessary actions.
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page
Other Errors
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
㻤㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J1
<The specified file does not exist or the
file path is incorrect. Try to specify the
path again.>
<The contents of the specified file are
incorrect or information is missing. Check
the file.>
<The specified switch license file cannot
be used for password initialization. Try to
specify the file again.>
<Cannot initialize password because a
used switch license file is specified. Try to
specify the file again.>
<Cannot initialize the password because another application is being
installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and
then try again.>
<You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service.
Log in with administrator rights.>
<Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations
have not been successfully performed. Please wait a moment and
then try this operation again.>
<Error: <Error Details>>
The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.
Problem The file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect.
Action Specify the file path correctly.
The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.
Problem The specified file is not a switch license file.
Action Check to make sure that the specified file is a switch license file for password initialization.
Problem Information is missing from the specified file.
Action The password cannot be initialized using the specified file. Check the content of the file.
The specified switch license file cannot be used for password initialization. Try to specify the file
again.
Problem The specified file is not a switch license file for initializing the password.
Action Specify a switch license file for initializing the password.
Cannot initialize password because a used switch license file is specified. Try to specify the file
again.
Problem The specified license file has already been installed. License files that have been installed once cannot be
installed again.
Action Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file.
Cannot initialize the password because another application is being installed, or the firmware being
updated.
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or it cannot initialize the password because the
firmware is being updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before initializing the password.
You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service. Log in with administrator rights.
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page
㻤㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Problem
Only users with administrator rights can log in to SMS with the user name and password that they use for
logging in to the printer. The user trying to log in cannot do so because they do not have administrator
rights.
Action Log in again with the user name and password of a user with administrator rights.
Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations have not been successfully
performed. Please wait a moment and then try this operation again.
Problem Cannot log in for a period of time because either another user is logged in or when the user was logged
in before, the logout procedure was not performed properly.
Action If another user is logged in, wait until the user logs out. If another user is not logged in, wait for the lock
to be cancelled.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
㻤㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J2
<Cannot start this application because there is no
distributable software in the application. Get a distributable
software.>
<Cannot start this application because the number of
bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this
application after stopping other applications.>
<A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it
again after installing a license.>
<Cannot start this application because system resources
(memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or
screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>>
<Cannot uninstall this application because the
license file has not been deleted. Uninstall the
application after deleting the license in the
[License Management] page.>
<The name listed in the file for the application and
the applet name to register with Applet Viewer
Service are different. Check the file.>
<Cannot start this application because application
setting information is being processed. Please wait
a moment and then try again.>
<Error: <Error Details>>
Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the application. Get a
distributable software.
Problem The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start
this application after stopping other applications.
Problem
The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the
number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (five applets), so the
application cannot be launched.
Action First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the
system which includes an applet, and then restart the application.
A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it again after installing a license.
Problem Cannot start the application because a license file is not installed.
Action Install the license file, and then restart the application.
Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors,
disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>
Problem The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be
available to be allocated.
Action Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time.
Cannot uninstall this application because the license file has not been deleted. Uninstall the
application after deleting the license in the [License Management] page.
Problem The application cannot be uninstalled because the license file for the application still exists inside the
printer.
Action Uninstall the application after deleting the license on the [License Management] page.
The name listed in the file for the application and the applet name to register with Applet Viewer
Service are different. Check the file.
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page
㻤㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Problem The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the
Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application file.
Action Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application file, contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because application setting information is being processed. Please wait
a moment and then try again.
Problem The application cannot be started because application data is being deleted.
Action After deletion of application data completes, launch the application again.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
㻤㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J3
<The file for the application to install does not exist
or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.>
<The file for the license to install does not exist or
the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.>
<The manifest is not listed in the specified file.
Check the file.>
<The contents of the file for the application to install
are incorrect or information is missing. Check the
file.>
<The contents of the file for the license to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.>
<The following information is missing in file for the
specified application. Check the file. <Missing
information>>
<The following information in the specified
application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate
information>>
<Cannot install this application because a code
signing has not been confirmed to be valid. Get a
valid code signing.>
<Cannot install this license because the specified
application and license do not correspond. Try to
specify a path for the license file again.>
<The number of applications that can be installed has
exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after
uninstalling other applications.>
<Cannot install this license because the number of
license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded
the limit. Contact your service representative.>
<Cannot install because a used license file is
specified. Try to specify the file again.>
<To install the specified application, a license file
must be installed at the same time. Specify a license
file.>
<The specified file is a system application. Install the
application from the [Enhanced System Application
Management] page.>
<The specified application does not require a license.>
<The specified license does not match this device.
Specify an installable license.>
<The specified application does not support this device.>
<Cannot install this application because an applet
included in the specified application has exceeded the
area that can be displayed in the device panel.>
<The specified file is an update file. Stop the application
that you want update and then install the file.>
<Cannot install the application because the license
requirement is different. Uninstall the specified application,
and then try to install the application again.>
<Cannot install this application because storage space
has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then
try to install it again.>
<Could not cancel installation. Installation has been
successfully completed.>
<This application does not support the MEAP version of
the device. Contact your service representative after
checking the application version.>
<The specified application cannot be installed on this
device.>
<The process is canceled because the system has been
shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the
process again.>
<Cannot install the application or license because another
application is being installed, or the firmware being
updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.>
<Error: <Error Details>>
The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the
path again.
Problem The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect.
Action Specify the file path correctly.
The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The license file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect.
Action Specify the file path correctly.
The manifest is not listed in the specified file. Check the file.
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page
㻤㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Problem A manifest does not exist for the file specified as the application file.
Action This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check
the file.
Problem Either the content of the files specified as application files is not correct or information is missing.
Action This application file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the
file.
Problem Either the content of the files specified as license files is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing
information>
Problem The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application file.
Action Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the application developer or the application
support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>.
The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate
information>
Problem 1 <Inaccurate information> in the application file cannot be recognized as correct information.
Action Contact the application developer or the application support help desk.
Problem 2 If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specifications, the application's MEAP specification values
and the printer's MEAP specification values do not match.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been confirmed to be valid. Get a valid
code signing.
Problem 1 Cannot confirm that there is a valid code signature inside the application file.
Action Perform the correct code signing operation for the application.
Problem 2 The file may have been altered.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to
specify a path for the license file again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the specified license file does not correspond to the specified
application.
Action Specify the license file that corresponds to the application.
㻤㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this
application after uninstalling other applications.
Problem The maximum number of applications that can be installed is eight. You are attempting to install an
application that will exceed that number.
Action You can install it if you first uninstall another installed application (unless it is a system application).
Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has
exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license file cannot be installed because the number of license file ID information logs contained in the
license file exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again.
Problem License files that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already
been installed.
Action Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file.
To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a
license file.
Problem You cannot install the application unless you specify the license file that corresponds to the application at
the same time.
Action Specify the corresponding license file when specifying the application, and then install them.
The specified file is a system application. Install the application from the [Enhanced System
Application Management] page.
Problem The specified file is a system application. It cannot be installed from this [Install MEAP Application] page.
Action Install it from the [Enhanced System Application Management] page.
The specified application does not require a license.
Problem An application file and license file were specified, but the specified application file does not require a
license file.
Action Install the application without specifying a license file.
The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License files contain the serial number information of printers in which the license file can be installed. The
specified license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number information.
Action Specify a license file that matches the printer's serial number.
The specified application does not support this device.
Problem Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model.
㻤㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action Specify an application that supports this printer.
Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specified application has exceeded
the area that can be displayed in the device panel.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application
exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer.
Action Install an application that contains applets that support this printer.
The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the
file.
Problem The specified application file is a file for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary
to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.
Action Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.
Cannot install the application because the license requirement is different. Uninstall the specified
application, and then try to install the application again.
Problem You have tried to upgrade an application which is already installed using a version of the same application
with different license requirements.
Action Upgrade using the same license conditions.
Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall other
applications and then try to install it again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity.
Action Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license file, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
This application does not support the MEAP version of the device. Contact your service
representative after checking the application version.
Problem The specified application cannot be installed because it does not support the MEAP version on this
printer.
Action Contact the application developer.
The specified application cannot be installed on this device.
Problem The specified application cannot be installed because there is not enough memory in the printer.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system, and then
perform the process again.
Problem The installation could not be completed because it conflicted with a system shutdown.
㻤㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action Restart the printer and perform the install again.
Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed, or the
firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because
the firmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the application.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
㻤㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J4
<Settings are incorrect.>
<The [Department ID] is incorrect. Enter an integer for
the [Department ID].>
<The [Department ID] is not entered.>
<Could not set authentication information because an
error occurred.>
<Could not delete authentication information because
an error occurred.>
Settings are incorrect.
Check to see if the password is incorrect.
Enter Dept. ID within 7 digits.
Check to see if the Department. ID is registered with the device.
Problem Cannot set authentication information because either the Dept. ID entered does not exist, or the PIN was
entered incorrectly.
Action Enter a Dept. ID and PIN that are registered in the printer.
The [Department ID] is incorrect.
Enter an integer for the [Department ID].
Problem The Dept. ID that was entered is a positive integer, but the registered Dept. ID is not a positive integer.
Action Enter the correct Dept. ID that is registered in the device.
The [Department ID] is not entered.
Problem The Dept. ID is blank.
Action Specify a Dept. ID.
Could not set authentication information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be set.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Could not delete authentication information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be deleted.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page
㻤㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J5
<The specified file does not exist or the file path is
incorrect. Try to specify the path again.>
<The contents of the file for the license to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.>
<Cannot install this license because the specified
license does not correspond to this application. Try to
specify a path for the license file again.>
<Cannot install this license because the number of
license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the
limit. Contact your service representative.>
<Cannot install because a used license file is specified.
Try to specify the file again.>
<The specified license does not match this device.
Specify an installable license.>
<Could not cancel installation. Installation has been
successfully completed.>
<Cannot install the license because another application
is being installed, or the firmware being
updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.>
<Cannot disable the license file because this
application has been started. Disable the license file
after stopping the application.>
<Error: <Error Details>>
The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.
Problem The file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect.
Action Specify the file path correctly.
The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the
file.
Problem Either the content of the file is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license file cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
Cannot install this license because the specified license does not correspond to this application. Try
to specify a path for the license file again.
Problem The specified license file does not correspond to the application, so they cannot be installed.
Action Specify the license file that corresponds to the application.
Check to make sure that the manifest file listed inside the license file is correct.
Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has
exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license file cannot be installed because the number of license file ID information logs contained in the
license file exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again.
Problem According to the specifications, a license file which is already installed cannot be installed again. The
specified license file has already been installed.
Action Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file.
The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License files contain lists of printers in which they can be installed. The specified license file cannot be
installed in this printer.
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page
㻤㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action Specify a license file that can be installed in this printer.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license file, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
Cannot install the license because another application is being installed, or the firmware being
updated.
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license file cannot be installed because
the firmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the license file.
Cannot disable the license file because this application has been started. Disable the license file
after stopping the application.
Problem You cannot disable a license if the corresponding application is still running.
Action Stop the application that corresponds to the license before disabling the license.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact the application developer.
㻤㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J6
<Cannot start this application because there is no
distributable software in the application. Get a distributable
software.>
<Cannot start this application because the number of
bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application
after stopping other applications.>
<Cannot start this application because system resources
(memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or
screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>>
<The name listed in the file for the application and the applet
name to register with Applet Viewer Service are different.
Check the file.>
<The following login services cannot be uninstalled:
The currently set login service
Login services that will be enabled after the device is
restarted
Default Authentication login services
The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the
device is restarted.>
<The file for the application to install does not exist or the file
path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.>
<The manifest is not listed in the specified file. Check the
file.>
<The file for the license to install does not exist or the file
path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.>
<The contents of the file for the application to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.>
<The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect
or information is missing. Check the file.>
<Cannot install this application because a code signing has
not been confirmed to be valid. Get a valid code signing.>
<Cannot install this license because the specified application
and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the
license file again.>
<The specified file is not system application. Check the file.>
<Cannot install this license because the number of license
file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact
your service representative.>
<Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try
to specify the file again.>
<To install the specified application, a license file
must be installed at the same time. Specify a
license file.>
<The following information in the specified
application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate
information>>
<The following information is missing in file for the
specified application. Check the file. <Missing
information>>
<The specified application does not support this
device.>
<The specified license does not match this
device. Specify an installable license.>
<Cannot install this application because an applet
included in the specified application has exceeded
the area that can be displayed in the device
panel.>
<The specified file is an update file. Stop the
application that you want update and then install
the file.>
<The specified file is an update file for a login
service that is currently set. Switch to another
login service, restart the device, and then install
the file.>
<Cannot install this application because storage
space has been exceeded. Uninstall other
applications and then try to install it again.>
<Could not cancel installation. Installation has
been successfully completed.>
<The process is canceled because the system
has been shut down. Restart the system, and then
perform the process again.>
<Cannot install the application or license because
another application is being installed, or the
firmware being updated. Please wait a moment
and then try again.>
<Error: <Error Details>>
Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the application. Get a
distributable software.
Problem The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start
this application after stopping other applications.
Problem
The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the
number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (five applets), so the
application cannot be launched.
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page
㻤㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the
system which includes an applet, and then restart the application.
Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors,
disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>
Problem The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be
available to be allocated.
Action Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time.
The name listed in the file for the application and the applet name to register with Applet Viewer
Service are different. Check the file.
Problem The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the
Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application file.
Action Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application file, contact the application developer.
The following login services cannot be uninstalled:
- The currently set login service
- Login services that will be enabled after the device is restarted
- Default Authentication login services
The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the device is restarted.
Problem The currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the machine, and the
Default Authentication login service cannot be uninstalled.
Action
Do not uninstall the currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the
machine, or the Default Authentication login service. To uninstall the currently set login service, uninstall it
after restarting the machine.
The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the
path again.
Problem The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect.
Action Specify the file path correctly.
The manifest is not listed in the specified file. Check the file.
Problem A manifest does not exist for the file specified as the application file.
Action This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect.
Action Specify the file path correctly.
The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check
the file.
Problem Either the content of the files specified as application files is not correct or information is missing.
This application file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the
㻤㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action application developer or the application support help desk.
The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the
file.
Problem Either the content of the files specified as license files is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been confirmed to be valid. Get a valid
code signing.
Problem 1 Cannot confirm that there is a valid code signature inside the application file.
Action Perform the correct code signing operation for the application.
Problem 2 The file may have been altered.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to
specify a path for the license file again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the specified license file does not correspond to the specified
application.
Action Specify the license file that corresponds to the application.
The specified file is not system application. Check the file.
Problem The specified file is not system application. It cannot be installed from the [Enhanced System Application
Management] page.
Action Install it from the [Install MEAP Application] page.
Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has
exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license file cannot be installed because the number of license file ID information logs contained in the
license file exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again.
Problem License files that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already
been installed.
Action Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file.
To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a
license file.
Problem You cannot install the application unless you specify the license file that corresponds to the application at
the same time.
㻤㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action Specify the corresponding license file when specifying the application, and then install them.
The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate
information>
Problem 1 <Inaccurate information> in the application file cannot be recognized as correct information.
Action Contact the application developer or the application support help desk.
Problem 2 If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specifications, the application's MEAP specification values
and the printer's MEAP specification values do not match.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing
information>
Problem The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application.
Action Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the application developer or the application
support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>.
The specified application does not support this device.
Problem Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model.
Action Specify an application that supports this printer.
The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License files contain the serial number information of printers in which the license file can be installed. The
specified license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number information.
Action Specify a license file that matches the serial number of this printer.
Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specified application has exceeded
the area that can be displayed in the device panel.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application
exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer.
Action Install an application that contains applets that support this printer.
The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the
file.
Problem The specified application file is a file for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary
to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.
Action Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.
The specified file is an update file for a login service that is currently set. Switch to another login
service, restart the device, and then install the file.
Problem Although the specified application file is an update file for the login service that is currently set, it cannot
update a login service that has already started.
㻤㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action To install the update file for the login service, start another login service, and then install the update file.
Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall other
applications and then try to install it again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity.
Action Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license file, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system, and then
perform the process again.
Problem The installation could not be completed because it conflicted with a system shutdown.
Action Restart the printer and perform the install again.
Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed, or the
firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because
the firmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the application.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
㻤㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J7
<The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to
specify the path again.>
<The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is
missing. Check the file.>
<The specified switch license file cannot be used to delete the
license file ID log. Try to specify the path again.>
<The specified license is already installed. Installed license file
information cannot be displayed.>
<Cannot perform the operation because another application is
being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a
moment and then try again.>
<The old password is incorrect.>
<The new password is incorrect. Enter the
password with 8 to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.>
<The new password and password to
confirm do not match.>
<Error: <Error Details>>
The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.
Problem The file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect.
Action Specify the file path correctly.
The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.
Problem 1 The content of the file is not correct. (A file other than a license file was specified.)
Action Check to make sure that the specified file is a license file.
Problem 2 Information is missing from the file.
Action Check the content of the file.
The specified switch license file cannot be used to delete the license file ID log. Try to specify the
path again.
Problem The specified file is not a switch license file for deleting license file ID logs.
Action Try specifying the file path for the switch license for deleting license file ID logs.
The specified license is already installed. Installed license file information cannot be displayed.
Problem Information about license files that have already been installed in this printer cannot be displayed.
Action Specify another license file.
Cannot perform the operation because another application is being installed, or the firmware being
updated.
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license file information cannot be
displayed because the firmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before displaying the license information.
The old password is incorrect.
Problem The text string entered as the current password is different from the current password.
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages
㻤㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Action Enter the correct password.
The new password is incorrect. Enter the password with 8 to 32 single-byte alphanumeric
characters.
Problem The new password has under 8 characters or more than 33 characters. Illegal characters that cannot be
used in passwords have been used.
Action Enter a new password of between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9).
The new password and password to confirm do not match.
Problem The password cannot be changed because the new password and the confirmation password do not
match.
Action Enter a new password and the same text string as the confirmation password.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
㻤㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J8
<Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications
because it is in use by currently running applications.Stop the following
applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and then
delete the setting information. <Application Name>>
<Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error
occurred.>
Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications because it is in use by currently
running applications.
Stop the following applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and then delete the
setting information.
<Application Name>
Problem
The application is in one of the following states.
Started
Starting
Stopping
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button, bring the applications corresponding to the error
message to other state than "Started," "Starting" or "Stopping," and then try deletion again.
Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the setting information could not be deleted.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information
Management] Page
㻤㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0J9
<Cannot download application logs because application logs
do not exist.>
<Could not download application logs because an error
occurred.>
<Could not delete application logs because an
error occurred.>
Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist.
Problem The application log does not exist.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Could not download application logs because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be downloaded.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Could not delete application logs because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be deleted.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page
㻤㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JA
<Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by
another user.>
Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.
Problem The application for the attempted operation does not exist.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Other Errors
㻤㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JC
Printer Unit Problems
Printing Cannot Be Performed
The Printer Takes a Long Time to Start the Print Job
You Cannot Turn the Printer ON
All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off
Driver Problems
You Cannot Install the Printer Driver
You Cannot Uninstall the Printer Driver
The Printer Driver Settings Cannot Be Changed
"Profiles" Cannot Be Selected or Edited
The Status of the Paper Feeder Cannot Be Obtained Automatically
Paper Jams
Paper Jams
Error Display
The Message Indicator Is On
A Message Appears in the Control Panel
Printout Problems
Poor Printout Results
Other Problems
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
Troubleshooting
㻤㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JE
The solutions for when printing cannot be performed vary depending on your environment. See the solutions according to
your environment.
If You Are Using the Printer by Direct Connection
If the printer is connected by a USB cable
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)"
If the printer is connected by a LAN cable
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)"
If You Are Using the Printer in the Print Server Environment
If your computer is the print server "Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)"
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)"
If your computer is a client computer "Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server)"
Printing Cannot Be Performed
㻤㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JF
If you cannot print when the printer is connected to the computer by a USB cable, check the problem following the
questions below.
NOTE
For Macintosh users
This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example.
For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide."
For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
<Question 1> Is the printer turned ON?
Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned on.
ON To <Question 2>
OFF Turn the printer ON.
Cannot be turned ON "You Cannot Turn the Printer ON"
<Question 2> Check the indicators on the printer unit.
The (Ready) indicator is on. To <Question 3>
The (Ready) indicator is blinking. The printer is warming up. Please wait a moment.
The (Message) indicator is on. "The Message Indicator Is On"
The (Job) indicator is on. The printer is operating. Please wait a moment.
If the printer does not perform printing for a while, perform the print
data output or soft reset.
"Canceling a Job"
The (Job) indicator is blinking.
The Paper Source indicator is blinking. It is out of paper. Load paper.
"Paper Loading and Output"
Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)
㻤㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Question 3> Check the (Online) indicator.
The (Online) indicator is on. To <Question 4>
The (Online) indicator is off.
The printer is offline.
Place it online.
"Online and Offline"
<Question 4> Can you print Configuration Page?
"Checking the Printer Settings"
Printable To <Question 5>
Not printable If an error message is displayed, solve the problem following the message.
"A Message Appears in the Control Panel"
<Question 5> Is the USB cable connected properly?
Connected
Try the following points.
If you are using a hub, connect the printer to the computer directly.
If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with the short one.
If you have another USB cable, use it.
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 6>.
㻤㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Unconnected Connect the cable properly.
"Connecting to a Computer"
<Question 6> Check the settings for [Interface Selection].
"[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)"
[USB] is set to [On]. To <Question 7>
[USB] is set to [Off]. Set it to [On].
<Question 7> Can you print a test page in Windows?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Printable There is no problem with the printer and driver.
Check the printing preferences in the application.
Not printable To <Question 8>
<Question 8> Is the port to be used selected correctly?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Selected To <Question 9>
Not selected Select the correct port.
㻤㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The port to be used cannot be found.
Install the printer driver again.
For details on the procedure for installing and uninstalling the printer
driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation
Guide", see "Installation."
<Question 9> Is bi-directional communication enabled?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Enabled To <Question 10>
Not enabled Enable bi-directional communication and restart the computer and printer.
<Question 10> Try the following points.
Make resident software invalid including security software.
If any other devices are connected to your computer by USB connection, disconnect those unneeded.
If drivers or software of any other devices (USB connection) is installed on your computer, uninstall those unneeded.
Connect the USB cable to another USB port on your computer.
Connect the printer to another computer with a USB cable.
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 11>.
<Question 11> Install the printer driver again.
For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 12>.
<Question 12> Uninstall the USB class driver, and then install the printer driver again.
For details on the procedure for uninstalling the USB class driver and installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver
Installation Guide" on the User Software CD-ROM.
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
If printing does not work, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
㻤㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JH
If you cannot print when the printer is connected to the computer by a LAN cable, check the problem following the
questions below.
NOTE
For Macintosh users
This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example.
For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide."
For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
<Question 1> Is the printer turned ON?
Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned on.
ON To <Question 2>
OFF Turn the printer ON.
Cannot be turned ON "You Cannot Turn the Printer ON"
<Question 2> Check the indicators on the printer unit.
The (Ready) indicator is on. To <Question 3>
The (Ready) indicator is blinking. The printer is warming up. Please wait a moment.
The (Message) indicator is on. "The Message Indicator Is On"
The (Job) indicator is on. The printer is operating. Please wait a moment.
If the printer does not perform printing for a while, perform the print
data output or soft reset.
"Canceling a Job"
The (Job) indicator is blinking.
The Paper Source indicator is blinking. Load paper.
"Paper Loading and Output"
Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)
㻤㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Question 3> Check the (Online) indicator.
The (Online) indicator is on. To <Question 4>
The (Online) indicator is off.
The printer is offline.
Place it online.
"Online and Offline"
<Question 4> Can you print NETWORK STATUS PRINT?
"Checking the Printer Settings"
Printable To <Question 5>
Not printable If an error message is displayed, solve the problem following the message.
"A Message Appears in the Control Panel"
<Question 5> Is the LAN cable connected properly?
Connected To <Question 6>
Unconnected Connect the cable properly.
"Connecting to a Computer"
<Question 6> Check the indicators on the network interface.
㻤㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
The ACT indicator is on. To <Question 7>
The LNK indicator is on.
All the indicators are off. "All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off"
<Question 7> Check the settings for [Interface Selection].
"[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)"
[Network] is set to [On]. To <Question 8>
[Network] is set to [Off]. Set it to [On].
<Question 8> Can you print a test page in Windows?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Printable There is no problem with the printer and driver.
Check the printing preferences in the application.
Not printable To <Question 9>
<Question 9> Which network protocol are you using?
TCP/IP To <Question 10>
NetWare or SMB To <Question 14>
AppleTalk To <Question 17>
㻤㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Question 10> Is the IP address set properly?
Check if the IP address written on Network Status Print printed in <Question 4> matches the one configured for the port of
your PC.
"Checking the Printer Settings" "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Yes, they are matched. To <Question 11>
No, they are not matched. Configure the printer to a static IP address.
"Setting the Printer to a Static IP Address"
<Question 11> Is the port to be used selected correctly?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Selected To <Question 12>
Not selected Select the correct port.
The port to be used cannot be found. Create a port.
"Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)"
The IP address was changed.
<Question 12> Check the following points.
The printer is specified as the default printer.
The TCP/IP protocol is running.
The users who can print are not restricted.
"Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings"
"Restricting the Users Who Can Access"
㻤㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 13>.
<Question 13> Try the following points.
Change the printing protocol to LPR.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Enable the LPR byte count.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Shorten the name of the file to be printed.
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 19>.
<Question 14> Is NetWare or SMB set properly?
When using NetWare
"Configuring NetWare"
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
When using SMB
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
If you are using the DHCP server and WINS server, check if the servers are linked properly.
NetWare or SMB is set properly.
Try the following point.
Set [Network Delay Time] longer than usual.
"Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time"
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 15>.
NetWare or SMB is not set properly. Set NetWare or SMB properly.
<Question 15> Is the IP address set properly?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
SMB printing does not support IP v. 6.
The IP address is set properly. To <Question 16>.
The IP address is not set properly. Set the IP address properly.
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
<Question 16> Is the port to be used selected correctly?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
The port is selected correctly. To <Question 19>.
The port is not selected properly.
Or
The settings for NetWare or SMB are changed.
Create the appropriate port.
When using NetWare
"Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) "
When using SMB
"Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) "
<Question 17> Is AppleTalk set properly?
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
In particular, make sure that the zone in which the printer exists is configured properly in [Zone].
㻤㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Set To <Question 18>
Not set Set AppleTalk properly.
<Question 18> Check the following points.
The printer destination is set properly.
AppleTalk is available.
For details on the procedure for setting the printer destination, see "Driver Guide."
For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
Set To <Question 19>
Not set Set them properly.
<Question 19> Connect the printer and computer directly with the cross-type* LAN cable.
*This is a LAN cable which is used to connect a printer and computer directly without a hub (LAN network).
If printing does not work or if you cannot prepare a cross-type LAN cable, proceed to <Question 20>.
<Question 20> Install the printer driver again.
For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 21>.
<Question 21> Can you print from another computer (LAN connection)?
Printable Make resident software invalid including security software.
Not printable Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
㻤㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JJ
If you cannot print when the printer is used via the print server, check the problem following the questions below.
NOTE
For Macintosh users
This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example.
For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide."
For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
<Question 1> Is the printer turned ON?
Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned on.
ON To <Question 2>
OFF Turn the printer ON.
Cannot be turned ON "You Cannot Turn the Printer ON"
<Question 2> Check the indicators on the printer unit.
The (Ready) indicator is on. To <Question 3>
The (Ready) indicator is blinking. The printer is warming up. Please wait a moment.
The (Message) indicator is on. "The Message Indicator Is On"
The (Job) indicator is on. The printer is operating. Please wait a moment.
If the printer does not perform printing for a while, perform the print
data output or soft reset.
"Canceling a Job"
The (Job) indicator is blinking.
The Paper Source indicator is blinking. Load paper.
"Paper Loading and Output"
Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server)
㻤㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Question 3> Check the (Online) indicator.
The (Online) indicator is on. To <Question 4>
The (Online) indicator is off.
The printer is offline.
Place it online.
"Online and Offline"
<Question 4> Can you print Configuration Page?
"Checking the Printer Settings"
Printable To <Question 5>
Not printable If an error message is displayed, solve the problem following the message.
"A Message Appears in the Control Panel"
<Question 5> Is the printer connected to the print server properly?
Connected To <Question 6>
Unconnected Connect them properly.
"Connecting to a Computer"
<Question 6> Can your computer be connected to the print server or the shared printer?
㻤㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Can be connected To <Question 7>
Cannot be connected "The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found"
"The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed"
<Question 7> Check the following points.
The print server is connected to the network properly.
The additional driver (alternate driver) is updated properly.
Printing can be performed from the print server.
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 8>.
<Question 8> Can you print a test page in Windows?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Printable There is no problem with the printer and driver.
Check the printing preferences in the application.
Not printable To <Question 9>
<Question 9> Is the printer on the print server displayed on the network?
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
Displayed To <Question 10>
㻤㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Not displayed Ask your network administrator about the problem.
<Question 10> Install the printer driver again.
For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 11>.
<Question 11> Can another client print?
Printable Make resident software invalid including security software.
Not printable Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
㻤㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JK
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The LAN cable is not connected properly.
Solution Connect the print server to the client computer with the LAN cable properly.
<Cause 2> The print server has not been started up.
Solution Start up the print server.
<Cause 3> The printer is not specified as a shared printer.
Solution
Specify the printer as a shared printer.
For details on the procedure for specifying the printer as a shared printer, see "Printer Driver Installation
Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
<Cause 4> The user does not have permission to access the print server or printer.
Solution Ask your network administrator to change the user permissions.
<Cause 5> [Network discovery] is not enabled. (Windows Vista, 7, and Server 2008)
Solution
Perform either of the following procedures.
1. From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel].
2. Click [View network status and tasks].
3. Set [Network discovery] to [On].
1. From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel].
2. Click [View network status and tasks].
3. Click [Change advanced sharing settings].
4. Specify [Turn on network discovery] in [Network discovery].
1. From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel].
2. Double-click [Network and Sharing Center].
3. Set [Network discovery] to [On].
The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found
㻤㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JL
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The user of the computer to be used is not registered, or the password is not
specified.
Solution Register the user of the computer to be used or specify the password on the print server.
For more details, ask your network administrator.
<Cause 2> The path to the network is not correct.
Solution 1
Check printers in the print server.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
If the icon for this printer is not displayed
Ask your network administrator about the problem.
If the icon for this printer is displayed
You can install the printer driver by performing either of the following procedures and following the
instructions on the screen.
Double-clicking the icon for this printer
Dragging and dropping the icon for this printer in the printer folder
Solution 2 If you want to specify the network path directly, check if the network path is specified correctly as "\\the
print server name (the computer name of the print server)\the printer name."
The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed
㻤㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JR
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The printer is cooling down to maintain print quality. (Especially after narrow paper
is printed)
Solution Wait a moment. The printer automatically cools down the inside. After cooling is completed, the printer
resumes printing.
<Cause 2> This problem may occur in some applications depending on the processing type of
the print data. (Windows XP/Server 2003)
Solution
If you are using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, performing the following procedure may be able to solve the
problem.
UFR II Printer Driver
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Change the [EMF Spooling] setting.
PCL Printer Driver
See Help of the PCL printer driver.
The Printer Takes a Long Time to Start the Print Job
㻤㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JS
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The power plug is unplugged from the AC power outlet.
Solution Plug the power plug in the AC power outlet.
<Cause 2> The printer is plugged to an extension cord or multiple power strip.
Solution Plug the power plug directly in the AC power outlet.
<Cause 3> The breakers have tripped.
Solution Reset the breakers on the switch board.
<Cause 4> There is a break in the power cord.
Solution If the printer can be turned ON after replacing the power cord with one that is of the same type, and then
purchase a new power cord and replace the broken one.
You Cannot Turn the Printer ON
㻤㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JU
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The LAN cable is not connected properly or broken.
Solution 1 Remove the LAN cable once, and then connect it again.
Solution 2 Replace the LAN cable with another one, and then connect it.
<Cause 2> The cable is connected to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub.
Solution 1 Connect the LAN cable to the port on the hub with an " X " mark.
Solution 2 If the hub has an UP-LINK (cascade) switch, switch to " X."
<Cause 3> A cross LAN cable is being used.
Solution 1 Replace the cable with a straight LAN cable.
Solution 2 Connect the cross LAN cable to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub. If the hub has an UP-LINK
(cascade) switch, switch to the " = " side.
<Cause 4> Cannot communicate with the hub.
Solution 1 Make sure that the power of the hub is on.
Solution 2
Specify the communication settings for the print server according to the transmission speed of the
connected hub.
"Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode"
<Cause 5> The hardware of the printer is in an abnormal condition.
Solution Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to request service.
All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off
㻤㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JW
NOTE
For Macintosh users
This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example.
For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide."
For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
If a problem occurs during the installation
Select a problem during the installation from any of the following.
Connection with a USB cable
"The Printer Is Not Recognized Automatically"
Connection with a LAN cable
"The Printer Cannot Be Searched For"
Connection via the print server
(Client)
"The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found"
"The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed"
If the printer driver is not installed properly
Perform the following procedure.
Solution 1
Install the printer driver again.
For details on the procedure for uninstalling or installing the printer driver,
see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide",
see "Installation."
Solution 2
(Only when connecting with USB)
Uninstall the USB class driver, and then install the printer driver again.
For details on the procedure for uninstalling the USB class driver and
installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide",
see "Installation."
You Cannot Install the Printer Driver
㻤㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JX
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The printer is not turned ON.
Solution Turn the printer ON.
<Cause 2> The USB cable is not connected properly.
Solution Make sure that the printer and computer are properly connected with the USB cable.
"Connecting to a Computer"
<Cause 3> The USB cable was already connected and the printer was turned ON before the
printer driver was installed.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. Turn the printer OFF.
2. Disconnect the USB cable.
3. Connect the USB cable again.
4. While the following screen appears, turn the printer ON.
<Cause 4> An inappropriate USB cable is being used.
Solution
Use a USB cable that is appropriate for the USB interface environment of the printer and has the following
symbol.
The following is the USB interface environment of this printer.
Hi-Speed USB
USB
<Cause 5> The USB class driver is installed.
Solution
Uninstall the USB class driver.
For details, see the following item in "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
"Appendix" - "If You Cannot Install a USB Class Driver"
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
The Printer Is Not Recognized Automatically
㻤㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0JY
If the printer cannot be searched for when you are in the process of installing the printer driver, perform the following
procedure.
1
Make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly, and the printer is turned ON.
"Connecting to a Computer"
2
Click [Search Again] to search again for the printer on the network.
Make a search again for the printer on the network.
Install the printer driver by following the procedure for automatically searching for a printer on a network described in the
“Printer Driver Installation Guide.”
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation."
If the printer cannot be searched for (no devices are displayed) even by performing the above
procedure
<Solution>
1. Set [Interface Selection] in [Network] to [On].
"[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)"
2. Set the IP address.
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
"Setting IP v. 6"
3. Recover your printer from Sleep mode.
"Sleep Mode"
The Printer Cannot Be Searched For
㻤㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K0
Perform the following procedure.
Solution 1
Use Uninstaller supplied with User Software CD-ROM to uninstall the
printer driver.
For details on the procedure for uninstalling the printer driver, see the
"Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide",
see "Installation."
Solution 2
(Only when connecting with USB)
Uninstall the USB class driver.
For details on the procedure for uninstalling the USB class driver, see the
"Printer Driver Installation Guide."
For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide",
see "Installation."
You Cannot Uninstall the Printer Driver
㻤㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K1
If [Spooling at Host] (whether the print data are processed in the computer) is set to [Disabled], you cannot change the
driver settings because some options are unavailable.
To change the settings, set [Spooling at Host] to [Auto] using the following procedure.
1
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2
Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-
up menu.
3
Change the setting for [Spooling at Host].
(1) Display the [Device Settings] tab.
(2) Select [Auto] for [Spooling at Host].
The Printer Driver Settings Cannot Be Changed
㻤㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you cannot change the setting
You need administrative rights to change the setting.
Contact your system administrator.
4
Click [OK].
㻤㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K2
When the [Allow Profile Selection] and [Allow Setting Edition] check boxes are cleared, selecting and editing a "Profile" are
restricted.
To select or edit a "Profile", select the check box using the following procedure.
1
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2
Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-
up menu.
3
Change the settings for [Define Document Property].
(1) Display the [Profile] tab.
(2) Select the [Allow Profile Selection] and [Allow Setting Edition] check boxes.
"Profiles" Cannot Be Selected or Edited
㻤㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If you cannot change the setting
You need administrative rights to change the setting.
Contact your system administrator.
4
Click [OK].
㻤㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K3
If you cannot specify the settings for Drawer 2, 3 in [Paper Source] in the printer driver, specify the status of the paper
feeder using the following procedure.
NOTE
For Macintosh users
This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example.
For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide."
For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide."
1
Open the printer folder.
"Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"
2
Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-
up menu.
3
Obtain the status of the paper feeder.
(1) Display the [Device Settings] tab.
(2) Click [Get Device Status].
(3) Click [Yes] to obtain the status of the paper feeder.
The Status of the Paper Feeder Cannot Be Obtained Automatically
㻤㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If the status of the paper feeder is not obtained
Remove the paper feeder once, and then install it again.
If the status of the paper feeder cannot be obtained even by installing it again, see the following and make sure that
the printer and computer can communicate with each other.
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)"
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)"
"Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server)"
4
Click [OK].
㻤㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K4
Before removing jammed paper, see "Attention (Paper Jams)."
When a paper jam occurs, the printer beeps, displaying the message <Paper is jammed.> in the display.
This section describes the procedure for when [Animated Instruction] is set to [On] (default setting).
If [Animated Instruction] is set to [Off], the following screen is not displayed.
Messages appear one at a time. Confirm all of them.
As the messages disappear when the cover is open, take a note of them if required.
Remove the jammed paper according to the displayed message.
Paper Jam Area Message Clearance Procedure
(1) Multi-purpose
tray <MP Tray area> "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)"
(2) Drawer 1 <Drawer 1 area> "Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
(3) Drawer 2*,
Drawer 3*
*Only when
the paper
feeder
(optional) is
installed
<Drawer 2 area>
<Drawer 3 area> "Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
(4) Duplex unit area <2-sided unit area> "Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)"
(5) Output tray/Sub-
output tray <Sub/output tray area> "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)"
Paper Jams
㻤㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(6) Inside the front
cover <Front cover> "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)"
Cleaning the feed roller may prevent frequent paper jams.
"Cleaning the Feed Roller"
When you use thin paper (60 to 74 g/m²), setting [Paper Type] to [Plain L] and [Special Print Mode C] to [On] may prevent
frequent paper jams.
"Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
[Special Print Mode C] can also be set using the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
㻤㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K5
Before removing the jammed paper, see "Important Safety Instructions."
CAUTION
Do not take your hands off the transport guide.
Do not take your hands off the transport guide until it moves back to its original position when tilting the transport guide
toward you. The transport guide may snap back to its original position, and this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Leave the printer ON when removing the jammed paper.
If the power is turned OFF, the data being printed will be deleted.
Do not remove the jammed paper forcefully.
Removing jammed paper with excess force may cause the paper to tear or damage the inside of the printer. Remove the
paper by pulling it gently.
If the paper is torn
Remove all remaining pieces of paper.
Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (A) or the electrical contacts (B).
This may result in damage to the printer.
Do not touch the transfer roller (C).
Print quality may deteriorate.
Do not touch the feed rollers (D).
This may result in damage to the printer or a printer error.
Attention (Paper Jams)
㻤㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻤㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K6
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper.
1
Press [ ].
2
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.
If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but perform a procedure for another area which is
displayed in a message.
3
Close the multi-purpose tray.
4
Open the front cover while pressing the open button.
Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)
㻤㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Close the front cover.
ĺThe message disappears, and the printer is ready to print.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as
this may damage the printer.
If a message does not disappear
Paper may be jammed in another area. Check another area also and remove the paper.
(1) "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)"
(2) "Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
(3) "Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)"
(4) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)"
(5) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)"
If the message does not disappear even after removing the paper, check that the front cover is closed firmly.
㻤㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K7
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper.
1
Press [ ].
2
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
3
Pull out the paper drawer.
If the paper feeder is installed, pull out the paper drawer of the paper feeder also.
4
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.
If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 5 and perform the clearing
procedure for another area which is displayed in the message.
Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)
㻤㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Set the paper drawer in the printer.
If the paper feeder is installed, insert the paper drawer of the paper feeder also.
6
Open the front cover while pressing the open button.
7
Close the front cover.
ĺThe message disappears, and the printer is ready to print.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as
this may damage the printer.
If a message does not disappear
Paper may be jammed in another area. Check another area also and remove the paper.
(1) "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)"
(2) "Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
(3) "Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)"
(4) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)"
(5) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)"
If the message does not disappear even after removing the paper, check that the front cover is closed firmly.
㻤㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K8
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper.
1
Press [ ].
2
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
3
Pull out the paper drawer.
4
Press the green lock release switch (A) to open the duplex print transport guide.
Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)
㻤㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but perform the clearing procedure for
another area which is displayed in the message.
6
Close the duplex print transport guide.
Close it by pressing the both sides firmly.
7
Set the paper drawer in the printer.
8
Open the front cover while pressing the open button.
㻤㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
9
Close the front cover.
ĺThe message disappears, and the printer is ready to print.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as
this may damage the printer.
If a message does not disappear
Paper may be jammed in another area. Check another area also and remove the paper.
(1) "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)"
(2) "Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
(3) "Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)"
(4) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)"
(5) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)"
If the message does not disappear even after removing the paper, check that the front cover is closed firmly.
㻤㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0K9
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper.
1
Press [ ].
2
Open the sub-output tray.
Open it completely as shown in the figure.
3
Remove the paper by pulling it in the direction of arrow.
If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 4.
4
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.
If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 5 and perform the clearing
procedure for another area which is displayed in the message.
Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)
㻤㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Close the sub-output tray.
ĺThe message disappears, and the printer is ready to print.
If a message does not disappear
Paper may be jammed in another area. Check another area also and remove the paper.
(1) "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)"
(2) "Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
(3) "Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)"
(4) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)"
(5) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)"
If the message does not disappear even after removing the paper, check that the front cover is closed firmly.
㻤㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KA
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper.
1
Press [ ].
2
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
3
Open the front cover while pressing the open button.
4
Remove the toner cartridge.
Immediately place the removed toner cartridge into the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.
For details on handling the toner cartridge, see "Attention (Toner Cartridge)."
Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)
㻤㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Holding the green tab (A) at the back, tilt the transfer guide at the back toward you.
Do not take your hands off the transfer guide until it moves back to its original position in Step 7.
6
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.
Remove the jammed paper as horizontally as possible to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.
If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 7.
7
Move the transfer guide back to its original position slowly.
㻤㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
8
Holding the green tab (B) at the front, lift the transfer guide at the front.
Do not take your hands off the transfer guide until it moves back to its original position in Step 10.
9
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.
Remove the jammed paper as horizontally as possible to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.
10
Move the transfer guide back to its original position slowly.
11
Install the toner cartridge.
Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the
toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guides inside the printer.
㻤㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
12
Close the front cover.
ĺThe message disappears, and the printer is ready to print.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as
this may damage the printer.
If a message does not disappear
Paper may be jammed in another area. Check another area also and remove the paper.
(1) "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)"
(2) "Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
(3) "Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)"
(4) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)"
(5) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)"
If the message does not disappear even after removing the paper, check that the front cover is closed firmly.
㻤㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KC
Cleaning the feed roller may prevent frequent paper jams.
If you have any questions on how to clean the feed roller, or if you feel uncomfortable cleaning the feed roller by yourself,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
IMPORTANT
Do not use cleaning agents or detergents.
When wiping the feed roller, use a cloth dampened with water and well wrung out. Do not use cleaning agents or
detergents, including ones containing grease or oil.
Do not touch the rubber pad of the feed roller directly with your hand.
When cleaning the feed roller, make sure not to touch the rubber pad directly with your hand.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
If the paper feeder is installed, pull out the paper drawer of the paper feeder also.
2
Pull the feed roller in the direction of the arrow.
Make sure not to touch the rubber pad.
3
Remove the feed roller.
(1) While pushing the feed roller to the left, remove it as shown in the figure.
Cleaning the Feed Roller
㻤㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
(2) While pulling the feed roller down, remove it from the compartment.
4
Clean the feed roller
Making sure not to touch the rubber pad directly with your hand, wipe the feed roller with a cloth dampened with water and
well wrung out.
5
Install the feed roller.
(1) Insert the left shaft of the feed roller.
(2) Insert the right shaft while pushing the feed roller in the direction (1).
At this time, do not apply excessive force to the feed roller.
IMPORTANT
Hold the right shaft when installing the feed roller.
Hold the right shaft between your fingers when installing the feed roller. Do not hold the left shaft.
㻤㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
6
Set the paper drawer in the printer.
If the paper feeder is installed, insert the paper drawer of the paper feeder also.
㻤㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KE
When the (Message) indicator is on, implement the following solutions.
The Service Call <Ennn-nnnn> Appears in the Display ("n" Represents an Alphanumeric Character)
A Message Appears in the Display
The Display Is Turned Off
The Service Call <Ennn-nnnn> Appears in the Display ("n" Represents an Alphanumeric
Character)
Implement the following solutions according to the displayed message.
Message Cause Solution
("n" represents an alphanumeric
character.)
A problem
occurred in the
fixing unit.
Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed",
and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
("n" represents an alphanumeric
character.)
A problem
occurred inside the
printer.
Following the procedure in "If a Service Error Is Displayed",
cycle the power of the printer.
If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed
1
Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer.
<How to disconnect the cable or cord>
The Message Indicator Is On
㻤㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
USB cable*(2) Turn the computer off.
(3) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
LAN cable*(4) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet.
(6) Disconnect the cord from the printer.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
IMPORTANT
Do not turn ON the printer again.
A fixing unit error is displayed. Do not turn ON the printer after turning it OFF.
2
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
If you are not sure what the problem is, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
If a Service Error Is Displayed
1
Turn the printer OFF, wait for 10 seconds or longer, and then turn it ON again.
If the message does not reappear, the printer is ready.
If the message reappears, you need to request service.
Follow the procedure below, and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer to request service.
2
Note down the error code displayed in the display.
3
Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer.
㻤㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<How to disconnect the cable or cord>
USB cable*(2) Turn the computer off.
(3) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
LAN cable*(4) Disconnect the cable from the printer.
Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet.
(6) Disconnect the cord from the printer.
*Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment.
4
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to request service.
When contacting your Canon dealer, please report also the error code which you noted down in Step 2.
If you are not sure what the problem is, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
A Message Appears in the Display
See the following and solve the problem according to the message.
"A Message Appears in the Control Panel"
The Display Is Turned Off
The printer has entered Sleep Mode while it is offline.
Release Sleep Mode.
"Sleep Mode"
Place the printer online.
㻤㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KF
If an error is occurring for some reason during printing, a message appears in the display of the control panel. Perform
solutions according to the displayed message.
Service call message
It is an error state in which the printer cannot print.
Warning message It is a warning state in which the printer can print, but some solution is required.
Depending on the message type, the message does not appear if [Show
Warnings] is set to [Off].
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
Error message
It is an error state in which the printer cannot print.
Mark Description
<Auto Error Skip>
For a message with this mark, perform the following procedure according to the situation.
When you want to skip an error (error skip) and continue to print
1. Press [ ] ( : Online) to skip the error. (Printing is continued.)
2. If print data is missing or is not printed properly, print again.
If [Auto Continue] is set to [On], you can skip the error automatically.
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
If you want to cancel a job
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Solve the problem according to the displayed message (this item).
3. Press [ ] ( : Online) and print again.
NOTE
If multiple warning states are occurring at the same time
Warning messages are displayed alternately.
If an error state and warning state are occurring at the same time
A warning message is not displayed.
If a toner-related message appears
On how to act if a toner-related message such as <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.> or <1G Change toner
cartridge recommended.> appears, see "Toner Cartridge Replacement."
A Message Appears in the Control Panel
㻤㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Service Call Message
"Ennn-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)"
"E001-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)"
"E003-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)"
"E004-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)"
Warning Message
"1F Output tray is full."
"80 Do not turn the main power OFF."
"BT Clock error."
"EM E-Mail access error."
"EM POP3 server error."
"IE An unknown error has occurred."
"IE Cannot analyze the certificate."
"IE Change the password."
"IE Check auth. settings"
"IE No reply from the destination."
"IE Set necessary authentication info."
"IE Set the correct authentication info."
"IE The certificate has expired."
"IE The certificate is incorrect."
"NW Competing IP add. found on the network."
Error Message
"55 SD Card error. <Auto Error Skip>"
"56 SD Card error."
"An error occurred while receiving. <Auto Error
Skip>"
"Cannot decode data. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Cannot decode PDF data."
"Cannot feed paper."
"Cannot perform 2-Sided Printing. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Cannot print with the specified resolution. <Auto
Error Skip>"
"Cannot print. Reg. Table is full. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Cannot read PDF data."
"Cannot receive PDF data. Set the receivable size.
<Auto Error Skip>"
"Cannot start printing because job is restricted.
<Auto Error Skip>"
"Cannot store. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Cannot verify. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Check paper size."
"Close the tray./Close the sub-output tray."
"Close XXXX cover. (XXXX shows the cover name)"
"IEEE802.1X error. Set the necessary auth.
information."
"Image browse data error."
"Image data error."
"Insert Drawer n ("n" represents a number.)"
"Insert toner cartridge."
"Key management file is corrupt or deleted."
"Load paper."
"Not enough download memory. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Not enough memory for PDF processing."
"Not enough memory for XPS processing. <Auto
Error Skip>"
"Not enough spool memory. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Not enough system memory. <Auto Error Skip>"
"Not enough work memory. <Auto Error Skip> "
"Output tray is full. Remove paper."
"Paper is jammed."
"PDF error."
"PDF font error."
"PDF print range error."
"Print data version error."
"Set below paper."
"Syntax error. "
"Turn OFF main power. Check options."
"XPS document data error. <Auto Error Skip>"
"XPS font data error. <Auto Error Skip>"
"XPS image data error. <Auto Error Skip>"
"XPS page data error. <Auto Error Skip>"
"XPS print range error. <Auto Error Skip>"
"XPS rendering error."
"XPS unsupported image error. <Auto Error Skip>"
"A4 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric
characters.)"
"A5 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric
characters.)"
"A7 nn ERROR ("nn" represents two-digit
alphanumeric characters.)"
"D7 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric
characters.)"
"D8 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric
characters.)"
"D9 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric
characters.)"
Ennn-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring inside the printer.
Solution Solve the problem following the instructions in "If a Service Error Is Displayed."
㻤㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
E001-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring with the fixing unit of the printer.
Solution Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed" in "The Message Indicator Is On", and then
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
E003-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring with the fixing unit of the printer.
Solution Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed" in "The Message Indicator Is On", and then
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
E004-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring with the fixing unit of the printer.
Solution Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed" in "The Message Indicator Is On", and then
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
1F Output tray is full.
<Cause> The output tray is filled to the limit.
Solution Remove the paper in the output tray.
80 Do not turn the main power OFF.
<Cause> A MEAP application is running.
Solution When the running of the MEAP application stops, the message disappears automatically. Wait until the
message disappears.
BT Clock error.
<Cause> The clock in this printer has a problem.
Solution Though printing is possible as is, logs such as the job histories cannot be recorded correctly. Contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
EM E-Mail access error.
<Cause> The printer could not connect to the POP3 server because an error had occurred in its hard
disk.
Solution Clear the hard disk error on the POP3 server.
EM POP3 server error.
<Cause> The printer could not connect to the POP3/SMTP server when printing e-mails, or the settings
for the POP3/SMTP server are not correct.
Check the error in detail using the Remote UI or Network Status Print.
㻤㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Solution "Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)"
IE An unknown error has occurred.
<Cause> An unknown IEEE802.1X authentication error has occurred.
Solution Restart the printer. If the error message still appears after restarting this printer, contact your local
authorized dealer.
IE Cannot analyze the certificate.
<Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, analysis of the certificate received from the authentication
server failed.
Solution Check the authentication server's certificate.
IE Change the password.
<Cause> The password used for IEEE802.1X authentication has expired.
Solution
Change the password registered in the authentication server, and reset the IEEE802.1X authentication
password.
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
IE Check auth. settings
The printer and the authentication server use different IEEE802.1X authentication systems.
Solution Change IEEE802.1X authentication systems.
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
IE No reply from the destination.
<Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, and error occurred while communicating with the
authentication server.
Solution Check to see if the cable is disconnected.
IE Set necessary authentication info.
<Cause> There is information missing from the IEEE802.1X authentication settings.
Solution Check the IEEE802.1X settings, and reconfigure them.
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
IE Set the correct authentication info.
<Cause> An error was returned from the authentication server because the certificate used for
IEEE802.1X authentication is not correct.
Solution 1 The certificate used for TLS authentication is not correct. Check the certificate, and reconfigure it.
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
㻤㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Solution 2 If the printer's certificate is correct, check the authentication server's CA certificate.
IE The certificate has expired.
<Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, the certificate received from the authentication server
was an expired certificate.
Solution 1 Check the authentication server's certificate.
Solution 2 Check the printer's and the authentication server's time settings.
"Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language"
IE The certificate is incorrect.
<Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, an error occurred as a result of the verification by the CA
certificate of the certificate received from the authentication server .
Solution 1 Check the authentication server's certificate.
Solution 2 Install the CA certificate in the printer.
"Security Settings"
NW Competing IP add. found on the network.
<Cause> The IPv4 address set for the printer overlaps with another host on the network.
Solution Change the printer's IPv4 address and restart.
"Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)"
An error occurred while receiving. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The printer received any unanalyzable data while it is receiving a job, or it timed out.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to cancel printing, and then print again.
Solution 2 A problem may be occurring in the network you are using. Check the status of the network that you are
using.
Cannot decode data. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The printer could not analyze encrypted secured print data.
Solution Perform a soft reset using the Reset menu, and then print again.
Cannot decode PDF data.
<Cause 1> An incorrect password was entered to print the PDF data.
Solution Enter the correct password.
<Cause 2> The PDF data security settings do not permit printing.
Solution Change the settings to permit printing.
㻤㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Cause 3> When you want to print a PDF file linked to a policy server, you cannot access the policy
server.
Solution Check the policy server's power supply and the status of this product, the policy server, and the network.
Cannot feed paper.
<Cause> Paper of the size or type that cannot be fed from the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer is
specified.
Solution 1 If a paper source is specified, press [ ] ( : Feeder Selection), and then set [Paper Source] to [Auto].
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Solution 2 Press [ ] ( : Feeder Selection) to select another paper source.
Solution 3 Load paper appropriate for the paper source.
"Usable Paper"
Solution 4
Specify the following items.
[Standard Paper Size]
[Default Paper Type]
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
Solution 5 Press [ ] ( : Online), and then print from the currently selected paper source. However, this may
result in deterioration in print quality.
Cannot perform 2-Sided Printing. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The printer received 2-sided printing data of paper sizes (including the orientation) or paper
types unavailable for automatic 2-sided printing.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data on each side is printed on two pages.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Change the setting to a paper size or type available for automatic 2-sided printing, and then print
again.
Cannot print with the specified resolution. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The printer cannot process the data because it is too complicated.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. In this case, the printer prints with the image quality level
being lowered.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Set [Resolution] to [600 dpi], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
㻤㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Solution 3
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Set [Gradation Level] to [High 1], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
Solution 4
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Set [Image Refinement] to [Off], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
Cannot print. Reg. Table is full. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The total number of binders inside a single job exceeds 32, or the number of documents inside
a single binder exceeds 80.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data may not be printed properly.
Solution 2 Confirm the data to be printed, and then print again.
Cannot read PDF data.
<Cause> An error has occurred when the PDF data was read.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Print the PDF data in a format which this printer supports again.
Cannot receive PDF data. Set the receivable size. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> There is not sufficient free space to print the PDF file using the direct print function.
Solution 1
Press [ ] ( : Online) to cancel the job. Afterward, perform the following processes (decreasing the
size of the PDF file), and then print again.
Optimizing the PDF file
Dividing the PDF file into multiple files
Solution 2
Send the file again using one of the following methods.
Insert the SD card into the slot and send the file again.
Send the file directly from the USB memory device.
"Installing SD Card "
"Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) "
Cannot start printing because job is restricted. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The specified emulation does not exist.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data may not be printed properly.
㻤㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Solution 2 Set a usable emulation using [Auto Mode Selection].
"[Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options)"
Cannot store. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause 1> [SD Card] in the Control Menu options in the Setup menu is set to [Off].
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. Cancel printing by pressing [ ] ( : Online).
2. Set [SD Card] to [On] and print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
<Cause 2> The number of the jobs exceeded the amount of jobs the printer can store.
Solution 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ ] ( : Online), ignoring the print data.
Solution 2 Delete unnecessary stored jobs.
<Cause 3> There is not sufficient free space on the SD card.
Solution 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ ] ( : Online), ignoring the print data.
Solution 2 Delete unnecessary stored jobs.
<Cause 4> The specified box number is not correct.
Solution Specify the correct box number.
Cannot verify. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause 1> The department ID and password entered for your job did not match the department ID and
password registered on the machine.
Solution Press [ ] ( : Online) to cancel printing, and then print your job again by entering the correct
department ID and password.
<Cause 2> Printing jobs with unknown IDs are disallowed.
Solution Allow print jobs with unknown IDs from the Remote UI.
"Specifying an ID for Each Department "
Check paper size.
<Cause 1> The size of the paper loaded in a paper source is different from the following settings.
Setting for [Output Size] in the [Page Setup] tab in the printer driver
[MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size], [Drawer 2 Size] or [Drawer 3 Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu
Solution
Specify the setting properly.
"Registering the Paper Size"
"Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
㻤㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Cause 2> When the following settings in the [Select Feeder] menu are set to [Mixed Sizes], custom
size paper whose long edges are 215.9 mm or less is loaded in portrait orientation and printed (only
when the UFR II printer driver is used).
[MP Tray Paper Size]
[Drawer 1 Size]
[Drawer 2 Size]
[Drawer 3 Size]
Solution Load the paper in landscape orientation, and then print again.
<Cause 3> When the UFR II printer driver was not used, custom size paper was loaded in landscape
orientation to be printed.
Solution Load the paper in portrait orientation, and then print again.
<Cause 4> [Check Paper Size] in the [Setup] menu ([User Maintenance] options) is set to [On].
Solution Set [Check Paper Size] to [Off], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
Close the tray./Close the sub-output tray.
<Cause> Paper was to be output during automatic 2-sided printing.
Solution Close the sub-output tray. The printer resumes printing.
Close XXXX cover. (XXXX shows the cover name)
<Cause> A cover is open.
Solution Close the cover firmly. If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
IEEE802.1X error. Set the necessary auth. information.
<Cause> There is information missing from the IEEE802.1X authentication settings.
Solution Check the IEEE802.1X settings, and reconfigure them.
"Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication"
Image browse data error.
<Cause> Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data.
Solution This printer cannot print the data. Press [ ] ( : Online) to cancel the job.
Image data error.
<Cause> Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data or JPEG data.
Solution This printer cannot print the data. Press [ ] ( : Online) to cancel the job.
㻤㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Insert Drawer n ("n" represents a number.)
<Cause> The drawer is not inserted.
Solution Insert the drawer.
Insert toner cartridge.
<Cause> The toner cartridge is not installed or installed improperly.
Solution Install the toner cartridge properly.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
Key management file is corrupt or deleted.
<Cause> The file related to key management is broken.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. 6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>5HPRWH8,6HWWLQJV@ĺ>66/@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHOWKHQPDNHVXUHWKDW
[SSL] is set to [Off].
2. Restart the printer, and then regenerate the key and certificate and specify the settings for SSL
from the Remote UI.
"Security Settings"
3. Restart the printer.
Load paper.
<Cause> Paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the paper source (in all the
paper sources when [Paper Source] is set to [Auto] and in the specified paper source when the setting
is fixed).
Solution 1 Refill or load paper.
Solution 2
Press [ ] ( : Feeder Selection), and then select other paper source for the same paper size or larger
paper size.
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
Not enough download memory. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The memory for registering overlay forms and custom characters ran out and overflowed.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. However, the overflowed data cannot be registered.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. After the soft reset, either perform a hard reset or turn the printer back ON, increase memory
capacity and print again. (All data in the memory will be erased.)
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
Not enough memory for PDF processing.
㻤㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Cause> There is not enough memory to process a PDF file.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Decrease the size of the PDF file or divide it into multiple files, and then print again.
The PDF data may be printed properly by opening it from an application and using the printer
driver.
Not enough memory for XPS processing. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> There is not enough memory for XPS processing.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online), and continue printing. However, the data that generated the error will not be
printed correctly.
Solution 2 If images such as Progressive JPEG are handled inside the XPS, convert them to TIFF or Baseline JPEG
and then print.
Not enough spool memory. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> Because spool memory ran out, the printer cannot print.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. However, the page with which an error is occurring is not
printed.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Specify the paper size smaller, and then print again.
Solution 3
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Set [Image Refinement] to [Off], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
Solution 4 If [2-Sided Printing] is set to [On], specify [Off], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)"
Solution 5 Change the setting for [Halftones], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
Not enough system memory. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The work memory required for the printer process ran out while the system was processing
the data (mainly the graphics data and text data).
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data with which an error is occurring is not
㻥㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
printed properly.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. After the soft reset, either perform a hard reset or turn the printer back ON, increase memory
capacity and print again. (All data in the memory will be erased.)
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
Not enough work memory. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The work memory for each print mode cannot be secured.
Solution 1
Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data with which an error is occurring is not
printed properly.
IMPORTANT
When continuing printing by pressing [ ] ( : Online)
Be aware that the data of overlay or macro that is already registered may be deleted.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. After the soft reset, either perform a hard reset or turn the printer back ON, increase memory
capacity and print again. (All data in the memory will be erased.)
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
Output tray is full. Remove paper.
<Cause> The output tray is filled to the limit.
Solution Remove the paper in the output tray.
Paper is jammed.
<Cause> Paper is jammed inside the printer.
Solution
Remove the jammed paper and set the paper drawer and covers to the original position. If the printer is
not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
"Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)"
"Clearing Paper Jams (Paper Drawer)"
"Clearing Paper Jams (Duplex Unit)"
"Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Output Area)"
"Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Front Cover)"
IMPORTANT
If paper jams occur at multiple areas at the same time, the areas appear in the display by rotation.
If you removed the jammed paper without opening any cover, be sure to open and close the front cover once, and
then press [ ] ( : Online).
㻥㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
PDF error.
<Cause> PDF data which this printer cannot process was sent.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Print the PDF data in a format which this printer supports again.
PDF font error.
<Cause> PDF data which this printer cannot process was sent.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. Perform a soft reset.
"Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)"
2. Print the PDF data in a format which this printer supports again.
PDF print range error.
<Cause> The specified print range is incorrect.
Solution Specify the print range correctly, and then print again.
Print data version error.
<Cause> You tried to print from a printer driver that is not for LBP6780x.
Solution Print the data again from the printer driver for LBP6780x.
55 SD Card error. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> An SD error has occurred.
Solution 1 If [ ] ( : Online) is pressed, settings that do not use the SD card are activated. However, you cannot
print with functions that use the SD card.
Solution 2 Turn OFF the printer, and make sure that the SD card is inserted correctly.
Solution 3 Contact your local dealer for repairs.
56 SD Card error.
<Cause> An SD error has occurred.
Solution 1 Turn the printer OFF, wait for 10 seconds or longer, and then turn it ON again.
Solution 2 Run SD card quick format or standard format.
Solution 3 Contact your local dealer for repairs.
㻥㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Set below paper.
<Cause 1> The paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the paper drawer or multi-
purpose tray, or the paper source for the different paper size is selected.
Solution 1 Load the paper of the size selected in the application (or the one specified by scaling factors).
"Paper Loading and Output"
Solution 2
Press [ ] ( : Online), and then print to the currently loaded paper forcibly. If you are using the multi-
purpose tray, the setting for [MP Tray Paper Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu automatically changes to
the paper size specified in the application.
<Cause 2> The paper size specified in the application software is different from the following setting.
[MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size], [Drawer 2 Size] or [Drawer 3 Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu
Solution Specify the setting properly.
"Registering the Paper Size"
<Cause 3> Improper paper source is selected.
Solution
Specify the setting for [Paper Source] in the [Select Feeder] menu properly.
"[Select Feeder] Menu"
IMPORTANT
When the message <Set below paper.> appears
If the front cover is opened, the message may disappear. However, be sure to follow the directions
in the displayed message to change the paper.
Syntax error.
<Cause> Invalid data is sent when printing using the UFR II printer driver.
Solution 1 Press [ ] ( : Online) to continue printing from the next data. However, the page with which an error
is occurring and its subsequent pages are not printed.
Solution 2 Confirm the data to be printed, and then print again.
Turn OFF main power. Check options.
<Cause 1> The optional paper feeder is not installed properly.
Solution Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder properly, and then turn it ON again.
"Printer Installation"
<Cause 2> Any optional paper feeder is installed or removed when the printer is ON.
Solution Turn the power OFF, install or remove the paper feeder, and then turn the printer ON again.
"Printer Installation"
<Cause 3> The connector of the optional paper feeder is disconnected.
Solution Turn the printer OFF, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized
Canon dealer for servicing.
㻥㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Cause 4> A paper feeder that is not for this printer is installed.
Solution Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder for this printer, and then turn it ON again.
"Printer Installation"
XPS document data error. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause 1> The XPS data or the data extracted from the XPS data are invalid.
Solution Check to make sure that the data that was input is normal, restart it and print again.
<Cause 2> A high volume file was sent directly.
Solution 1
Press [ ] ( : Online) to cancel the job. Afterward, perform the following processes and then print
again.
Optimizing the XPS file
Dividing the XPS file into multiple files
Solution 2
Send the file again using one of the following methods.
Insert the SD card into the slot and send the file again.
"Installing SD Card "
Send the file directly from the USB memory device.
"Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) "
XPS font data error. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> Incorrect font data was received.
Solution Check the output result for missing text, and correct the data.
XPS image data error. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> Incorrect image data was received.
Solution Check the output result for missing images, and correct the data.
XPS page data error. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> Pages cannot be generated because the description is invalid.
Solution Check the output result for missing pages, and correct the data.
XPS print range error. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> The specified print page range is invalid.
Solution Check the page range, and print again.
XPS rendering error.
<Cause> An error has occurred in the XPS data rendering system.
㻥㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Solution Contact your local dealer.
XPS unsupported image error. <Auto Error Skip>
<Cause> Unsupported images such as HD Photo images are included in the XPS data.
Solution Change the images in the XPS file to TIFF or JPEG format and print again.
A4 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly.
Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note
down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
A5 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly.
Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note
down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
A7 nn ERROR ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly.
Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note
down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
D7 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly.
Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note
down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
D8 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly.
Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note
down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
D9 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.)
<Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly.
Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note
down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
㻥㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KH
Paper curls or creases.
Paper Curls
Paper Creases
Streaks (lines) appear.
White Streaks (Lines) Appear
Unevenness or smudge marks appear.
Printing Is Uneven
Printed Pages Have White Specks
Toner Stain or Toner Peeling Occurs
The Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks
The Printed Paper Has Vertical Streaks
Smudge Marks of Spattering Toner Appear around the Text or Patterns
The Back of the Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks
The Overall Print Result Is Dark
Residual Images Appear on Non-printed Areas
White Dust Is Attached to the Printed Transparencies
Printing is faint or faded.
The Overall Print Result Is Faint
Printout is skewed, missing, or has unneeded space.
The Printing Position Is Skewed
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Data Is Reduced and Printed
The Next Page Is Printed from Halfway across the Previous Page
Printed Data Lies outside Paper
Others
Blank Paper Is Output (Nothing Is Printed on the Paper)
The Overall Surface of the Paper Is Printed in Black Completely
The Last Page Cannot Be Printed
Unreadable Characters Are Printed
The Printout Is Different from What Is Displayed on Screen (Windows XP and Server 2003)
The Flap of the Printed Envelope Sticks
Poor Printout Results
㻥㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KJ
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> Damp paper is used.
Solution 1 Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package.
"Precautions for Paper"
Solution 2
Solution 2-1
If [Paper Type] is set to [Plain] in the printer driver, specify [Plain L], and then print again.
"Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
The toner may not fix onto paper well, and the printing may come out faint.
Solution 2-2
If the problem is not solved, perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Special Print Adjustment C] to [On].
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
If you specify this setting, printing speed drops.
The setting applies only to A4 or Letter size paper.
Solution 2-3
If the problem is not solved, select the tray or the drawer from which the printer feeds paper from [Curl
Correction] in [Special Print Mode] on the printer's control panel, specify [On], and then print again.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
If you specify this setting, the printing speed drops more than when [Special Print Adj. C] is set to
[On].
Solution 2-4
If the problem is not solved, specify [Off] in Solution 2-3, and then perform the following procedure in the
printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Curl Adjustment] to [On].
If you specify this setting, the printing speed drops more than when [Curl Correction] is set to [On]
Paper Curls
㻥㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
on the printer's control panel.
The setting applies only to A4 or Letter size paper.
<Cause 2> Appropriate paper is not being used.
Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer.
"Usable Paper"
<Cause 3> Paper that curls easily is output to the output tray.
Solution Switch to the sub-output tray when printing transparencies, labels, or envelopes.
"Paper Loading and Output"
㻥㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KK
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1>Paper is not loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Solution
Load the paper properly.
"Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
<Cause 2> Damp paper is used.
Solution 1 Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package.
"Precautions for Paper"
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Wrinkle Adjustment] to [Mode 1].
If the problem is not solved, specify [Mode 2].
If the problem is not solved, set [Curl Adjustment] to [On].
When you use thin paper (60 to 74 g/m²), setting [Paper Type] to [Plain L] and [Special Print
Mode C] to [On] may prevent paper creases.
"Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
[Special Print Mode C] can also be set* using the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
*The setting of [Special Print Mode C] overrides the setting of [Wrinkle Adjustment].
<Setting Method for [Curl Adjustment]>
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Curl Adjustment] to [On].
If you specify these settings, the printing speed drops in stages.
Specifying these settings may result in poor print quality.
If activating [Wrinkle Adjustment] results in poor print quality, set [Curl Adjustment] to [On]. The
print quality may improve.
Paper Creases
㻥㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KL
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The toner cartridge is almost out of toner.
Solution 1
Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, shake it gently five or six times to evenly distribute the toner,
and then reinstall the toner cartridge.
"Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
Solution 2 Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
<Cause 2> The drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorated.
Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
White Streaks (Lines) Appear
㻥㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KR
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> Paper is too moist or too dry.
Solution Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package.
"Precautions for Paper"
<Cause 2> The toner cartridge is almost out of toner.
Solution 1
Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, shake it gently five or six times to evenly distribute the toner,
and then reinstall the toner cartridge.
"Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge"
Solution 2 Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
<Cause 3> The drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorated.
Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
Printing Is Uneven
㻥㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KS
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> Appropriate paper is not being used.
Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer.
"Usable Paper"
<Cause 2> Damp paper is used.
Solution Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package.
"Precautions for Paper"
<Cause 3> The drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorated.
Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
Printed Pages Have White Specks
㻥㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KU
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The setting for [Paper Type] is not specified properly.
Solution Specify [Paper Type] properly.
"Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
<Cause 2> Appropriate paper is not being used.
Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer.
"Usable Paper"
<Cause 3> Toner may not fix onto paper completely depending on the paper type.
Solution
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Paper Source] tab.
2. Set [Paper Type] to one of the following settings.
Currently Selected
Setting Setting to be Selected
[Plain L] [Plain]
[Plain] [Heavy 1]
[Heavy 1] [Heavy 2]
If you specify [Heavy 1] or [Heavy 2], the printing speed drops.
<Cause 4> A problem is occurring inside the printer.
Solution If <Ennn-nnnn> appears in the display, follow the procedure in "The Message Indicator Is On" to solve the
problem.
Toner Stain or Toner Peeling Occurs
㻥㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0KX
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> Depending on the paper type or the operating environment, vertical streaks may
appear on the printed paper.
Solution 1 Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package.
"Precautions for Paper"
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Special Print Adjustment C] to [On].
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
Resetting the setting to [Off] due to change in paper type or operating environment may also avoid
vertical streaks appearing on the printed paper. In this case, reset the setting to [Off].
If you specify this setting, printing speed drops.
Solution 3
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Special Print Adjustment A] to [Mode 1].
If the problem is not solved, specify [Mode 2].
If the problem is not solved, specify [Mode 3].
If the problem is not solved, specify [Mode 4].
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
Resetting the setting to [Off] due to change in paper type or operating environment may also avoid
vertical streaks appearing on the printed paper.
In this case, reset the setting to [Off].
Vertical streaks are alleviated by specifying a setting between [Mode 1] and [Mode 4]. However,
this decreases print density compared to when [Off] is specified.
This may also make outlines appear to be blurred or slightly jagged.
If outlines are jagged, select [Off].
The Printed Paper Has Vertical Streaks
㻥㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
<Cause 2> The toner cartridge was replaced, or the printer was not printed for a long period
of time.
Solution
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Special Print Adjustment B] to [Mode 1].
If the problem is not solved, specify [Mode 2].
If the problem is not solved, specify [Mode 3].
Selecting [Off] may also avoid vertical streaks appearing on the printed paper.
In this case, reset the setting to [Off].
If you specify this setting, printing speed may drop.
<Cause 3> Damp and thin paper (60 to 74 g/m²) is used.
Solution
In the printer driver, set [Paper Type] to [Plain L] and [Special Print Mode C] to [On].
"Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing"
[Special Print Mode C] can also be set using the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
㻥㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L0
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> The size of the print data was larger than that of the loaded paper.
Solution Check if the size of the print data matches that of the loaded paper.
The Back of the Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks
㻥㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L1
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The setting for [Toner Density] is not appropriate.
Solution
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Quality] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Adjust [Toner Density].
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
<Cause 2> The printer is exposed to direct sunlight or strong light.
Solution Move the printer.
"Moving the Printer"
The Overall Print Result Is Dark
㻥㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L2
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> Appropriate paper is not being used.
Solution 1 Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer.
"Usable Paper"
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. If [Special Print Adj. D] is set to [Off], specify [On].
If [On] is specified, vertical streaks may appear on the printed paper.
"The Printed Paper Has Vertical Streaks"
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
<Cause 2> The drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorated.
Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
Residual Images Appear on Non-printed Areas
㻥㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L3
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> You print transparencies after printing paper other than transparency continuously.
Solution Wipe and remove the chipped paper with a soft cloth.
White Dust Is Attached to the Printed Transparencies
㻥㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L4
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The setting for [Toner Density] is not appropriate.
Solution
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Quality] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Adjust [Toner Density].
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
<Cause 2> [Toner Save] is enabled.
Solution
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
UFR II Printer Driver
1. Display the [Quality] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Toner Save] to [Off].
PCL/PS Printer Driver
See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver.
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)"
The Overall Print Result Is Faint
㻥㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L5
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> [Gutter] is specified.
Solution
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Gutter].
3. Set [Gutter] to "0."
You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel.
"[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)"
<Cause 2> [Offset Y] and [Offset X] are specified.
Solution Set [Offset Y] and [Offset X] to "0."
"Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs"
<Cause 3> "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application are not specified properly.
Solution Specify the settings for "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application properly.
See the instruction manual supplied with the application.
<Cause 4> The printing position is adjusted in [Adj. Start Position].
Solution Adjust the printing position to an appropriate value in [Adj. Start Position].
"Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source"
The Printing Position Is Skewed
㻥㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0RA
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The setting for the scaling factor is not appropriate.
Solution 1
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Page Setup] tab.
2. Clear the [Manual Scaling] check box.
If the [Manual Scaling] check box is cleared, the scale factor will be set according to [Page Size]
and [Output Size] automatically.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Page Setup] tab.
2. Select the [Manual Scaling] check box, and then specify an appropriate scale factor according
to the paper size to be used.
<Cause 2> Paper is not loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Solution 1
Load the paper properly.
"Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
<Cause 3> A document with no margins was printed.
Solution 1 Data is printed with a margin of 5 mm (10 mm for envelopes). Provide a margin around the data.
"Printable Area"
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure if you are using the printer driver.
PCL/UFR II Printer Driver
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Expand Print Region and Print] to [On].
PS Printer Driver
See Help of the PS printer driver.
The edges of the printout may be partly missing, depending on the settings of the document to be
printed.
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
㻥㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L7
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> The setting for the scaling factor is not appropriate.
Solution 1
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Page Setup] tab.
2. Clear the [Manual Scaling] check box.
If the [Manual Scaling] check box is cleared, the scale factor will be set according to [Page Size]
and [Output Size] automatically.
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Page Setup] tab.
2. Select the [Manual Scaling] check box, and then specify an appropriate scale factor according
to the paper size to be used.
Data Is Reduced and Printed
㻥㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L8
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> "Line Spacing" or "Lines/Page" in the application is not specified properly.
Solution
Specify the settings for "Line Spacing" or "Lines/Page" in the application so that the data fits in one page,
and then print again.
See the instruction manual supplied with the application.
<Cause 2> When [Auto Mode Selection] is set to [Auto Selection], the number of seconds
specified in [Timeout Time] is too short.
Solution
Set [Auto Mode Selection] to a setting other than [Auto Selection], or increase the number of seconds
specified in [Timeout Time] sufficiently.
"[Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options)"
"[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)"
The Next Page Is Printed from Halfway across the Previous Page
㻥㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0L9
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> When the following settings in the [Select Feeder] menu are set to [Mixed Sizes],
custom size paper whose long edges are 215.9 mm or less is loaded in landscape orientation
and printed (only when the UFR II printer driver is used).
Size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray
Drawer N (N = 1, 2, 3) size
Solution Load the paper in portrait orientation, and then print again.
<Cause 2> When the UFR II printer driver was not used, custom size paper was loaded in
portrait orientation to be printed.
Solution Load the paper in landscape orientation, and then print again.
<Cause 3> Paper of the size smaller than the data size is loaded.
Solution
Load the paper of the size that matches the data size or print the data in the reduced size that matches
the paper size.
Scaling Documents
<Cause 4> Paper is not loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Solution
Load the paper properly.
"Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer"
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray"
<Cause 5> The printing position is adjusted in [Adj. Start Position].
Solution The printing position is adjusted in [Adj. Start Position].
"Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source"
Printed Data Lies outside Paper
㻥㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LA
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The toner cartridge was installed with the sealing tape still attached.
Solution Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, pull out the sealing tape, and reinstall the toner cartridge.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
<Cause 2> Multiple sheets of paper are fed at a time.
Solution
Fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface.
<Cause 3> The rubber pad in the paper drawer is dirty.
Solution Clean the rubber pad in the paper drawer.
"Cleaning the rubber pad in the paper drawer"
<Cause 4> The size of the paper loaded in a paper source is different from the following
settings.
Setting for [Output Size] in the [Page Setup] tab in the printer driver
[MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size], [Drawer 2 Size] or [Drawer 3 Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu
Solution When the message <Check Paper Size> appears in the display, perform the described solutions in "A
Message Appears in the Control Panel."
Blank Paper Is Output (Nothing Is Printed on the Paper)
㻥㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LC
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The drum in any of the toner cartridges has deteriorated or is damaged.
Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
"Toner Cartridge Replacement"
<Cause 2> A problem is occurring inside the printer.
Solution If <Ennn-nnnn> appears in the display, follow the procedure in "The Message Indicator Is On" to solve the
problem.
The Overall Surface of the Paper Is Printed in Black Completely
㻥㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LE
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> The command that notifies of the end of the data is not sent from the computer. (The
(Job) indicator is on.)
Solution
Press [ ] ( : Online) to place the printer offline, and then select [Form Feed] in the Reset menu.
"Outputting Data (Forced Output)"
If you print using an application that does not have a printing function, [Form Feed] is performed
because the last page in which data is less than one page remains in the memory.
The Last Page Cannot Be Printed
㻥㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LF
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The data is printed from Windows without the supplied printer driver installed for
Windows.
Solution Install the supplied printer driver for Windows, and then print again.
For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide."
<Cause 2> The printer setting in the DOS application is not appropriate.
Solution Specify the printer setting in the DOS application to the one that is compatible with this printer.
Unreadable Characters Are Printed
㻥㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LH
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> This problem may occur in some applications depending on the processing type of
the print data.
Solution
If you are using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, performing the following procedure may be able to solve the
problem.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Change the [EMF Spooling] setting.
The Printout Is Different from What Is Displayed on Screen (Windows XP
and Server 2003)
㻥㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LK
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> You are using paper which tends to be fed at a time.
Solution
Fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface.
<Cause 2> The rubber pad in the paper drawer is dirty.
Solution Clean the rubber pad in the paper drawer.
"Cleaning the rubber pad in the paper drawer"
Multiple Sheets of Paper Are Fed at a Time
㻥㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LL
Cleaning the rubber pad in the paper drawer may prevent the printer from frequently feeding multiple sheets of paper at a
time.
If you have any questions on how to clean the rubber pad in the paper drawer, or if you feel uncomfortable cleaning the
rubber pad in the paper drawer by yourself, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
IMPORTANT
Do not use cleaning agents or detergents.
When wiping the rubber pad in the paper drawer, use a cloth dampened with water and well wrung out. Do not use
cleaning agents or detergents, including ones containing grease or oil.
Do not touch the rubber pad in the paper drawer directly with your hand.
When cleaning the rubber pad in the paper drawer, make sure not to touch it directly with your hand.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
If the paper feeder is installed, pull out the paper drawer of the paper feeder also.
2
Clean the rubber pad in the paper drawer.
Making sure not to touch the rubber pad in the paper drawer directly with your hand, wipe the rubber pad in the paper
drawer with a cloth dampened with water and well wrung out.
3
Set the paper drawer in the printer.
Cleaning the rubber pad in the paper drawer
㻥㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
If the paper feeder is installed, insert the paper drawer of the paper feeder also.
㻥㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LR
The Keys on the Control Panel Do Not Function
The SD Card Cannot Be Used
Jobs Cannot Be Saved
SSL Cannot Be Enabled
When SSL Is Enabled, the Remote UI Does Not Start, or the IPP Printing Cannot Be
Performed
The Printer Cannot Be Accessed from the Remote UI or Network Related Utility
Software
Restricting the Users Is Not Possible
Noise Is Heard during Printing
Other Problems
㻥㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LS
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1 > Here is data remaining in the memory. (The (Job) indicator is on.)
Solution Press [ ] ( : Online) to place the printer offline, and then select [Form Feed] in the Reset menu.
"Outputting Data (Forced Output)"
<Cause 2> The keylock function is enabled. (The "Pi" alarm sounds when the key is pressed
and <Key locked.> appears in the display.)
Solution Disable the keylock function from the Remote UI. Contact the printer administrator.
The Keys on the Control Panel Do Not Function
㻥㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LU
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> [SD Card] in the Control Menu options in the Setup menu is set to [Off].
Solution
Set [SD Card] to [On], and then perform a hard reset.
"[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)"
"Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)"
<Cause 2> An error has occurred in the SD card.
Solution
Perform formatting in [SD Card Maintenance] in the User Maintenance options in the Setup menu.
If the same error still occurs, replace the SD card.
"[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)"
"Installing SD Card "
<Cause 3> The SD card is not installed properly.
Solution Turn the printer OFF, and then check if the SD card is installed properly.
"Installing SD Card "
<Cause 4> The data cannot be saved on the SD card because there is not sufficient free
space in the SD card.
Solution
Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card.
"Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) "
"Remote UI"
<Cause 5> The SD card is write-protected.
Solution Check that the SD card is not write-protected. If the card is write-protected, release the protection, and
then insert the card.
The SD Card Cannot Be Used
㻥㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LW
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause 1> The data cannot be saved on the SD card because there is not sufficient free
space in the SD card.
Solution 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ ] ( : Online), ignoring the print data.
The data of 3 GB or larger in total cannot be saved.
Solution 2
Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card.
"Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) "
"Remote UI"
<Cause 2> The number of the jobs exceeded the number of jobs you can save in the SD card.
Solution 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ ] ( : Online), ignoring the print data. Up to 1000 jobs can
be saved all together.
Solution 2
Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card.
"Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) "
"Remote UI"
Jobs Cannot Be Saved
㻥㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LX
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> The key pair and its certificate to be used are not registered.
Solution
Register the key pair and server certificate that are used.
"Setting Keys and Certificates"
In order to use the SSL encryption communication function, it is necessary to create keys and
certificates and to register the key pair and server certificate that are used.
SSL Cannot Be Enabled
㻥㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0LY
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> The file related to key management is broken.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. 6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>5HPRWH8,6HWWLQJV@ĺ>66/@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHODQGWKHQPDNHVXUH
that [SSL] is set to [Off].
2. Restart the printer.
3. Regenerate the key and certificate and specify the settings for SSL from the Remote UI.
"Setting Keys and Certificates"
4. Restart the printer.
When SSL Is Enabled, the Remote UI Does Not Start, or the IPP Printing
Cannot Be Performed
㻥㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R0
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> The IP Address Filter or MAC Address Filter is set to On.
Solution
6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHODQGWKHQPDNHVXUHWKDW>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@LVVHW
to [Off].
"[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)"
If you have once set it to [Off], set it back to [On] after confirmation of the setting.
Use the control panel to make a setting for the address filter function.
The Printer Cannot Be Accessed from the Remote UI or Network
Related Utility Software
㻥㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R1
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> The IP Address Filter or MAC Address Filter is not set to On.
Solution
6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHODQGWKHQPDNHVXUHWKDW>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@LVVHW
to [On].
"[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)"
Use the control panel to make a setting for the address filter function.
Restricting the Users Is Not Possible
㻥㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R2
Perform the following procedure.
<Cause> This printer may produce noise when transporting A4 or Letter size paper during
printing.
Solution
Perform the following procedure.
1. Select [Special Print Adj. C] in [User Maintenance].
2. Set [Special Print Adj. C] to [On].
Selecting [On] decreases the printing speed. If the noise does not disturb you, we recommend that
you select [Off].
Noise Is Heard during Printing
㻥㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R3
If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line.
Please have the following information ready when contacting the Canon:
Product name (LBP6780x)
Serial number (see the following illustration to find the location of the serial number.)
Place of purchase
Nature of the problem
Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results
WARNING
If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or an odd odor
Turn OFF the power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact the Canon Customer Care Center. Do
not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.
IMPORTANT
If you attempt to repair the machine by yourself
It may void the limited warranty.
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
㻥㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R5
Displaying the Top Page of the User Manual CD-ROM
Checking the IP Address Using the PING Command
Checking the Processor Version of Windows Vista, 7, or Server 2008
Printing a Test Page in Windows
Checking the Bi-directional Communication
Displaying the Printer Folder
Checking Printers in the Print Server
Checking the Port
Changing the Printing Protocol
Setting for [Device Type] when Setting a Port
Displaying the Top Page of the User Manual CD-ROM
If the top page of the User Manual CD-ROM does not appear even after inserting the CD-ROM, perform the following
procedure.
The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the
computer you are using.
1. From the [Start] menu, select [Run].
2. Enter "D:\Maninst.exe."
3. Click [OK].
1. Enter "D:\Maninst.exe" in [Search programs and files] or [Start Search] under the [Start] menu.
2. Press the [ENTER] key on the keyboard.
Checking the IP Address Using the PING Command
1
Run Command Prompt.
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@
2
Enter "ping <the IP address of the printer>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
Input example: "ping 192.168.0.215"
Correctly enter the IP address which is set for the printer. If the wrong IP address is entered, you cannot obtain an
appropriate check result.
3
Check the displayed result.
When "Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss)," is displayed
The IP address is set properly.
Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows
㻥㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
When "Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss)," is displayed
Ask your network administrator about the problem.
4
Enter "exit", and then press [ENTER] on the keyboard to exit Command Prompt.
NOTE
When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP
Consult your network administrator and perform either of the following settings.
Set the DNS Dynamic Update function.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
Configure DHCP or other settings so that the same IP address is always assigned to the printer when the printer is
started.
"Configuring the Protocol Settings"
Checking and configuring the subnet
Enter "ipconfig" as a command in Command Prompt.
The network setting information of the computer appears. Confirm that the computer and printer are on the same subnet.
Example:
Setting in a computer
Subnet mask: "255.255.255.0"
IP Address: "192.168.0.10"
The IP address of the printer needs to be "192.168.0.xxx". (xxx indicates
an arbitrary number.)
Checking the Processor Version of Windows Vista, 7, or Server 2008
If you are not sure whether you are using 32-bit Windows Vista/7/Server 2008 or 64-bit Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, you
can check that using the following procedure.
1
From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel].
2
Display [System].
&OLFN>6\VWHPDQG6HFXULW\@RU>6\VWHPDQG0DLQWHQDQFH@ĺ>6\VWHP@
Double-click [System].
3
Check the processor version.
For a 32-bit operating system
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For a 64-bit operating system
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
㻥㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check the operations of the printer driver by printing a test page in Windows.
1
Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer.
"Paper Loading and Output"
2
Open the printer folder.
"Displaying the Printer Folder"
3
Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-
up menu.
4
Print a test page.
(1) Display the [General] tab.
(2) Click [Print Test Page] to print a test page.
㻥㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Checking the Bi-directional Communication
1
Open the printer folder.
"Displaying the Printer Folder"
2
Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-
up menu.
3
Check the bi-directional communication.
(1) Display the [Ports] tab.
(2) Check the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is selected.
㻥㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
IMPORTANT
Do not clear the [Enable bidirectional support] check box.
If the check box is cleared, you cannot perform printing.
Displaying the Printer Folder
From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>3ULQWHUVDQG2WKHU+DUGZDUH@ĺ>3ULQWHUVDQG)D[HV@
From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printer].
From the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then double-click [Printers].
Checking Printers in the Print Server
1
Display [Windows Explorer].
)URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>:LQGRZV([SORUHU@
2
Check printers in the print server.
(1) Select the print server from [Network] or [My Network Places].
(2) Check the icon for this printer is displayed.
㻥㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Changing the Printing Protocol
Change the printing protocol to LPR and specify the setting for the LPR byte count using the following procedure.
1
Open the printer folder.
"Displaying the Printer Folder"
2
Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-
up menu.
3
Display the [Ports] tab.
4
Click [Configure Port].
㻥㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
5
Perform the following procedure.
(1) To change the printing protocol to LPR, select [LPR] for [Protocol].
(2) To enable the LPR byte count, select the [LPR Byte Counting Enabled] check box.
6
Click [OK].
Setting for [Device Type] when Setting a Port
If the printer cannot be detected when setting a port, set [Device Type] as follows.
(1) Select [Standard], and then select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100].
(2) Click [Next].
㻥㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻥㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0RC
This printer supports Windows 8/Server 2012 operating system. For operation and description on Windows 8/Server 2012,
refer to Windows Vista/7 sections. This section describes notes on using this printer with Windows 8/Server 2012. Read
this section carefully before using the printer.
Precautions
Use the desktop mode when performing the followings.
Installing/Uninstalling the printer driver
Setting the printer driver *
*Please note that the setting specified on the desktop may not be reflected to all Windows Store applications.
For Windows 2000 Users
This printer does not support Windows 2000. For details on the latest status of the supported operating systems and
service packs, see the Canon web site (http://www.canon.com/).
For Windows 8/Server 2012 Users
㻥㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R6
Configuration Page
Network Status Print
Printing Position Adjustment Print
IMPORTANT
The following lists are samples. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by your printer.
Configuration Page
The printer information and the settings for printing environment are printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu.
3. Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4. Select [Yes] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page.
Network Status Print
Prints the version number and the settings of the print server equipped with this printer.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu.
3. Select [Network Status Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4. Select [Yes] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page.
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
㻥㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
Printing Position Adjustment Print
Displays the current printing positions of each paper source. Adjust the printing positions referring to this print. For more
details, see "Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source."
1. Press [ ] ( : Feeder Selection).
2. Select [Paper Source] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
3. Select the paper source that you want to check the printing position using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4. Press [ ] ( : Online).
5. Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ] ( : Online).
6. Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display [Utility Menu] menu.
7. Select [Printing Pos. Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
8. Select [Yes] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page.
㻥㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R7
PCL Font List
PS Configuration Page
PS Font List
IMPORTANT
The following lists are samples. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by your printer.
PCL Font List
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode is printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu.
3. Select [PCL Utility] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4. Select [Font List] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5. Select [Yes] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page.
PS Configuration Page
The settings of the [PS] options are printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu.
3. Select [PS Utility] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4. Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5. Select [Yes] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page.
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode
㻥㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
PS Font List
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PS mode is printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [ ] ( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu.
3. Select [PS Utility] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
4. Select [Font List] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK].
5. Select [Yes] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page.
㻥㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R8
The fonts lists printed from the [Utility Menu] menu are a comprehensive listing of all fonts currently available. The listing
contains the names and print samples of the fonts stored on the printer.
Scalable Fonts (PCL)
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)
PCL Fonts for Windows
Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Font Samples
㻥㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻥㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻥㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)
PCL Fonts for Windows
㻥㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
NOTE
66 PCL fonts for Windows are included in the User Manual CD-ROM supplied with this printer.
㻥㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
㻥㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜
0978-0R9
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES
http://www.canon.com/
Office Locations
㻥㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻣㻜